WEST BEND, WI
ST. JOSEPH’S HOSPITAL – BREAST IMAGING
#931581
O&M MANUAL
W133 N5030 Campbell Drive ● Menomonee Falls, WI 53051
Tel: (262) 781-8230 ● Fax: (262) 781-1680
ST. JOSEPH’S HOSPITAL - BREAST IMAGING
STAFF ELECTRIC CO.
COMPANY CONTACTS
(262) 781-8230
www.staffelectric.com
PROJECT MANAGER:
GREG STROM
TEL:
CELL:
EMAIL:
FOREMAN:
(262) 781-8230
(414) 406-9546
gstrom@staffelectric.com
ALEX GAETH
CELL:
EMAIL:
(414) 406-9552
agaeth@staffelectric.com
W133 N5030 CAMPBELL DRIVE • MENOMONEE FALLS, WISCONSIN 53051 • TEL 262-781-8230 • FAX 262-781-1680
MAILING ADDRESS • P.O. BOX 917 • BUTLER, WISCONSIN 53007-0917
Viking Electric - Lighting Department
2900 N.112th ST P.O. Box 26068 Wauwatosa, WI 53226 (414)475-6900 FAX (414)475-6607 Toll Free (800)333-7650
ST. JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
STAFF ELECTRIC
TYPE
C1
C1
CB
CB
D
D-STEP
DE
DE
DE
XA
QTY
MFG
CREE
CREE
HUBBELL
SYLVANIA
LITHONIA
LITHONIA
JUNO
JUNO
SYLVANIA
LITHONIA
WARRANTIES
DESCRIPTION
LT6WH
LR6-10L-30K-120V-A-DR
JT822-3-17-G-FS-A12-EU
FO17835ECO
2RTL2 33L EZ1 LP835
2RTL2 33L SLD LP835
TC2
232CWH
150A21WRP120V
LE S 1 G
TYPE C1
PART# LT6WH
JOB: ST. JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
LT6
LR6 Trim Accessory
Product Description
LT6 trim accessories are designed for easy snap-in attachment to the LR6 family of downlights,
providing a clean aperture appearance that decreases high angle brightness with minimal effect on
lumen output. With a variety of colored finishes to choose from, the LT6 is a spec grade solution that
compliments a variety of interior designs.
LT6 Installed
LT6A
Product Specifications
CONSTRUCTION & MATERIALS
• Lightweight anodized aluminum trim designed for easy snap-in available in a variety of finishes.
Reference back page for finish options
• Models A, AW, AP, and AB feature a diffuse anodized reflector with painted white flange
LT6AW
• WH model features a smooth white painted reflector and flange
• BB model is made of a specialized ABS thermoplastic material with flat black reflector and flange
Ordering Information
Example: LT6A
LTAP
Product
Shallow Recess
Deep Recess
LT6A
Diffuse anodized finish trim
LT6AW
Wheat diffuse anodized finish trim
LT6AP
Pewter diffuse anodized finish trim
LT6AB
Black anodized finish trim
LT6WH
Smooth white trim
LT6BB
Flat black reflector and trim
LT6A-DR
Diffuse anodized finish trim
LT6AW-DR
Wheat diffuse anodized finish trim
LT6AP-DR
Pewter diffuse anodized finish trim
LT6AB-DR
Black anodized finish trim
LT6WH-DR
Smooth white trim
LT6BB-DR
Flat black reflector and trim
LT6AB
LT6WH
INSTALLATION
• Guide trim’s retaining ring onto tabs on LR6 downlight lens
• Rotate clockwise until tight fit is achieved
LT6BB
• Light engine and trim reflector depth must match for appropriate fit
Rev. Date: V2 10/05/2016
© 2016 Cree, Inc. and/or one of its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. For informational purposes only. Content is subject to change.
Patent www.cree.com/patents. Cree® is a registered trademark and the Cree logo is a trademark of Cree, Inc.
US: lighting.cree.com/lighting
T (800) 236-6800 F (262) 504-5415
Canada: www.cree.com/canada
T (800) 473-1234 F (800) 890-7507
TYPE C1
PART# LR6-10L-30K-120V-A-DR
JOB: ST. JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
LR6-10L
6" LED Downlight
Product Description
The LR6-10L LED downlight delivers 1000 lumens of exceptional 90+ CRI light while achieving 90 lumens
SHUZDWW7KLVEUHDNWKURXJKSHUIRUPDQFHLVDFKLHYHGE\FRPELQLQJWKHKLJKHIͤFDF\DQGKLJKTXDOLW\OLJKW
of Cree TrueWhite® Technology, with an integrated driver and thermal management design. The LR6-10L is
available in warm or neutral color temperatures and has a variety of trim options. It easily installs into Cree
VL[LQFK*8KRXVLQJVRUPD\EHUHWURͤWWHGZLWKD*8ZKLSDGDSWHU
Applications:&RPPHUFLDOQHZFRQVWUXFWLRQDQGUHWURͤW
Performance Summary
Utilizes Cree TrueWhite® Technology
Active Color Management
Delivered Light Output: 1000 lumens
Input Power: 11 watts
CRI: 90
CCT: 2700K, 3000K, 3500K, 4000K
Limited Warranty†: 10 years
Lifetime: Designed to last 50,000 hours
Dimming: Dimmable to 5%*
5.8"
(147mm)
Housing & Accessories
Reference Housing & Accessory documents for more details.
Trims
LT6A-DR
'LIIXVHDQRGL]HGͤQLVK
LT6AW-DR
:KHDWGLIIXVHDQRGL]HGͤQLVK
LT6AP-DR
3HZWHUGLIIXVHDQRGL]HGͤQLVK
T6AB-DR
%ODFNDQRGL]HGͤQLVK
LT6WH-DR
6PRRWKZKLWH
LT6BB-DR
)ODWEODFNͤQLVKWULPDQGUHIOHFWRU
5.7"
(145mm)
7.5"
(191mm)
Housing (Edison or GU24)
H6
$UFKLWHFWXUDO
RC6
New Construction
RR6
5HWURͤW
SC6
&\OLQGULFDO6XUIDFH0RXQW
SC6-CM
&\OLQGULFDO&RUG0RXQW
SC6-WM
&\OLQGULFDO:DOO0RXQW
Click below to select Quick Ship products
LR6-10L-35K-120V-A-DR
Ordering Information
Example: LR6-10L-35K-120V-A-DR
LR6
10L
Series
Lumen Output
LR6
10L
11W 1000 lumens - 90 LPW
For full list of Cree Quick Ship products visit www.cree.com/lighting/quickship
120V
A
DR
Color Temperature
Voltage
Version
Options
27K
2700 Kelvin
30K
3000 Kelvin
35K
3500 Kelvin
40K
4000 Kelvin
120V
120 Volts - GU24 Base
A
Version
DR
'HHS5HFHVVŖ6KLHOG
5HIHUHQFHZZZFUHHFRPOLJKWLQJIRUUHFRPPHQGHGGLPPHUV
̻6HHZZZFUHHFRPOLJKWLQJSURGXFWVZDUUUDQW\IRUZDUUDQW\WHUPV
Rev. Date: V2 08/14/2014
US: www.cree.com/lighting
T (800) 236-6800 F (262) 504-5415
Canada: www.cree.com/canada
T (800) 473-1234 F (800) 890-7507
LR6–10L
Product Specifications
Photometry
CREE TRUEWHITE® TECHNOLOGY
$UHYROXWLRQDU\ZD\WRJHQHUDWHKLJKTXDOLW\ZKLWHOLJKW&UHH7UXH:KLWH®7HFKQRORJ\LV
DSDWHQWHGDSSURDFKWKDWGHOLYHUVDQH[FOXVLYHFRPELQDWLRQRI&5,EHDXWLIXOOLJKW
FKDUDFWHULVWLFVDQGOLIHORQJFRORUFRQVLVWHQF\DOOZKLOHPDLQWDLQLQJKLJKOXPLQRXVHIͤFDF\
a true no compromise solution.
CONSTRUCTION & MATERIALS
• 'XUDEOHDOXPLQXPKRXVLQJSURWHFWVWKHOLJKWVRXUFH$GMXVWDEOHIOLSFOLSVSURYLGH
UREXVWUHWHQWLRQIRUIOXVKFHLOLQJͤW
• 7KHUPDOPDQDJHPHQWV\VWHPXVHVLQWHJUDOKHDWVLQNWRFRQGXFWKHDWDZD\IURP
/('VIRURSWLPDOSHUIRUPDQFH/('MXQFWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHVVWD\EHORZVSHFLͤHG
PD[LPXPHYHQZKHQLQVWDOOHGLQZLWKZRUVWFDVHLQVWDOODWLRQV
LR6-10L
0
90
Intensity (Candlepower)
Summary
75
200
60
• 6XLWDEOHIRULQVXODWHGDQGQRQLQVXODWHGFHLOLQJV
• 2QHSLHFHDOXPLQXPORZHUUHIOHFWRUUHGLUHFWVOLJKWZKLOHDOVRFRQGXFWLQJKHDWDZD\
IURP/('V,WFUHDWHVDFRPIRUWDEOHYLVXDOWUDQVLWLRQIURPWKHOHQVWRWKHFHLOLQJSODQH
DQGHDVLO\DFFRPPRGDWHV/7VQDSLQWULPV
45
400
OPTICAL SYSTEM
• 8QLTXHFRPELQDWLRQRIUHIOHFWLYHDQGUHIUDFWLYHRSWLFDOFRPSRQHQWVDFKLHYHVD
XQLIRUPFRPIRUWDEOHDSSHDUDQFHZKLOHHOLPLQDWLQJSL[HODWLRQKRWVSRWVDQG
PLQLPL]LQJJODUH
• &RPSRQHQWVZRUNWRJHWKHUWRRSWLPL]HGLVWULEXWLRQEDODQFLQJWKHGHOLYHU\RIKLJK
LOOXPLQDQFHOHYHOVRQKRUL]RQWDOVXUIDFHVZLWKDQLGHDODPRXQWRIOLJKWRQZDOOVDQG
YHUWLFDOVXUIDFHV7KLVLQFUHDVHVWKHSHUFHSWLRQRIVSDFLRXVQHVV
• 'HHSVHWGLIIXVLQJOHQVVKLHOGVGLUHFWYLHZRI/('VDQGSURYLGHVJUHDWHUYLVXDOFXWRII
600
0
15
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
% Lamp
% Fix
• Input Voltage:9+]
0-30
424
42.42%
42.42%
0-40
629
62.89%
62.89%
0-60
897
89.71%
89.71%
0-90
1000
100%
100%
• F8/XV/LVWHG
597
5°
593
15°
559
25°
463
35°
329
45°
207
55°
120
65°
61
75°
32
85°
7
90°
0
30
• Power Factor: > 0.9
REGULATORY & VOLUNTARY QUALIFICATIONS
• (1(5*<67$5®TXDOLͤHG
Mean CP
0°
0°
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
• ,QWHJUDOKLJKHIͤFLHQF\GULYHUDQGSRZHUVXSSO\
• Dimming:'LPPDEOHWRZLWKFHUWDLQLQFDQGHVFHQWGLPPHUV
Angle
5HIHUHQFHZZZFUHHFRPOLJKWLQJIRUGHWDLOHGSKRWRPHWULFGDWD
• ([FHHGV&DOLIRUQLD7LWOHKLJKHIͤFDF\OXPLQDLUHUHTXLUHPHQWV
• 6XLWDEOHIRUZHWORFDWLRQV
Installation
5HIHUHQFHZZZFUHHFRPOLJKWLQJIRUUHFRPPHQGHGGLPPHUV
• 'HVLJQHGWRHDVLO\LQVWDOOLQVWDQGDUGKRXVLQJV
IURP&UHHDQGRWKHUPDQXIDFWXUHUV
• 4XLFNLQVWDOOV\VWHPXWLOL]HVDXQLTXHUHWHQWLRQ
IHDWXUH6LPSO\DWWDFKVRFNHWWR/5/0RYH
OLJKWWRUHDG\SRVLWLRQDQGVOLGHLQWRKRXVLQJ
NOTE:5HIHUHQFHZZZFUHHFRPOLJKWLQJIRUGHWDLOHGLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQV
5HIHUHQFHZZZFUHHFRPOLJKWLQJIRUDOLVWRIFRPSDWLEOHKRXVLQJV
Application Reference
Open Space
6SDFLQJ
Corridor
Lumens
Wattage
LPW
4x4
6x6
w/ft
Average FC
6SDFLQJ
0.64
59
4' on Center
2
Lumens
Wattage
LPW
w/ft2
Average FC
0.42
21
0.30
28
6' on Center
0.28
14
8x8
0.16
15
8' on Center
0.21
10
10 x 10
0.11
10
10' on Center
0.18
9
1000
11
90
1000
&HLOLQJ5HIOHFWDQFHVZRUNSODQH//),QLWLDO2SHQ6SDFH̵[̵[
11
90
&HLOLQJ5HIOHFWDQFHV/LJKWOHYHOVRQWKHJURXQG//),QLWLDO&RUULGRU̵:LGH[̵/RQJ
© 2014 Cree, Inc. and/or one of its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. For informational purposes only. Content is
subject to change. See www.cree.com/patents for patents that cover these products. See www.cree.com/
OLJKWLQJIRUZDUUDQW\DQGVSHFLͤFDWLRQV&UHH®, the Cree logo, Cree TrueWhite®, TrueWhite®, and the Cree TrueWhite
Technology logo are registered trademarks and LR6™ and the Quick Ship logo are trademarks of Cree, Inc.
US: www.cree.com/lighting
T (800) 236-6800 F (262) 504-5415
Canada: www.cree.com/canada
T (800) 473-1234 F (800) 890-7507
JT822
2' × 2' Dedicated T8 Lensed Troffer / 2, 3, or 4-Lamp T8, TT, U-Bent
PROJECT INFORMATION
ST. JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
CB
Project Name
Type
PART# JT822-3-17-G-FS-A12-EU
Catalog No.
Date
CONSTRUCTION
FEATURES
• Rotary action cam latches. Smooth operating for secure
shielding retention
• Corner hinging for easy insertion and removal of
shielding frame
• Flush steel shielding frame, screw assembled for easy
diffuser replacement
• Housing ends secured by unique corner interlock
and screws
• Metal to metal light leak protection on all four sides of
shielding frame
• Rotary lock lampholders for positive lamp contact
• Heat sink embossments behind ballasts for cooler operation,
longer life
• Recessed, surface or cable mount
• UL listed 1598
Housing is constructed of heavy gauge steel, die
formed for extra rigidity. Door frame hinges and
latches from either side. Wireway accessible from
below for upgrades or maintenance.
BALLASTS
Energy efficient, thermally protected, automatic
resetting, Class “P”, high power factor, sound
rated A, unless otherwise specified. For a specific
vendor and/or ballast, specify as option. CEE NEMA
Premium compliant.
ELECTRICAL
Standard class "P," thermally protected,
autoresetting HPF ballast, sound rated A. CEE
NEMA Premium compliant. All ballast leads extend
a minimum of 6" through access location. NEC/
CECcompliant ballast disconnect is standard.
FINISH
All metal parts processed with a phase phosphate
bonding treatment. Grid units are pre-painted with
high gloss baked white enamel, 86% reflective.
Polyester powder coat paint after fabrication (PAF)
option available, reflectance 90%.
ORDERING INFORMATION
JT8
22
–
MODEL
JT8 Dedicated
T8 Lensed
Troffer
SIZE
NO. OF
LAMPS
2 Two
3 Three
4 Four
22 2' × 2'
LAMP TYPE
17 2', T8: 17 Watt (Two, three, or four
lamps)
31U1 U-Bent, 15⁄8" Leg Spacing T8: 31
Watt (Two or three lamps)
32U6 U-Bent, 6" Leg Spacing T8: 32 Watt
(Two lamps only)
40TT Twin Tube Compact Fluorescent: 40
Watt (Two or three lamps)
CEILING COMPATIBILITY
Designed for recessed installation in standard
inverted tee grid ceilings (G), recessed installation in
hard ceilings (G with FK accessory), Surface mount
at ceiling plane (SM) or cable mount suspension
below ceiling plane (CM). For compatibility with
specific ceilings contact your Hubbell Lighting
representative.
CERTIFICATION
All luminaires are built to UL 1598 standards and
bear appropriate UL and cUL or CSA labels. Damp
location labeling is standard. Emergency-equipped
fixtures labeled UL 924. UL Sanitation Approved.
EXAMPLE JT822-232U6G-FSA12-EU-FO730U6-C388
–
–
–
CEILING TYPE
SHIELDING
VOLTAGE
OPTIONS
G Inverted T-Bar1
SM Surface Mount
CM Cable Mount2
A12 Pattern 12 Acrylic
0.100" Nominal
(Std.)
A12.125 Pattern 12 Acrylic
0.125" Nominal
A19 Pattern 19 Acrylic
0.156" Male Prism
PC1 Silver Parabolic
Louver
½" × ½" × ½"
For more shielding, see options
and accessories section.
U 120V-277V
347 347V
FO830U1 T8 U Lamps, 15⁄8" Leg Spacing, 80CRI, 3000K,
Furn/Inst.
FO835U1 T8 U Lamps, 15⁄8" Leg Spacing, 80CRI, 3500K, Furn/
Inst.
FO841U6 T8 U Lamps, 6" Leg Spacing, 80CRI, 4100K, Furn/Inst.
F835 35K 80CRI T8 Lamps Installed
GLR Fast Blow Fuse
EL Emergency Battery Pack Installed3
PAF Paint after Fabrication
MS9 Master/Satellite w/ 9' Harness
C388 3⁄8" Flex with 3 No. 18 Wires
C384 3⁄8" Flex with 3 No. 14 Wires
C488 3⁄8" Flex with 4 No. 18 Wires
C424 ½" Flex with 4 No. 14 Wires
G1 Single Gasket (Door to Housing)
G2 Double Gasketing (G1 and Lens to Door)
G3 Triple Gasketing (G2 and Housing to Ceiling)
WIH wiHUBB Enabled4,5
DOOR STYLE
FS Flush Steel
FA Flush Aluminum
For additional door styles
contact your local Columbia
Lighting representative.
BALLAST
E Electronic T8,
Instant Start
3E 3-Lamp Electronic
T8, Instant Start
4E 4-Lamp Electronic
T8, Instant Start
(17W lamps only)
ETT Electronic Twin
Tube, Instant Start
(Specify voltage)
EPTT Electronic Twin
Tube, Program
Start
For a specific ballast vendor,
show as option.
1
For drywall order flange kit accessories separately.
Order hanger accessories separately.
3
3-lamp fixture utilizes 2 ballast compartments and can mount any standard battery pack.
2 and 4-lamp fixtures can only mount one ballast and one 9" long or shorter battery pack.
All other battery packs must be externally mounted by others.
4
In-Fixture Module Antenna adds 2" to overall fixture height at power feed location.
5
Not available with Surface Mount ceiling types.
6
Provides ends with wiring access for continuous row mounting.
7
Contact Hubbell representative for continuous row, 3-lamp fixtures.
2
Page 1/2 Rev. 11/13/15
SHIELDING
100% virgin acrylic prismatic 12, extruded and
roll-embossed, diagonally oriented female prisms
standard. Other shielding may be specified. If
desired shielding media is not shown in ordering
guide, contact your local Hubbell Lighting
representative.
ACCESSORIES (ORDER SEPARATELY)
EOR End of Row (SM/CM only)6,7
INT Intermediate (SM/CM only)6,7
CP Chicago Plenum
FK22 2' × 2' Single Flange Kit
FKCR Flange Kit, Continuous Row
CM48Y2SC3F-KIT 48" Cable Mount Kit for 2' Wide CM
ceiling type, 3 Wire Feed Cord
LENSED TROFFERS / JT822
© 2015 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Because of continuing product improvement programs, Columbia Lighting reserves the right to change
specifications without notice. 701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Website www.columbialighting.com
JT822
2' × 2' Dedicated T8 Lensed Troffer / 2, 3, or 4-Lamp T8, TT, U-Bent
PHOTOMETRIC DATA
Test 13122 Test Date 4/29/02
LUMINAIRE DATA
Ballast
Ballast Factor
Lamp
Lumens per Lamp
Watts
Mounting
Shielding Angle
Spacing Criterion
ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY
Zone
JT822-232U6G-FSA12
JT8 Lensed Troffer
2' × 2' 2-Lamp With A-12 Pattern
Acrylic Prismatic Lens
B232R120HP
0.99
FB032U6
2750
58
Recessed
0º = 90 90º = 90
0º = 1.32 90º = 1.23
0-30
0-40
0-60
0-90
0-180
Lumens %Lamp
1294
2111
3496
4123
4123
ENERGY DATA
%Fixt.
23.5
38.4
63.6
75.0
75.0
31.4
51.2
84.8
100.0
100.0
INDOOR CANDELA PLOT
RCR
80
70
50
70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10
82 79 76 73 80 77 74 72 74 72 70
75 70 65 61 73 68 64 60 66 62 59
69 62 56 51 67 61 55 51 58 54 50
64 55 49 44 62 54 48 44 52 47 43
59 49 43 38 57 49 43 38 47 42 38
54 45 38 34 53 44 38 34 43 37 33
50 41 34 30 49 40 34 30 39 34 30
47 37 31 27 46 37 31 27 36 30 27
44 34 28 24 43 34 28 24 33 28 24
41 32 26 22 40 31 26 22 31 25 22
75.0%
Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER)
ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004
Compliance
Comparative Yearly Lighting
Energy Cost per 1000 Lumens
70
Noncompliant
$3.43 based on
3000 hrs. and
$0.08 per KWH
AVG. LUMINANCE (Candela/Sq. M.)
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION (%)
RC
RW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total Luminaire Efficiency
Average Luminance Angle
Luminaire
0
0
64
55
47
40
35
31
28
25
22
20
0
30
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
0.0
22.5
45.0
67.5
90.0
5320
5508
5341
5069
4691
4249
3659
3060
2708
2737
3050
3318
5320
5452
5184
4871
4550
4124
3510
2899
2499
2335
2395
2796
5320
5317
4959
4614
4297
3915
3315
2607
1967
1783
2115
2312
5320
5159
4730
4361
3989
3569
3074
2607
2309
2260
2227
2349
5320
5099
4658
4256
3822
3467
3113
2776
2508
2373
2489
2610
RCR = Room Cavity Ratio
RC = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance RW = Wall Reflectance
DIMENSIONAL DATA
CEILING COMPATIBILITY
Type G
10½"
Side
End
4¼"
For lay-in installation in exposed grid ceilings. Maximum tee widths of 1" and
maximum tee heights of 2" allowed.
23¾"
FK22 Flange Kit
2' × 2' 2-Lamp Lay-In
24"
Side
3"
A
4½"
End
For hard ceiling applications order FK22 flange kit. Flange kit wires directly into
concealed ceiling opening for a clean, finished appearance.
K
16½"
FKCR
A - 7⁄8" Diameter Knockout
K - 2" × 3" through hole for access plate
NOTE:
All dimensions are in inches; dimensions and specifications are subject to
change without notice. Please consult factory or check sample for verification.
Page 2/2 Rev. 11/13/15
For flanged fixtures in row configurations, the FKCR adapter bracket kit is required
in addition to the FK22 kit. Order one less FKCR than the total number of fixtures in
row. (Example: Row of two, order (2) FK22 & (1) FKCR)
Row cut out dimensions using FK22 & FKCR adapters:
Width 243⁄8", Length [24" × (# in row)] + ¾". Example: (24" × 2) + 3⁄8"= 483⁄8"
Flange kit rough in dimensions for single unit only: 243⁄8" × 243⁄8"
LENSED TROFFERS / JT822
© 2015 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Because of continuing product improvement programs, Columbia Lighting reserves the right to change
specifications without notice. 701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Website www.columbialighting.com
JT822
2' × 2' Dedicated T8 Lensed Troffer / 2, 3, or 4-Lamp T8, TT, U-Bent
DIMENSIONAL DATA - SURFACE MOUNT (SM) OR CABLE MOUNT (CM)
215⁄8"
59⁄16"
Mounting
Holes: (4) ¼–½"
DIA KOs (A)
123⁄8"
NOTE:
All dimensions are in inches;
dimensions and specifications are
subject to change without notice.
Please consult factory or check
sample for verification.
15"
1½"
Thru
Hole
4½" x 5" Mounting Collar (SM only).
For Cable Mount (CM) a 2" x 3" access
plate with (2) 7⁄8" K.O.s provided in
place of Mounting Collar shown.
25"
45⁄8"
Side View
End View
SURFACE MOUNT
CABLE MOUNT
Order SM ceiling type. Mounting collar required for surface
mounting. (4) Mounting knock-outs, ¼" to ½" provided as
shown, marked "A".
Order CM ceiling type. Access plate supplied for cable
mounting or suspension. Use CM48Y2SC3F-KIT 48" cable
mount kit. Includes 3 wire feed cord. For other wiring needs,
contact Hubbell Lighting representative. Mounting knock-outs,
¼" to ½", provided as shown, marked "A".
Page 3/2 Rev. 11/13/15
LENSED TROFFERS / JT822
© 2015 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Because of continuing product improvement programs, Columbia Lighting reserves the right to change
specifications without notice. 701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Website www.columbialighting.com
Catalog
Number
2RTL2 33L EZ1 LP835
Notes
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — The RTL combines digital LED lighting and controls technologies with patented highperformance optical design to offer the most advanced luminaire for general-ambient lighting applications.
High-efficacy light engine delivers long life and excellent color, ensuring a superior quality lighting installation
that is highly efficient and sustainable.
ST JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
Type
D
CONSTRUCTION — Rugged, one-piece cold-rolled steel reflector assembly with embossed facets. Coated
polyester powder-paint after fabrication.
Rigid structure with ballast box and end plates. End plates include integral T-bar clips.
Impact-modified acrylic prismatic refractor.
Luminaires may be mounted end-to-end and continuously wired.
Volumetric Lighting
OPTICS — Volumetric illumination is delivered by creating an optimal mix of light to walls, partitions,
vertical and horizontal work surfaces — rendering the interior space, objects and occupants in a more
balanced, complementary luminous environment.
2RTL
Light distribution is carefully controlled at high angles, providing just enough luminous flux to create the
volumetric effect.
Linear faceted reflector cavity softens and distributes light into the space while minimizing luminous contrast
between the fixture and ceiling.
2' X 2'
LED
Sloped end plates provide a smooth, luminous transition between fixture and ceiling while enhancing the
perception of fixture depth.
ELECTRICAL — Long-life LEDs, coupled with high-efficiency drivers, provide superior quantity and quality
of illumination for extended service life. RTL is rated to deliver L90 performance for 60,000 hours.
Optional integrated nLight®controls make each luminaire addressable - allowing it to digitally communicate
with other nLight enabled controls such as dimmers, switches, occupancy sensors and photocontrols. Simply
connect all the nLight enabled control devices and the RTL luminaires using standard CAT-5 cabling. Unique
plug-and-play convenience as devices and luminaires automatically discover each other and self-commission.
Lumen Management: Unique lumen management system (option N80) provides onboard intelligence that
actively manages the LED light source so that constant lumen output is maintained over the system life,
preventing the energy waste created by the traditional practice of over-lighting.
Step-level dimming option allows system to be switched to 50% power for compliance with common energy
codes while maintaining fixture appearance.
INDUSTRY RECOGNITION/AWARDS
2012 RECOGNIZED
PRODUCT
2011 SELECTION
2011 BEST AMBIENT LED LUMINAIRE
2011 MOST INNOVATIVE OPTICAL CONTROL
2010 BEST INTERIOR LED
PRODUCT
eldoLED driver options deliver choice of dimming range, and choice of control, while assuring flicker-free,
low current inrush, 89% efficiency and low EMI.
confirm which versions are qualified.
Driver disconnect provided where required to comply with US and Canadian codes.
Protected by one or more of US Patent Nos. 7,229,192; D541,467; D541,468; D544,633; D544,634; D544,992.
INSTALLATION — Drivers and internal components accessed via plenum. Driver tray may be removed
from fixture during service. Suitable for damp location.
D544,933 and additional patents pending.
Maintenance: LED boards include plug-in connectors for easy replacement or servicing.
LISTINGS — CSA Certified to meet U.S. and Canadian standards. IC rated.
Tested to LM80 standards. IC rated. DesignLights Consortium® (DLC) qualified product. Not all versions of this
product may be DLC qualified. Please check the DLC Qualified Products List at www.designlights.org/QPL to
ORDERING INFORMATION
WARRANTY — 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx
Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25°C.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Example: 2RTL2 33L EZ1 LP835 N80
Lead times will vary depending on options selected. Consult with your sales representative.
2RTL2
Series
Air function
2RTL2 Recessed
2X2 LED
Lumens1
(blank) No air
CAS
Center air
slots (air
removal)
20L
33L
40L
2000
lumens
3300
lumens
4000
lumens
Voltage
Color
temperature
Driver
(blank) MVOLT
(120 - 277V)
347
347V2
EZ1
EZB
EDB
EXB
SLD
eldoLED dims to 1%
(0-10 volt dimming)
eldoLED dims to dark
(0-10 volt dimming)
eldoLED DALI3
eldoLED DMX/RDM3
Step-level dimming3
EXA1 Dims to 1%, XPoint
wireless enabled3,4
EXAB Dims to dark, XPoint
wireless enabled3,4
LP830
3000 K,
82CRI
LP835 3500 K,
82CRI
LP840 4000 K,
82CRI
LP850 5000 K,
82CRI
Controls5
(blank)
N80
No controls
nLight with 80%
lumen management
N80EMG nLight with 80%
lumen management
for use with generator
supply EM power6
N100
nLight without lumen
management
N100EMG nLight without lumen
management for use
with generator supply
EM power6
Options
EL7L
700
lumen
battery
pack
EL14L 1400
lumen
battery
pack
CP
Chicago
plenum
Gateway not included. Requires on-site commissioning. Visit www.lightingcontrols.com/XPointWireless for more information.
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number.
DGA22
LED
Drywall ceiling adaptor , unit installation
Notes
1 Approximate lumen output.
2 Not available with EL battery packs or SLD driver.
3 Not available with N80, N80EMG, N100, or N100EMG.
4 Gateway not included. Requires on-site commissioning. Visit www.lightingcontrols.com/XPointWireless for more information.
5 nLight access limitations with EZB.
6 nLight EMG option requires a connection to existing nLight network. Power is provided from a separate N80 or N100 enabled fixture.
2RTL-2X2
2RTL Volumetric Recessed Lighting 2'x2'
Performance Data
Lumen Package
20L LP830
20L LP835
20L LP840
20L LP850
33L LP830
33L LP835
33L LP840
33L LP850
40L LP830
40L LP835
40L LP840
40L LP850
Lumens
1978
2077
2176
2334
3389
3558
3736
3936
3801
3991
4191
4411
Input Watts
20.2
20.2
20.2
20.2
35.44
35.44
35.44
35.65
40.08
40.08
40.08
40.25
LPW
98
102
107
115
96
100
105
110
94
99
104
109
PHOTOMETRICS
2RTL2 33L LP835, 3,558 delivered lumens, test no. LTL25813P5, tested in accordance to IESNA LM-79.
180°
80°
200
400
60°
600
800
1000
40°
1200
0°
20°
0°
CP Summary
0°
90
0° 1302 1302
5° 1306 1299
15° 1250 1256
25° 1133 1173
35° 970 1052
903
45° 779
720
55° 577
493
65° 378
194
75° 185
14
85° 31
0
0
90
Coefficients of Utilization
pf
20%
pc
80%
70%
50%
pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10%
0 119 119 119 116 116 116 111 111 111
1 109 105 100 102 99 95
98 95 92
2 99 91 85
89 83 78
86 81 76
3 91 80 72
79 71 65
76 69 64
4 83 71 62
70 62 55
67 60 55
5 76 64 55
62 54 48
60 53 47
6 70 57 48
56 48 42
54 47 41
7 65 52 43
51 43 37
50 42 37
8 61 47 39
47 39 33
45 38 33
9 57 43 35
43 35 30
42 35 30
10 53 40 32
40 32 27
39 32 27
RCR
90°
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30°
1003
28.2
28.2
0° - 40°
1633
45.9
45.9
0° - 60°
2863
80.5
80.5
0° - 90°
3558
100.0
100.0
90° - 120°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 130°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 150°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 180°
0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180°
3558
100.0
100.0
90°
2RTL2 40L LP835, 3,991 delivered lumens, test no. LTL25813P10, tested in accordance to IESNA LM-79.
90°
80°
200
400
60°
600
800
1000
1200
40°
1400
0°
20°
0°
CP Summary
0°
90
0° 1461 1461
5° 1465 1457
15° 1403 1409
25° 1271 1316
35° 1088 1181
45° 874 1013
807
55° 648
553
65° 424
218
75° 208
16
85° 34
0
0
90
Coefficients of Utilization
pf
20%
pc
80%
70%
50%
pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10%
0 119 119 119 116 116 116 111 111 111
1 109 105 100 102 99 95
98 95 92
2 99 91 85
89 83 78
86 81 76
3 91 80 72
79 71 65
76 69 64
4 83 71 62
70 62 55
67 60 55
5 76 64 55
62 54 48
60 53 47
6 70 57 48
56 48 42
54 47 41
7 65 52 43
51 43 37
50 42 37
8 61 47 39
47 39 33
45 38 33
9 57 43 35
43 35 30
42 35 30
10 53 40 32
40 32 27
39 32 27
RCR
180°
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30°
1125
28.2
28.2
0° - 40°
1832
45.9
45.9
0° - 60°
3212
80.5
80.5
0° - 90°
3991
100.0
100.0
90° - 120°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 130°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 150°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 180°
0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180°
3991
100.0
100.0
90°
2RTL-2X2
LED:
One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763
Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
© 2010-2015 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. 10/13/15
2RTL Volumetric Recessed Lighting 2'x2'
nLight® Control Accessories:
Order as separate catalog number. Visit www.sensorswitch.com/nLight for complete listing of nLight controls.
WallPod stations
On/Off
On/Off & Raise/Lower
Graphic Touchscreen
Photocell controls
On/Off & Dimming
Model number
nPODM [color]
nPODM DX [color]
nPOD GFX
Model number
nCM ADCX
Occupancy sensors
Small motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech)
Large motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech)
Wall switch with raise/lower
Cat-5 cable bundles (plenum rated)
10', 15 pieces per bundle
30', 15 pieces per bundle
Model number
nCM 9 / nCM PDT 9
nCM 10 / nCM PDT 10
nWSXPDTLVDX
Model number
CAT5 10FT
CAT5 30FT
CAS
.100
.080
NEG. PLENUM PRESSURE - IN. WG.
RTL with
Air Handling
.060
.050
.040
.030
.020
.015
.010
10
15
20
30
40
50 60
80
100
150
Constant Lumen Management
Dimensions
Enabled by the embedded nLight control, the RTL actively tracks its run-time and manages its light source such that constant lumen output is maintained over the
system life. Referred to as lumen management, this feature eliminates the energy waste created by the traditional practice of over-lighting.
All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise specified.
Without Lumen Management
With Lumen Management
Energy is wasted and light level is inconsistent.
Energy is saved and light level remains consistent.
100%
35W
100%
POWER INPUT
35W
LIGHT OUTPUT
Saved Energy
LIGHT
OUTPUT
Specifications
POWER
INPUT
POWER INPUT
POWER INPUT
LIGHT OUTPUT
200
AIR FLOW RATE- C.F.M.
Length: 24 (61.0)
Width: 24 (61.0)
Depth: 3-1/8 (7.9)
Wasted Energy
LIGHT OUTPUT
80%
0
10
20
THOUSAND OPERATING HOURS
30
40
28W
50
80%
0
10
20
THOUSAND OPERATING HOURS
30
40
28W
50
2RTL-2X2
LED:
One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763
Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
© 2010-2015 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. 10/13/15
Catalog
Number
2RTL2 33L SLD LP835
Notes
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — The RTL combines digital LED lighting and controls technologies with patented highperformance optical design to offer the most advanced luminaire for general-ambient lighting applications.
High-efficacy light engine delivers long life and excellent color, ensuring a superior quality lighting installation
that is highly efficient and sustainable.
ST JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
Type
D-STEP
CONSTRUCTION — Rugged, one-piece cold-rolled steel reflector assembly with embossed facets. Coated
polyester powder-paint after fabrication.
Rigid structure with ballast box and end plates. End plates include integral T-bar clips.
Impact-modified acrylic prismatic refractor.
Luminaires may be mounted end-to-end and continuously wired.
Volumetric Lighting
OPTICS — Volumetric illumination is delivered by creating an optimal mix of light to walls, partitions,
vertical and horizontal work surfaces — rendering the interior space, objects and occupants in a more
balanced, complementary luminous environment.
2RTL
Light distribution is carefully controlled at high angles, providing just enough luminous flux to create the
volumetric effect.
Linear faceted reflector cavity softens and distributes light into the space while minimizing luminous contrast
between the fixture and ceiling.
2' X 2'
LED
Sloped end plates provide a smooth, luminous transition between fixture and ceiling while enhancing the
perception of fixture depth.
ELECTRICAL — Long-life LEDs, coupled with high-efficiency drivers, provide superior quantity and quality
of illumination for extended service life. RTL is rated to deliver L90 performance for 60,000 hours.
Optional integrated nLight®controls make each luminaire addressable - allowing it to digitally communicate
with other nLight enabled controls such as dimmers, switches, occupancy sensors and photocontrols. Simply
connect all the nLight enabled control devices and the RTL luminaires using standard CAT-5 cabling. Unique
plug-and-play convenience as devices and luminaires automatically discover each other and self-commission.
Lumen Management: Unique lumen management system (option N80) provides onboard intelligence that
actively manages the LED light source so that constant lumen output is maintained over the system life,
preventing the energy waste created by the traditional practice of over-lighting.
Step-level dimming option allows system to be switched to 50% power for compliance with common energy
codes while maintaining fixture appearance.
INDUSTRY RECOGNITION/AWARDS
2012 RECOGNIZED
PRODUCT
2011 SELECTION
2011 BEST AMBIENT LED LUMINAIRE
2011 MOST INNOVATIVE OPTICAL CONTROL
2010 BEST INTERIOR LED
PRODUCT
eldoLED driver options deliver choice of dimming range, and choice of control, while assuring flicker-free,
low current inrush, 89% efficiency and low EMI.
confirm which versions are qualified.
Driver disconnect provided where required to comply with US and Canadian codes.
Protected by one or more of US Patent Nos. 7,229,192; D541,467; D541,468; D544,633; D544,634; D544,992.
INSTALLATION — Drivers and internal components accessed via plenum. Driver tray may be removed
from fixture during service. Suitable for damp location.
D544,933 and additional patents pending.
Maintenance: LED boards include plug-in connectors for easy replacement or servicing.
LISTINGS — CSA Certified to meet U.S. and Canadian standards. IC rated.
Tested to LM80 standards. IC rated. DesignLights Consortium® (DLC) qualified product. Not all versions of this
product may be DLC qualified. Please check the DLC Qualified Products List at www.designlights.org/QPL to
ORDERING INFORMATION
WARRANTY — 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx
Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25°C.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Example: 2RTL2 33L EZ1 LP835 N80
Lead times will vary depending on options selected. Consult with your sales representative.
2RTL2
Series
Air function
2RTL2 Recessed
2X2 LED
Lumens1
(blank) No air
CAS
Center air
slots (air
removal)
20L
33L
40L
2000
lumens
3300
lumens
4000
lumens
Voltage
Color
temperature
Driver
(blank) MVOLT
(120 - 277V)
347
347V2
EZ1
EZB
EDB
EXB
SLD
eldoLED dims to 1%
(0-10 volt dimming)
eldoLED dims to dark
(0-10 volt dimming)
eldoLED DALI3
eldoLED DMX/RDM3
Step-level dimming3
EXA1 Dims to 1%, XPoint
wireless enabled3,4
EXAB Dims to dark, XPoint
wireless enabled3,4
LP830
3000 K,
82CRI
LP835 3500 K,
82CRI
LP840 4000 K,
82CRI
LP850 5000 K,
82CRI
Controls5
(blank)
N80
No controls
nLight with 80%
lumen management
N80EMG nLight with 80%
lumen management
for use with generator
supply EM power6
N100
nLight without lumen
management
N100EMG nLight without lumen
management for use
with generator supply
EM power6
Options
EL7L
700
lumen
battery
pack
EL14L 1400
lumen
battery
pack
CP
Chicago
plenum
Gateway not included. Requires on-site commissioning. Visit www.lightingcontrols.com/XPointWireless for more information.
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number.
DGA22
LED
Drywall ceiling adaptor , unit installation
Notes
1 Approximate lumen output.
2 Not available with EL battery packs or SLD driver.
3 Not available with N80, N80EMG, N100, or N100EMG.
4 Gateway not included. Requires on-site commissioning. Visit www.lightingcontrols.com/XPointWireless for more information.
5 nLight access limitations with EZB.
6 nLight EMG option requires a connection to existing nLight network. Power is provided from a separate N80 or N100 enabled fixture.
2RTL-2X2
2RTL Volumetric Recessed Lighting 2'x2'
Performance Data
Lumen Package
20L LP830
20L LP835
20L LP840
20L LP850
33L LP830
33L LP835
33L LP840
33L LP850
40L LP830
40L LP835
40L LP840
40L LP850
Lumens
1978
2077
2176
2334
3389
3558
3736
3936
3801
3991
4191
4411
Input Watts
20.2
20.2
20.2
20.2
35.44
35.44
35.44
35.65
40.08
40.08
40.08
40.25
LPW
98
102
107
115
96
100
105
110
94
99
104
109
PHOTOMETRICS
2RTL2 33L LP835, 3,558 delivered lumens, test no. LTL25813P5, tested in accordance to IESNA LM-79.
180°
80°
200
400
60°
600
800
1000
40°
1200
0°
20°
0°
CP Summary
0°
90
0° 1302 1302
5° 1306 1299
15° 1250 1256
25° 1133 1173
35° 970 1052
903
45° 779
720
55° 577
493
65° 378
194
75° 185
14
85° 31
0
0
90
Coefficients of Utilization
pf
20%
pc
80%
70%
50%
pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10%
0 119 119 119 116 116 116 111 111 111
1 109 105 100 102 99 95
98 95 92
2 99 91 85
89 83 78
86 81 76
3 91 80 72
79 71 65
76 69 64
4 83 71 62
70 62 55
67 60 55
5 76 64 55
62 54 48
60 53 47
6 70 57 48
56 48 42
54 47 41
7 65 52 43
51 43 37
50 42 37
8 61 47 39
47 39 33
45 38 33
9 57 43 35
43 35 30
42 35 30
10 53 40 32
40 32 27
39 32 27
RCR
90°
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30°
1003
28.2
28.2
0° - 40°
1633
45.9
45.9
0° - 60°
2863
80.5
80.5
0° - 90°
3558
100.0
100.0
90° - 120°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 130°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 150°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 180°
0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180°
3558
100.0
100.0
90°
2RTL2 40L LP835, 3,991 delivered lumens, test no. LTL25813P10, tested in accordance to IESNA LM-79.
90°
80°
200
400
60°
600
800
1000
1200
40°
1400
0°
20°
0°
CP Summary
0°
90
0° 1461 1461
5° 1465 1457
15° 1403 1409
25° 1271 1316
35° 1088 1181
45° 874 1013
807
55° 648
553
65° 424
218
75° 208
16
85° 34
0
0
90
Coefficients of Utilization
pf
20%
pc
80%
70%
50%
pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10%
0 119 119 119 116 116 116 111 111 111
1 109 105 100 102 99 95
98 95 92
2 99 91 85
89 83 78
86 81 76
3 91 80 72
79 71 65
76 69 64
4 83 71 62
70 62 55
67 60 55
5 76 64 55
62 54 48
60 53 47
6 70 57 48
56 48 42
54 47 41
7 65 52 43
51 43 37
50 42 37
8 61 47 39
47 39 33
45 38 33
9 57 43 35
43 35 30
42 35 30
10 53 40 32
40 32 27
39 32 27
RCR
180°
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° - 30°
1125
28.2
28.2
0° - 40°
1832
45.9
45.9
0° - 60°
3212
80.5
80.5
0° - 90°
3991
100.0
100.0
90° - 120°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 130°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 150°
0
0.0
0.0
90° - 180°
0
0.0
0.0
0° - 180°
3991
100.0
100.0
90°
2RTL-2X2
LED:
One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763
Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
© 2010-2015 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. 10/13/15
2RTL Volumetric Recessed Lighting 2'x2'
nLight® Control Accessories:
Order as separate catalog number. Visit www.sensorswitch.com/nLight for complete listing of nLight controls.
WallPod stations
On/Off
On/Off & Raise/Lower
Graphic Touchscreen
Photocell controls
On/Off & Dimming
Model number
nPODM [color]
nPODM DX [color]
nPOD GFX
Model number
nCM ADCX
Occupancy sensors
Small motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech)
Large motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech)
Wall switch with raise/lower
Cat-5 cable bundles (plenum rated)
10', 15 pieces per bundle
30', 15 pieces per bundle
Model number
nCM 9 / nCM PDT 9
nCM 10 / nCM PDT 10
nWSXPDTLVDX
Model number
CAT5 10FT
CAT5 30FT
CAS
.100
.080
NEG. PLENUM PRESSURE - IN. WG.
RTL with
Air Handling
.060
.050
.040
.030
.020
.015
.010
10
15
20
30
40
50 60
80
100
150
Constant Lumen Management
Dimensions
Enabled by the embedded nLight control, the RTL actively tracks its run-time and manages its light source such that constant lumen output is maintained over the
system life. Referred to as lumen management, this feature eliminates the energy waste created by the traditional practice of over-lighting.
All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise specified.
Without Lumen Management
With Lumen Management
Energy is wasted and light level is inconsistent.
Energy is saved and light level remains consistent.
100%
35W
100%
POWER INPUT
35W
LIGHT OUTPUT
Saved Energy
LIGHT
OUTPUT
Specifications
POWER
INPUT
POWER INPUT
POWER INPUT
LIGHT OUTPUT
200
AIR FLOW RATE- C.F.M.
Length: 24 (61.0)
Width: 24 (61.0)
Depth: 3-1/8 (7.9)
Wasted Energy
LIGHT OUTPUT
80%
0
10
20
THOUSAND OPERATING HOURS
30
40
28W
50
80%
0
10
20
THOUSAND OPERATING HOURS
30
40
28W
50
2RTL-2X2
LED:
One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012
Phone: 800-858-7763
Fax: 770-929-8789
www.lithonia.com
© 2010-2015 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. 10/13/15
G1.1.1
PART # TC2
6” DELUXE UNIVERSAL
TC HOUSING
Project: ST JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
Fixture Type:
DE
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
Location:
TC2
Contact/Phone:
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
DIMENSIONS
TC Housing design for use in non-insulated areas • If installed
where insulation is present, the insulation must be pulled back 3”
from all sides of the TC housing.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
7 1/2"
Lamp Lamp ratings based on trim selected–see reverse.
Socket Medium base porcelain with nickel-plated copper screw
shell • Drop socket with spring to accommodate certain trim
installation.
Trims Trim selection shown on reverse.
Labels U.L. listed for through-branch wiring, damp locations and
IP • Product thermally protected against improper use of lamps
or insulation • Union made • UL Listed/CSA certified • Trims 20,
21, 22, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243 and 9900 are wet location
approved for covered ceiling applications • Trims 28, 29 are wet
location approved for covered ceiling applications, when used
with outdoor rated lamps.
Testing All reports are based on published industry procedures;
field performance may differ from laboratory performance.
13 1/2"
Will expand
to 25"
(Reduces to 8 1/8"
with breakaway
feature)
7 1/2"
Product specifications subject to change without notice.
INSTALLATION
Real Nail 3 Bar Hangers Telescoping, Patented (US Patent
D552,969) Real Nail 3 system permits quick placement of housing
anywhere within 24” O.C. joists or suspended ceilings • Integral
T-bar notch and clip secures housing in suspended ceiling grid –
no accessory clips required • 24” expansion stop allows quick
placement of fixture in standard grid spacing • Bars scored in two
locations for fast, clean breaking, allowing housing installation
in tight applications • Bars captive to mounting frame • Edgemounted for extra strength • Captive bugle-headed ring shank
nail for quick one-step installation and easy removal with claw
hammer for fixture relocation • Quick-Loc slot (location identified
on the mounting frame) and oversized locking set screw lock
fixture in position • Bar hanger foot contoured to align to bottom
of construction joist • Alternate mounting holes included.
9 1/2"
13 1/8"
6 7/8” CEILING CUTOUT
Junction Box Pre-wired junction box provided with (5) 1⁄2” and
(1) 3⁄4” knockouts, (4) Non-metallic sheathed cable connectors and
ground wire, U.L. listed/CSA certified for through-branch wiring,
maximum 8 No. 12 AWG 90˚ C branch circuit conductors (4 in,
4 out) • Junction box provided with removable access plates
• Knockouts equipped with pryout slots.
Mounting Frame 22-gauge die-formed galvanized steel
mounting frame • Rough-in section (junction box, mounting frame,
housing and bar hangers) fully assembled for ease of installation
• Sight lines embossed on mounting frame to allow for easy
viewing when aligning fixtures.
Housing TC housing, 22-gauge white painted steel • Housing is
vertically adjustable to accommodate up to a 2” ceiling thickness.
PRODUCT CODES
Catalog Number
Input Voltage
Lamp Rating (max.)
TC2
120V
A19/A21/BR30/BR40/MR16/PAR16/PAR20/PAR30/PAR30L/PAR38/R20/R30 (See reverse for max. trim rating)
REV-5/15
G1.1.1
TC2
TRIMS/LAMPS
Cat. No.
Description
Max. Lamp Rating
Cat. No.
Description
Max. Lamp Rating
23B-WH
Pinhole with black baffle
50W PAR20/R20
Conical Black Baffle
Conical Black Baffle
Conical Black Baffle
Conical Black Baffle
Conical White Baffle
75W PAR30L, 65W BR30
Black Cylinder w/Black Baffle
White Cylinder w/White Baffle
60W PAR16
24B-WH
24B-SC
24B-ABZ
24B-BL
24W-WH
226B-WH
226W-WH
228-WH
R20 Regressed Eyeball
50W PAR20/R20
150W PAR38,
120W BR40
**
Straight Black Baffle
Straight Black Baffle
Straight Black Baffle
Straight Black Baffle
Straight White Baffle
BR30 Regressed Eyeball
BR30 Regressed Eyeball
BR30 Regressed Eyeball
BR30 Regressed Eyeball
75W PAR30L, 65W BR30
25B-WH
25B-SC
25B-ABZ
25B-BL
25W-WH
229-WH
229-SC
229-ABZ
229-BL
248W-WH
R20 Eyeball in White Baffle
50W PAR20/R20
150W PAR38,
120W BR40
BR30 Eyeball in Black Baffle
BR30 Eyeball in White Baffle
**
264B-WH
264W-WH
PAR30 Adjustable Conical Black Baffle
PAR30 Adjustable Conical White Baffle
75W PAR30
**
Straight Cone - Clear Alzak®
Straight Cone - Gold Alzak®
Straight Cone - Black Alzak®
Straight Cone - Pewter Alzak®
Straight Cone - Gloss White
Straight Cone - Haze
Straight Cone - Wheat Haze
249B-WH
249W-WH
75W PAR30L, 65W BR30
26C-WH
26G-WH
26B-WH
26PT-SC
26W-WH
26HZ-WH
26WHZ-WH
27C-WH
27G-WH
27B-WH
27PT-SC
27W-WH
27HZ-WH
27WHZ-WH
27WHZ-ABZ
Tapered Cone - Clear Alzak®
Tapered Cone - Gold Alzak®
Tapered Cone - Black Alzak®
Tapered Cone - Pewter Alzak®
Tapered Cone - Gloss White
Tapered Cone - Haze
Tapered Cone - Wheat Haze
Tapered Cone - Wheat Haze
75W PAR30L, 65W BR30
267C-WH
267G-WH
267B-WH
267HZ-WH
267WHZ-WH
PAR30 Adjustable Cone - Clear Alzak®
PAR30 Adjustable Cone - Gold Alzak®
PAR30 Adjustable Cone - Black Alzak®
PAR30 Adjustable Cone - Haze
PAR30 Adjustable Cone - Wheat Haze
75W PAR30
**
XR30101WH
XR30101BL
XR30101GP
XR30101SL
AVIO Square Gimbal Ring - White
AVIO Square Gimbal Ring - Black
AVIO Square Gimbal Ring - Graphite
AVIO Square Gimbal Ring - Silver
75W PAR30
20-WH X
20-PW X
240-WH X
240-PW X
Albalite
Shower/Closet Light
Albalite with Reflector
Shower/Closet Light
75W A19
21-WH X
21-PW X
241-WH X
241-PW X
Drop Opal
Shower/Closet Light
Drop Opal with Reflector
Shower/Closet Light
75W A19
242-WH X
242-SC X
242-ABZ X
Shower Trim,
Frosted Lens with Clear Center
120W PAR38
22-WH X
Fresnel
75W A19
239-WH X
Frosted Lens
75W A19
**
**
28B-WH XX Conical Black Baffle
28W-WH XX Conical White Baffle
100W A19, 150W A21,
150W PAR38, 75W PAR30,
75W PAR30L, 85W BR30,
120W BR40
29C-WH XX Deep Cone - Clear
29W-WH XX Deep Cone - White
100W A19, 150W A21,
100W PAR38, 75W PAR30,
75W PAR30L, 85W BR30,
120W BR40
100W A19
100W A19
230CB-WH
230CW-WH
Economy Multiplier - Clear w/Black Baffle 100W A19
Economy Multiplier - Clear w/White Baffle
232C-WH
232G-WH
232W-WH
232HZ-WH
232WHZ-WH
Mulltiplier - Clear Alzak®
Mulltiplier - Gold Alzak®
Mulltiplier - Gloss White
Mulltiplier - Haze
Mulltiplier - Wheat Haze
100W A19, 150W A21
100W A19, 150W A21
100W A19
100W A19, 150W A21
100W A19, 150W A21
233C-WH
Mulltiplier in Clear Alzak® w/Black Baffle
100W A19, 150W A21
261B-WH
261W-WH
Scoop Wall Wash w/Black Baffle
Scoop Wall Wash w/White Baffle
75W A19
**
244B-WH
244W-WH
Shallow Black Baffle
Shallow White Baffle
75W PAR30/30L,
65W BR30
243-WH X
Decorative Swirled Etched Opal Glass
100W A19
Shallow Cone - Clear Alzak®
Shallow Cone - Gold Alzak®
Shallow Cone - Black Alzak®
Shallow Cone - Haze
Shallow Cone - Wheat Haze
75W PAR30/30L,
65W BR30
9324-SC
Luminous Disc (Frosted)
65W BR30
**
247C-WH
247G-WH
247B-WH
247HZ-WH
247WHZ-WH
9702
Luminous Collar (Frosted)
75W BR30
250-WH
250-SC
250-ABZ
Open Frame
Open Frame
Open Frame
65W BR30
9024W-WH
White Octagonal w/White Baffle
65W BR30
251-WH
Open Frame
120W BR40,
250W R40 Heat Lamp
9524-SC
Chrome Band
65W BR30
**
254B-WH
254W-WH
Deep Baffle - Black
Deep Baffle - White
75W PAR30,
100W PAR38
9900-WH X
Fluted Opal Lens
75W A19
**
257C-WH
257B-WH
257G-WH
257HZ-WH
257WHZ-WH
Deep Cone - Clear Alzak®
Deep Cone - Black Alzak®
Deep Cone - Gold Alzak®
Deep Cone - Haze
Deep Cone - Wheat Haze
75W PAR30,
100W PAR38
**
LOW VOLTAGE TRIMS WITH TRANSFORMER*
424B-WH
Downlight or Adjustable w/Black Baffle
50W MR16
427W-WH
White Cylinder w/White Baffle/White Bezel
50W MR16
Gimbal in Black Baffle
150W PAR38/3 Side Prong
Gimbal in White Baffle
Trim Size: 75⁄8” O.D. (except Cat. Nos. 20, 21, 22, 228, 229, 240, 241, 251, 9000,
Can also be used w/med. screw base lamps
9024 - 8” O.D., Cat. No. 9702 - 73⁄4” O.D.).
Trim Finish: ABZ - Classic Aged Bronze, BL - Black, GP - Graphite, PW - Plastic White
XUL Listed for use in wet location.
(Polycarbonate material shower trim), SC - Satin Chrome, SL - Silver, WH - White.
XXUL Listed for use in wet location with outdoor rated lamp.
* Use dimmers specifically designed for low voltage magnetic transformers.
** NOTE: TR6 Trim Ring compatible with 24, 25, 26, 27, 244, Alzak is a registered trademark of Alcoa Corp.
Note: In Canada when insulation is present, Type IC fixtures must be used.
247,254, 257, 264, 267, 9900 trims.
224B-WH
224W-WH
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (847) 827-9880 • Fax (847) 827-2925
220 Chrysler Drive • Brampton, Ontario • Canada L6S 6B6 • Phone (905) 792-7335 • Fax (905) 792-0064
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
6” TRIM SERIES
TYPE DE
PART# 232CWH
JOB: ST JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
Trim Series
Dimensions
CONES
Aperture Catalog No.
232W -WH - Gloss White, White Trim
232C-WH - Clear Alzak®, White Trim
232G-WH - Gold Alzak®, White Trim
232HZ-WH - Haze, White Trim
232WHZ-WH - Wheat Haze, White Trim
IC2/TC2/TC2R: 100W A19, 150W A21
IC2: (White Finish only) 75W A19
TC2: (White Finish only) 100W A19
IC23/IC23W: 60W A19
ICPL/PL613: 13W, ICPL/PL618: 18W, ICPL626 Series: 26W
ICPL632 Series: 32W, PL642 Series: 42W
APT2: 150W A21
APT2: (White Finish only) 100W A19
5-7/8”
231W -WH - Gloss White, White Trim
231C-WH - Clear Alzak®, White Trim
231G-WH - Gold Alzak®, White Trim
IC22/IC2W/IC22S/IC22R: 60W A19
A-Lamp Reflector
7 5/8"
A-Lamp Reflector
7 5/8"
6”
Reflector
7 5/8"
5-3/4”
PAR30 Adjustable
Tapered Cone
Housing/Lamp Compatibility
5-7/8”
7 5/8"
2320C-WH - Clear Low Iridescet Alzak®, White Trim
ICPL626 Series: 26W
(Optimized for 32W/42W)
ICPL632 Series: 32W
2320HZ-SC - Haze, Satin Chrome Trim
PL642 Series: 42W
2320HZ-WH - Haze, White Trim
2320WHZ-ABZ - Wheat Haze, Classic Aged Bronze Trim
2320WHZ-WH - Wheat Haze, White Trim
267B-WH - Black Alzak®, White Trim
267C-WH - Clear Alzak®, White Trim
267G-WH - Gold Alzak®, White Trim
267HZ-WH - Haze, White Trim
267WHZ-WH - Wheat Haze, White Trim
Compatible with TR6, 6” Trim Ring
IC2/TC2/TC2R: 75W PAR30
IC22/IC22W/IC22S/IC22R: 50W PAR30
IC23/IC23W: 50W PAR30
APT2: 75W PAR30
6” Trim Ring compatible with 26, 27, 247, 257,
267 trims
TR6-WH - White
TR6-BL - Black
TR6-SC - Satin Chrome
TR6-ABZ - Classic Aged Bronze
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (847) 827-9880 • Fax (847) 827-2925
220 Chrysler Drive • Brampton, Ontario • Canada L6S 6B6 • Phone (905) 792-7335 • Fax (905) 792-0064
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
TYPE DE LAMP
PART# 150A21WRP120V
JOB: ST JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
Product Details
Product
Number:
Page 1 of 1
13101
Order
150A21/W/RP 120V
Abbreviation:
General
Incandescent A21 Bulb Shape Soft White Finish Medium
Description: Aluminum Base 150Watt 120V Retail Pack 12Bulbs Per Case
1Bulb Per Package
* Full Case Required
Product Information
Abbrev. With Packaging Info.
150A21WRP 120V 12/CS 1/SKU
Approx. Lumens
2640
Average Rated Life (hr)
750
Base
Medium
Bulb
A21
Class
C (gas)
Color Rendering Index (CRI)
100
Color Temperature/CCT (K)
2850
Diameter (in)
2.625
Diameter (mm)
66.68
Filament
CC-8
Lamp Finish
Soft White
Light Center Length - LCL (in)
3.875
Light Center Length - LCL (mm)
98
Maximum Overall Length - MOL (in)
5.313
Maximum Overall Length - MOL (mm)
134.9375
Nominal Voltage (V)
120.00
Nominal Wattage (W)
150.00
http://ecom.sylvania.com/sylvaniab2b/catalog/ProductDetailsPrint.inc.jsp?isPrint=true
11/11/2016
Catalog
Number
LE S 1 G
Notes
ST JOE'S BREAST IMAGING
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE  Ideal for applications requiring attractive die-cast aluminum signage, superior illumination and low energy consumption.
CONSTRUCTION  Precision-molded, die-cast aluminum construction — ultra-slim, compact housing.
Fine-grain brushed aluminum faceplate with matte black electrostatic polymeric trim. Clear lacquer finish
on brushed face inhibits fingerprints and other surface contaminants.
All electronics located inside housing.
Fully overlapping light seal prevents light leaks. Universal directional chevron knockouts are completely
concealed and easily removed. Hinged faceplate and spring latches for easy lamp compartment access,
no exposed hardware.
Letters 6" high with 3/4" stroke, with 100 ft viewing distance rating, based upon UL924 standards.
U.S. Patent No. 5,739,639, 5,954,423 and 6,502,044. Canada Patent No. 2,204,218. Other
patents pending.
OPTICS  Lamp is constructed using new LED technology. Provides perfectly uniform illumination to
meet 3/4" letter stroke required by code.
The typical life of the exit LED lamp is 10 years, based on continuous operation. Unique LED lamp platform
accommodates both single-face and double-face exits.
Low energy consumption — red exit consumes std .81W, 1.3W (120V), green exit consumes std is 1W, 1.5W
(120V). Universal input voltage capabilities (120V through 277V, 50 or 60 HZ).
ELECTRICAL  Solid-state electronic elements to eliminate risk of electromechanical failures.
Surge protection meets ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category B and IEC 1000 immunity standards for high voltage
surges, electrostatic discharges, high frequency electrical fast transients and line voltage dips/swells.
Emergency Operation (for EL N option only): Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free nickel-cadmium
battery delivers 90 minutes capacity to lamp.
Self-diagnostics (SD option only): Two-state constant-current charger maximizes battery life and
automatically recharges after battery discharge. Test switch provided for manual testing.
Self-diagnostic testing for five minutes every 30 days, 30 minutes at 180-day interval, and 90 minutes
annually.
Diagnostic evaluation of LED light source, AC to DC transfer, charging and battery condition.
Continuously monitors AC functionality.
Low voltage disconnect prevents excessive deep discharge that can permanently damage the battery.
Single-point microcomputer control for all electronic features.
Crystal oscillator timing system with watchdog protection for precision accuracy.
AC/LVD reset allows battery connection before AC power is applied and prevents battery damage from
deep discharge.
Brownout protection is automatically switched to emergency mode when supply voltage drops below
80% of nominal.
Single multi-chromatic LED indicator to display two-state charging, test activation and three-state
diagnostic status.
Test switch provides manual activation of 30-second diagnostic testing for on-demand visual inspection.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Type
XA
Die-Cast Aluminum Exits
LE and LRE
LE surface
LRE recessed
INSTALLATION  Universal mounting (top, end or back). Double face available with top or end mounting
only. LRE: Trim ring has 3/4” depth adjustment to ensure a flush fit against the surface. Protrudes 1/10”
from the surface. No exposed hardware.
Die-cast aluminum canopy provided for surface mount only.
LISTINGS  UL damp location listed 50°F - 104°F (10°C - 40°C). Meets UL 924, NFPA 101 (current Life
Safety Code), NEC and OSHA illumination standards. North Carolina Department of Insurance. NEMA
Premium certified.
WARRANTY — 5-year limited warranty. (Battery is prorated.) Complete warranty terms located at
www.acuitybrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_conditions.aspx
Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C.
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Example: LE S 1 R EL N SD
For shortest lead times, configure products using bolded options.
Series
Face type
Housing color
Number of faces
Letter color Input voltage
Operation
Options
LE
S Stencil
P Panel 1
(blank) Matte
black,
brushed
aluminum
face
BZ
Dark
bronze 2
W
White
B
Matte
black 2
1
2
R
G
(blank) AC only
EL N
Nickel-cadmium
battery back-up
X2
Lamp wired on two
separate AC circuits 3
(blank)
TP
VR
LED,
surface
mount
LRE LED, recessed
Single face
Double face 2
Red
Green
(blank) Universal
input
voltage
(120277V,
50 or 60
HZ)
FI FA
FI
FA
SD
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number.
ELA US12
ELA WG1
ELA WGEXT
ELA WGEXE
EMERGENCY
12” stem kit (see spec sheet ELA-StemKits) 2,8
Back-mount wire guard (see spec sheet ELA-WG) 2
Top-mount wire guard (see spec sheet ELA-WG) 2
End-mount wire guard (see spec sheet ELA-WG) 2
ELA LEHO 120/277 N Remote-capable exit with black canopy; provides
90 minutes of 11.1W capacity for remote head 2,8
ELA ERK
Recess mounting rough-in kit for LRE only (see
spec sheet ELA-ERK-LEHO)
None
Two tamper proof Torx-head screws
Vandal-resistant shield (1/8” thick
polycarbonate) 4
Field selectable fire alarm interface
or flashing emergency operation
with intermittent audible alarm (one
flash per minute) 5
Fire alarm flashing interface 6
Flashing emergency operation and
intermittent audible alarm 7
Self-diagnostics 7
Notes
1 Panel face available for special wording only
(see Custom Signage spec sheet).
2 Not available with LRE models.
3 UL Listed as emergency lighting.
4 VR contains tamper proof screws.
5 Available with SD option only.
6 Available with AC only or EL N option only.
7 Available with EL N option only.
8 Add W for white.
LE-LRE
LE-LRE LED, Signature
SPECIFICATIONS
MOUNTING
All dimensions are in inches (centimeters). For VR option, add 1/4" to height
and width. Add 1/8" depth for single face; 1/4" depth for double face.
ELECTRICAL
Primary circuit
Typical LED
life1
Type
Red LED AC only
Supply
voltage
Input watts
Max. amps
120
0.81
0.05
277
1.2
0.06
120
1.05
0.05
277
1.32
0.06
120
1.3
0.06
277
1.4
0.07
120
1.5
0.07
277
1.7
0.07
Shipping weight: LE - 4 lbs (1.8 kgs)
LE EL N- 5 lbs (2.3 kgs)
LRE - 4 lbs (1.8 kgs)
LRE EL N - 5 lbs (2.3 kgs)
10 Years
Green LED AC only
LE - End Mounting
LE - Top Mounting
10 Years
Red LED emergency
1-5/8
(4.1)
4-1/2
(11.4)
10 Years
Green LED emergency
6
(15.2)
9-1/2
(24.0)
7-7/8
(20.0)
10 Years
11-3/8
(28.9)
13
(33.0)
1-3/4
(4.4)
LE - Back Mounting
BATTERY
Sealed Nickel-Cadmium
Shelf life2
Typical life2
Maintenance3
3 years
7-9 years
none
4
(10.2)
Optimum temperature4
7-7/8
(20.0)
5-3/4
(14.4)
50°F – 104°F
11-3/8
(28.9)
(10°C – 40°C)
STANDARD MOUNTING
Notes
1 The typical life of the exit LED lamp is 10 years, based on continuous operation.
2 At 77°F (25°C).
3 All life safety equipment, including emergency lighting for path of egress must be maintained, serviced, and
tested in accordance with all National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and local codes. Failure to perform the
required maintenance, service, or testing could jeopardize the safety of occupants and will void all warranties.
4 Optimum ambient temperature range where unit will provide capacity for 90 minutes. Higher and lower
temperatures affect life and capacity. Consult factory for detailed information.
9-7/16
(24.0)
12-15/16
(32.9)
Trim ring
(provided)
Trim ring brackets
(provided)
SELFDIAGNOSTICS
KEY FEATURE
SD option only)
•
•
•
•
Five-minute test every 30 days
30-minute test every six months
90-minute test annually
Diagnostics evaluate the battery, lamp, charger and
AC to DC transfer.
Condition
Normal mode
Self-testing
Emergency mode
Hi-charge
Battery failure
Lamp failure
Circuit failure
J-box
(contractor furnished)
The typical life of the exit LED lamp is 10 years.
Indication
Steady green
Flashing green
Off
Steady red
Single-flash red
Double-flash red
Triple-flash red
Wall opening dimensions: 8-3/4” H x 12-3/8” W x 1-3/4” D
MOUNTING WITH OPTIONAL ROUGH-IN KIT (ELA ERK)
Contractor
furnished
supports
12-3/8
(31.4)
8-7/8
(22.5)
4
(10.2)
Wall opening dimensions: 8-7/8” H x 12-3/8” W x 4” D
LE-LRE
EMERGENCY:
One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-334-8694 Fax: 770-981-8141 www.lithonia.com
© 1994-2015 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 06/30/15
®
LIMITED WARRANTY FOR CREE LED LIGHTING FIXTURES
®
®
®
(INCLUDING BETALED TECHNOLOGY; TRUEWHITE TECHNOLOGY; AND ESSENTIA FIXTURES)
This limited warranty is provided by the Cree company described below ("Seller") to you as the original purchaser of
the LED lighting product that is identified on Seller's invoice reflecting its original purchase (the "Product"). The Seller
is the Cree company identified as such on the invoice. This limited warranty may be transferred to subsequent
purchasers of the Product, provided that such Product is resold in new condition and in its original packaging. Seller
warrants that the Product, when delivered in new condition and in its original packaging, will be free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of TEN (10) YEARS from the date of original purchase. The determination of
whether the Product is defective shall be made by Seller in its sole discretion with consideration given to the overall
performance of the Product. A Product shall not be considered defective solely as a result of the failure of individual
LED components to emit light if the number of inoperable components is less than 10% of the total number of LED
components in the Product.
If Seller determines the Product is defective, Seller will elect, in its sole discretion, to refund you the purchase price of
the Product, repair the Product or replace the Product. This limited warranty will not apply to loss or damage to the
Product caused by: negligence; abuse; misuse; mishandling; improper installation, storage or maintenance; damage
due to fire or acts of God; vandalism; civil disturbances; power surges; improper power supply; electrical current
fluctuations; corrosive environment installations; induced vibration; harmonic oscillation or resonance associated with
movement of air currents around the Product; alteration; accident; failure to follow installation, operating,
maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed by Seller or applicable electrical codes; or improper service of
the Product performed by someone other than Seller or its authorized service provider. This limited warranty
excludes field labor and service charges related to the repair or replacement of the Product. THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY IS VOID IF THE PRODUCT IS NOT USED FOR THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT IS DESIGNED.
Seller reserves the right to utilize new, reconditioned, refurbished, repaired or remanufactured products or parts in the
warranty repair or replacement process. Such products and parts will be comparable in function and performance to
an original product or part, as determined by Seller in its sole discretion, and warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period.
In order to make a warranty claim, you must notify Seller in writing within sixty (60) days after your discovery of the
defect, provide proof of purchase such as the invoice and comply with Seller's other warranty requirements. Upon
receiving that notice, Seller may require you to promptly return the Product to Seller, or its authorized service
provider, freight prepaid. Your warranty claim should be addressed to Cree, Inc., 9201 Washington Avenue, Racine,
WI 53406.
This limited warranty only applies to specified LED fixtures. Any warranties applicable to finish, poles, tenons,
®
®
®
mounts, Cree LED lamps, Cree LED bulbs, Cree LED T8 Series lamps, UR Series LED upgrade kits, CR Series
™
™
LED troffers enabled with SMARTCAST Technology, CS Series linear luminaires enabled with SMARTCAST
™
Technology, KR Series downlights enabled with SMARTCAST Technology, DR Series downlights, CR Series
®
downlights, LR24™ troffers, certain BetaLED Technology outdoor fixtures (specifically Class II as defined per
IEC/EN60598), backup batteries, controls, occupancy sensors, photocells and other fixture accessories can be found
at www.cree.com/lighting/products/warranty.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY PROVISIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE GIVEN AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF
ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
ANY WARRANTY AGAINST INFRINGEMENT AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, COMPENSATORY, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES. SELLER'S AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO A DEFECTIVE
PRODUCT SHALL IN ANY EVENT BE LIMITED TO THE MONIES PAID TO SELLER FOR THAT DEFECTIVE
PRODUCT.
This warranty is effective for purchases of Product on or after the effective date set forth below. Seller reserves the
right to modify this warranty from time to time. Any modification of this warranty shall be effective for all orders placed
with Seller on or after the effective date of such revised warranty.
Effective Date: October 30, 2014
INDOOR LIGHTING LIMITED WARRANTY
Limited Warranty (“Warranty”): Subject to the exclusions set forth below, Hubbell Lighting, Inc. (“Hubbell”) warrants that the
Hubbell branded indoor fixtures identified on Exhibit A (“Products”) will be free from defects in material and workmanship which
cause the Products to fail to operate in accordance with the specifications set forth in the documentation published or provided with the
Products (the “Specifications”) for the applicable period and subject to the additional terms and conditions set forth on Exhibit A from
the date of shipment (“Warranty Period”). Unless otherwise noted on Exhibit A, Hubbell warrants that any standard finish on a Product
will be free from cracking, peeling, excessive fading, and corrosion defects during the applicable Warranty Period. For light emitting
diode (“LED”) Products, the LED arrays in the Products will be considered defective in material or workmanship only if a total of 15%
or more of the individual LEDs in the Products fail to illuminate.
Exclusions: This Warranty applies only when the Products have been properly handled, stored, wired, transported, installed, operated and
maintained in accordance with the applicable Specifications, including, without limitation, installation in applications in which ambient
temperatures are within the range of specified operating temperatures and operation within the electrical values shown on the
Specifications. Hubbell shall have no responsibility under this Warranty for any failure of the Products that results from external causes
including without limitation: acts of nature; physical damage; exposure to adverse or hazardous chemicals or other substances; use of
reactive cleaning agents and/or harsh chemicals to clean the Products; environmental conditions; vandalism; fire; power failure, improper
power supply, power surges or dips, and/or excessive switching; fatigue failure or similar phenomena resulting from induced vibrations,
harmonic oscillation or resonance associated with movement of air currents around the Product; animal or insect activity; fault or
negligence of the purchaser of the Products, any end user of the Products and/or any third parties not engaged by Hubbell, improper or
unauthorized use, installation, handling, storage, alteration, maintenance or service, including failure to abide by any product
classifications or certifications, or failure to comply with any applicable standards, codes, recommendations, product specification sheets,
use of Products with products, processes or materials supplied by the purchaser of the Products, any end user or third parties, or any other
occurrences beyond Hubbell's reasonable control. In addition, Hubbell shall have no responsibility under this Warranty for any
substantial deterioration in the Product finish that is caused by failure to clean, inspect or maintain the finish of the Products. During the
Warranty Period some staining, chalking or fading may occur. This is normal aging of the finish and is not a manufacturing defect;
therefore it is not covered by this Warranty. Neither polycarbonate nor acrylic material used in the Products is warranted against
yellowing, as yellowing may naturally occur over time due to normal aging. If the Products are used on existing foundations, anchorages
or structures, the purchaser of the Products and/or any end user is solely responsible for the structural integrity of such existing
foundations, anchorages or structures and all consequences arising from their use.
Adequate records (as determined by Hubbell in its sole discretion) of operating history, maintenance, and/or testing must be kept by the
end user and provided to Hubbell upon request to substantiate that the Products have failed to comply with the terms of this Warranty.
The Products are not warranted against costs that may be incurred in connection with changes or modifications to the Products required to
accommodate site conditions and/or faulty building construction or design. In addition, the Products are not warranted against cost
resulting from installation of third party components, failures of third party supplied components, or failures of Hubbell supplied Products
caused by third party supplied components. This Warranty is not applicable to any product(s) which are not installed and operated in
accordance with the current edition of The National Electric Code (NEC), the Standards for Safety of Underwriters’ Laboratory, Inc.
(UL), or the standards for the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and with Hubbell instructions and guidelines for the
Product. THIS WARRANTY IS VOID WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT IF THE PRODUCT IS NOT USED FOR THE
PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT WAS DESIGNED OR IF ANY REPAIRS OR ALTERATIONS ARE MADE BY ANY PERSON NOT
AUTHORIZED BY HUBBELL IN WRITING.
Except as otherwise set forth herein, Hubbell does not warrant ballasts, battery packs, lamps, photocells, occupancy sensors, low voltage
indicators, fuses, surge suppressors, surge protection devices, high intensity discharge (“HID”) components and other third party devices
that are not manufactured by Hubbell, which are covered by the applicable third party manufacturer warranty (if any). Such third party
manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the costs related to any claims associated with any such devices.
Remedy: If the Product(s) fail to comply with the terms of this Warranty and the end user (and the purchaser of the Product(s) if different
from the end user) has fully complied with all of the obligations under this Warranty and the Terms and Conditions of Sale for Hubbell
Lighting, Inc. (which are available at www.hubbelllighting.com/terms_and_conditions) including, without limitation, payment in full in
respect of the Products, Hubbell, at its sole option, will repair or replace the Product(s) with the same or a functionally equivalent
Product(s) or component part(s). Specifically, Hubbell will repair the Product, replace with a similar or like Product (as determined by
Hubbell in its sole discretion), or issue a credit to the purchaser which may be used for future Hubbell product purchases. (The amount of
such credit shall be calculated by Hubbell at its sole discretion). Hubbell reserves the right to use new, reconditioned, refurbished,
repaired or remanufactured products or parts in the repair or replacement of any Product covered by this Warranty. This Warranty
excludes any and all removal or reinstallation costs and expenses including, without limitation, labor and equipment required to remove
and/or reinstall original or replacement Product(s) or parts, shipping costs to return nonconforming Products(s) or any damage that may
occur during the return of any Product(s) to Hubbell. This Warranty only extends to the Products as delivered to, and is for the sole and
exclusive benefit of, the end user of the Products at the original location. Hubbell reserves the right to use new, reconditioned,
refurbished, repaired or remanufactured products or parts in the repair or replacement of any Product covered by this Warranty. This
Warranty may not be transferred or assigned by the end user. The repair, issuing of future purchase credit or replacement of any Products
or component part within the Products is the sole and exclusive remedy for failure of the Products to comply with the terms of this
Warranty and does not extend the Warranty period. Warranty claims regarding Products must be submitted in writing within thirty (30)
days of discovery of the defect or failure to an authorized Hubbell customer service representative. Products or component parts may be
required to be returned for inspection and verification of non-conformance by Hubbell, but no Products or component parts will be
accepted for inspection, verification or return unless accompanied by a completed return materials authorization form which can be
obtained only from an authorized Hubbell customer service representative. Hubbell is not responsible for any costs and expenses
incurred in connection with the shipment of Products to Hubbell, but Hubbell shall bear all cost and expense incurred in connection with
the shipment of replacement Products to the end user.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES: THE FOREGOING WARRANTY TERMS ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES AND HUBBELL EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
RELATING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY TO THE PRODUCT(S), WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, OR ARISING BY COURSE OF
DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HUBBELL OR
ANY EMPLOYEEE, AGENT, DISTRIBUTOR OR OTHER SUPPLIER OF HUBBELL PRODUCTS SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THE WARRANTY.NO EMPLOYEE, AGENT, DISTRIBUTOR OR
OTHER SUPPLIER OF HUBBELL PRODUCTS HAS THE AUTHORITY TO MODIFY OR AMEND THIS WARRANTY
WITHOUT EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM HUBBELL.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: IN NO EVENT SHALL HUBBELL’S TOTAL LIABILITY IN RESPECT OF ANY AND ALL
CLAIMS OF ANY KIND WHETHER IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH, OR RESULTING FROM HUBBELL'S PERFORMANCE OR
BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY, OR FROM HUBBELL'S SALE, DELIVERY, RESALE, REPAIR, OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY
PRODUCT(S) OR THE FURNISHING OF ANY SERVICE, EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE ALLOCABLE TO THE
PRODUCT(S) THAT GIVE RISE TO THE CLAIM, AND ANY AND ALL SUCH LIABILITY SHALL TERMINATE UPON THE
EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD. IN NO EVENT SHALL HUBBELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, MULTIPLE OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER AS THE RESULT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER THEORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LABOR
OR EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO REMOVE AND/OR REINSTALL ORIGINAL OR REPLACEMENT PARTS, LOSS OF TIME,
PROFITS OR REVENUES, LACK OR LOSS OF PRODUCTIVITY, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT(S) OR ANY ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT, INTEREST CHARGES OR COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES, SYSTEMS,
SERVICES OR DOWNTIME COSTS, DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT, ANY INCONVENIENCE, COST
OR DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF ANY DELAY IN PERFORMING, FAILURE TO PERFORM OR OTHER BREACH OF THE
FOREGOING WARRANTY OR OBLIGATIONS UNDER SUCH WARRANTY, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES AGAINST THE
PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCTS OR THE END USER, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE,
INSTALLATION, USE OF, INABILITY TO USE, OR THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCTS.
Right to Modify or Discontinue Warranty: This Warranty is effective for the purchases of Products on or after the effective date set
forth herein and is in consideration of and is expressly subject to and conditioned by the terms set forth herein. Hubbell reserves the right
to modify or discontinue this Warranty without notice provided that any such modification or discontinuance will only be effective with
respect any Products purchased after such modification or discontinuance.
Effective January 30, 2015
EXHIBIT A
HUBBELL LIGHTING – C&I INDOOR FIXTURES LIMITED WARRANTY1
HUBBELL LIGHTING INDOOR FIXTURES
HUBBELL LIGHTING BRAND
1
LED2
NON-LED
SPECIAL CONDITIONS AND EXCEPTIONS
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
5 years
6 months
None.
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
Enhanced Aluminum Reflectors: 25 year warranty against
cracking, peeling, and delaminating
5 years
1 year
Exterior Housing Paint Finish: 5 year warranty on all paint
finishes for LED fixtures
Progress Lighting fixtures are separately warranted; see www.hubbelllighting.com/resources/warranty.
Includes LED arrays and LED drivers but excludes surge protection devices and other integral controls described in the Warranty. Devices and
components manufactured by Hubbell and included with the Products are warranted separately; the terms of such warranties are located at
www.hubbelllighting.com/resources/warranty.
2
QUICk 60+
®
The Heart of a Comprehensive System Service Program
Compare lighting system warranties – you’ll see that our QUICK 60+ warranty
offers better coverage, more service options and, more important, peace of mind.
Limited Warranty
Subject to change without notice.
Combination Lamp and Ballast System Limited Warranty
OSRAM SYLVANIA Inc. (OSRAM SYLVANIA) warrants SYLVANIA lamps
installed on QUICKTRONIC® ballasts to be free from defects in material
and workmanship and to operate from the date of installation (or date
of manufacture if installation date is not known or available) for the time
periods and subject to the Terms and Conditions specied below.
System3,4,5
QUICKTRONIC T81
QUICKTRONIC T81
QUICKTRONIC T81
QUICKTRONIC T81
QUICKTRONIC T81
QUICKTRONIC T8 High Ambient1,9
QUICKTRONIC 59
QUICKTRONIC 59
QUICKTRONIC 86/T8HO High Ambient1
QUICKTRONIC T5, T5/HO1
QUICKTRONIC 54T5/HO1
QUICKTRONIC 54T5HO High Ambient1
QUICKTRONIC ICE1,5
QUICKTRONIC 54PHO & DL40
QUICKTRONIC CF1
QUICKTRONIC MH7
QUICKTRONIC MH7
QUICKTRONIC HPS7
QUICKTRONIC 96IS/96HO & 40T12
If lamps fail to operate for the warranty period, OSRAM SYLVANIA will
provide a free replacement lamp (but no labor allowance). If a
QUICKTRONIC ballast fails to operate within the warranty period,
OSRAM SYLVANIA will provide a free replacement ballast and labor
allowance in accordance with the “Labor Options” set forth below.
Lamp
Ballast Warranty Period8
OCTRON® VIVID VALUE3
60 mos.
OCTRON Family 700 & 800 Series3
60 mos.
OCTRON XPS®, XP® & XP/SS, XPPLUS/SS2,3
60 mos.
OCTRON XV™ & XV/SS2,3
60 mos.
OCTRON XP/XL & XP/XL/SS Family2,3
60 mos.
OCTRON XP, XP/SS2,3
36/60 mos.@<90°/70°C
OCTRON FO96/XP, XP/SS, XV & XV/SS2,3
60 mos.
60 mos.
OCTRON FO963
OCTRON FO96HO3
36/60 mos.@<90°/70°C
PENTRON® Family10
60 mos.
PENTRON FP54/HO, FP54/C/HO, FP54/HO/SS
60 mos.
PENTRON HO/XL
60 mos.
PENTRON FP54/HO, FP54/C/HO, FP54/HO/SS 36/60 mos.@<90°/70°C
PENTRON HO/XL
36/60 mos.@<90°/70°C
ICETRON®
60 mos.
DULUX® FT55DL, FT40DL & FT40DL/SS Family
60 mos.
DULUX D/E, D/E/SS, T/E, T/E/IN, T/E/IN/SS T/E/C
60 mos.
METALARC® Family6 (7K-12K hrs. avg. rated life)
36/60 mos.
METALARC Family6 (15K-20K hrs. avg. rated life)
36/60 mos.
LUMALUX® Family6 (30K hrs. avg. rated life)
36/60 mos.
N/A
60 mos.
Lamp Warranty Period*
24 mos.
30 mos.
36 mos.
36 mos.
60 mos.
36 mos.
30 mos.
24 mos.
30 mos.
24 mos.
36 mos.
60 mos.
36 mos.
60 mos.
60 mos.
24 mos.
24 mos.
6 mos.
12 mos.
24 mos
N/A
*Note: Fluorescent lamp warranty periods are based on a 3 hour minimum cycle, unless otherwise noted, with a maximum of 4400 hours per year.
Other operating cycles may affect warranty period. Lamp warranty can renew when installation is group relamped, contact OSRAM SYLVANIA for details.
1
Occupancy sensor application, 10 minute/start minimum, allowed with QUICKTRONIC PROStart® and with QUICKTRONIC ICE ballasts.
2
OCTRON SUPERSAVER® bi-pin lamps operate on many of our QUICKTRONIC® T8 electronic ballasts, see specs for details.
3
QUICKTRONIC, Professional Series and High Efciency Series including all IS, PS & DIM models where applicable.
4
Labor options must be pre-approved by OSRAM SYLVANIA. Any labor option or cost that is not pre-approved will not be eligible for reimbursement.
5
QUICKTRONIC ballasts and ICETRON lamp warranty period allows up to 8760 hrs per year (continuous operation).
6
Contact OSRAM SYLVANIA for detailed specications of METALARC and LUMALUX lamps.
7
QUICKTRONIC MH and HPS ballasts warranty is 36 or 60 months, depending on maximum case temperature. Refer to product specications for details.
Electronic HID system warranty period is based on a minimum cycle of 10hr/start up to a maximum operation of 6,000 hours/year.
8
Maximum Case Temp. <70°C, for normal environmental operating conditions (40°C max. ambient) unless noted. Refer to product specications for details.
9
QUICKTRONIC T8 High Ambient (HT) Series
10
PENTRON 14, 21, 28 and 35W and PENTRON HO 24, 39 and 80W.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
SYLVANIA lamps and QUICKTRONIC ballasts must be installed
together as a system and be installed and operated under suitable
environmental conditions and in accordance with the latest National
Electrical Code, Underwriters Laboratory Bulletins, and ANSI
Specications. This warranty will not apply in the event of conditions demonstrating abnormal use or stress, such as operating
temperatures in excess of maximum rated temperatures,
under/over voltage conditions, excessive switching cycles
(see above Note #1) or operating hours, dirty or cracked sockets,
or improper lamp or ballast installation. Replacement of SYLVANIA
lamps with lamps of other manufacturers will void the lamp portion of
this warranty. Replacement of the QUICKTRONIC ballast with any other
ballast will void the entire warranty.
WARRANTY ACTIVATION / SERVICE CLAIMS
The QUICK 60+ warranty is automatically activated after
OSRAM SYLVANIA receives a completed QUICK 60+ warranty registration form within 30 days after installation. An acknowledgment
will be sent for each registration along with a reference number for
future correspondence. Service claims can be made by contacting
1-800-654-0089 to initiate the process for problem resolution.
LABOR OPTIONS (Ballast only and ICETRON lamps only)
No labor allowance is made for any lamp replacement except
ICETRON, during the warranty period. OSRAM SYLVANIA will provide
one of the following labor options for service under the QUICK 60+
warranty program, at OSRAM SYLVANIA’s discretion.
call customer service at
QUESTIONS? Please
1-800-654-0089 or contact your local
OSRAM SYLVANIA representative.
ECS140R13 6-14
1. OSRAM SYLVANIA will contact a service provider and coordinate
replacement at no cost to the user of the ballast, or
2. OSRAM SYLVANIA will reimburse the purchaser reasonable,
customary and necessary labor charges required to install the ballast
replacement.
3. Labor options must be pre-approved by OSRAM SYLVANIA.
Any labor option or cost that is not pre-approved will not be eligible
for reimbursement.
RETURN OF DEFECTIVE PRODUCT
After contacting OSRAM SYLVANIA and receiving a RETURN
MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION NUMBER, the user shall promptly
return the product at the user’s expense to OSRAM SYLVANIA after
receiving instructions as to if, when and where to ship product.
Failure to follow this procedure shall void this warranty.
REPLACEMENT OF PRODUCT, LIMITS OF LIABILITY
The foregoing shall constitute the sole and exclusive remedy of the
purchaser and the sole and exclusive liability of OSRAM SYLVANIA.
NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS MADE OR IS TO BE IMPLIED. OSRAM
SYLVANIA will not, under any circumstance, whether as a result of
breach of contract or warranty, tort, or otherwise, be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages, including lost prots
or revenues or any other costs or damages.
OSRAM SYLVANIA reserves the right to examine all failed lamps
and/or ballasts and reserves the right to be the sole judge as to
whether any lamps and/or ballasts are defective and covered under
this warranty.
Lithonia Lighting Terms and Conditions of Sale
For Shipments Within the United States
Effective August 25, 2008
TERMS
All Lithonia Lighting, a division of Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
(“Lithonia Lighting”) Commercial and Industrial (C&I)
products – 1% cash discount will be allowed on invoices
paid by the 10th of the month following the month of billing.
Payments made after the 10th are due on a net basis to the
25th (1% 10th prox, net 25th prox).
FREIGHT ALLOWANCE
Lithonia Lighting Commercial and Industrial (C&I) products may
be combined on an order to qualify for freight allowance.
Peerless, Peerlite, Hydrel and Antique Street Lamps products
cannot be combined on an order with Lithonia C&I product or
with any other brand to qualify for freight allowance.
For shipments outside the contiguous United States, contact
factory for applicable terms & conditions.
All shipments are F.O.B. our plants, vendors, Distribution Centers
or Field Warehouses:
All orders for Lithonia C&I product having a distributor
price of $3,000 or more for one consignee for one
shipment qualify for freight allowance.
All Lithonia Lighting C&I orders having a distributor
price less than $3,000 will be assessed freight and
handling charges.
Anchor bolts are included with Lithonia C&I poles.
Pre-shipped anchor bolts having a distributor price of
less than $3,000 will be assessed freight and handling
charges.
Warehouse orders can only consist of products
carried in stock.
ALL SHIPMENTS – For all orders that qualify for freight
allowance, we reserve the right to select the carrier and to route
shipments at our discretion. We will ship in the manner selected
by the customer provided the customer assumes any additional
transportation costs.
TRANSPORTATION CLAIMS
Our equipment is tested for mechanical defects prior to shipping.
Our packaging is regularly inspected by transportation authorities
who assume responsibility for both apparent and concealed
damages sustained by improper handling. Title passes to
purchaser upon delivery by us to the carrier, and all claims for
damages or shortages in transit shall be made by purchaser with
delivering carrier. Bills of Lading marked with “Shippers Load and
Count” do not constitute a transfer of liability for the freight or
damages from the consignee to Lithonia Lighting.
PACKAGING
The company reserves the right to optimize packaging at our
discretion. Some products may only be available in bulk package
multiples or case quantities.
PRICES
Prices are subject to change without notice. In the event of a
price increase, all accepted orders on hand will be filled at lower
prices provided such orders are released for shipping prior to the
effective date of the price increase. If the orders are not released
for shipment prior to the price increase, the orders will be billed
at prices in effect at the time of shipment. Special quoted orders
that cannot be released for shipping prior to the price increase
may be subject to an increase in price. Minimum billing for all
product or parts orders is $50 net. Prices do not include lamps
unless so specified.
RETURN OF STOCK MERCHANDISE
No merchandise may be returned without prior written
authorization from our Post-Sale department. Requests to return
merchandise must be made with our agents for transmittal to the
Post-Sale department within four (4) months from date of
shipment by us. All returns must be shipped prepaid to the
location designated on the return authorization. Credit will be
issued based on the original invoice price, or price in effect at
time of return, whichever is lower, less a minimum disposition
charge of 35% (to defray our cost of handling). All returned
product must be in salable condition in order to qualify for credit.
Return authorization will not be granted when the value of all
items to be returned is less than $300. All stock products
containing time-sensitive components that have reached the end
of their warranty or shelf life are not returnable. Outdated or
phase-out stock products are also not returnable.
NON-RETURNABLE MERCHANDISE
All non-stocking, special, custom made and modified products
are not returnable. All Lithonia C&I stock and non-stock poles
are not returnable.
SERVICE AREA LIMITATION
The company reserves the right to refuse to make quotations,
accept orders or make shipments to points of destination
outside of the regular or assigned selling and service area of
the distributor.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Lithonia Lighting warrants all products sold hereunder to be free
from defect in manufacturing, under normal and proper storage,
installation, and use, for a period of one (1) year from the date of
shipment. Our guarantee liability extends only to the repair or
replacement of the defective part, and no labor charges for
correction of the defect by repair or replacement will be paid by
Lithonia Lighting unless prior written authority has been granted
by our Post-Sale department.
Lithonia Lighting shall not be liable for damages that result from
deliveries that do not occur within a customer’s specified time
frame or for any delay or default in delivering products where
occasioned by any cause beyond the control of Lithonia Lighting,
including without limitation embargoes; shortages of labor, raw
materials, or fuel; fires; floods; accidents; acts of war; or other
similar causes.
Products from Lithonia Emergency Systems, except lamps and
fuses, are warranted for a period of three (3) years with the
following exceptions – AC Power Systems are warranted for 1
year. Warranty limitations the same as above.
All components of the KiloWatch System, consisting of the
factory-installed electrical system inside the HID lighting fixtures,
the external switching devices, and all KiloWatch modified
lighting fixtures used in the KiloWatch System, are warranted for
a period of five (5) years, warranty limitations the same as above.
All polycarbonate lens shielding supplied with Rough Service
products is warranted against breakage for the lifetime of the
product, warranty limitations same as above.
All Indoor HID Industrial lighting fixtures are warranted for a
period of five (5) years, warranty limitations the same as above.
Anchor bolts must be installed using current factory-furnished
templates.
Fluorescent Ballast Guarantee – Ballasts are those of
recognized, responsible manufacturers. Orders calling for
specified brand name or type ballast will be handled on a
quotation basis only. Claims for defective ballasts found to be in
warranty should be made directly to the ballast manufacturer
through their local ballast service center or their field
representative in order to expedite replacement. Lithonia Lighting
is not responsible for any costs or expenses, including without
limitation any labor charges for replacement of defective ballasts.
Any such costs would be the responsibility of and must be
authorized by the ballast manufacturer. Copies of each
manufacturer’s standard ballast replacement program are
available upon request from Lithonia representatives or can be
accessed via www.lithonia.com.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY TERMS ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN
LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES. LITHONIA LIGHTING
MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS,
AND LITHONIA LIGHTING EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO DISTRIBUTOR OR SUPPLIER OF
LITHONIA LIGHTING HAS THE AUTHORITY TO MODIFY OR
AMEND THIS LIMITED WARRANTY.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY:
The foregoing limited warranty provides the purchaser’s sole
and exclusive remedy relating to Lithonia Lighting’s products.
The total liability of Lithonia Lighting on any and all claims of
any kind, whether in contract, warranty, tort (including
negligence), strict liability or otherwise, arising out of or in
connection with, or resulting from, Lithonia Lighting’s
performance or breach of the foregoing limited warranty or
from Lithonia Lighting’s sale, delivery, repair, or replacement of
any products, or the furnishing of any services, shall in no
event exceed the purchase price allocable to the specific
product which gives rise to the claim, and any and all such
liability shall terminate upon the expiration of the limited
warranty set forth above. IN NO EVENT SHALL LITHONIA
LIGHTING BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES,
EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES,
WHETHER AS THE RESULT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR ANY OTHER THEORY.
CANCELLATION CHARGE
Orders for Distribution Center or Field Warehouse stocking items
may be cancelled prior to shipping without charge. All other
orders may not be cancelled unless we are reimbursed for work
already performed and for special material purchased by our
company. If an order is cancelled after shipment or if delivery is
refused at destination, all warehousing, delivery, disposition and
return costs will be charged to the customer.
GENERAL
Lithonia Lighting price sheets are not offers to sell, and
possession of a price sheet does not entitle one to purchase.
Lithonia Lighting shall not be bound to sell any products unless
it shall (in its sole discretion) accept submitted purchase
orders. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Consult factory for verification. The compliance of our product
to individual project specifications and the approval for their
use is not warranted by our company. If purchaser does not
pay the purchase price within the time periods set forth above,
Lithonia Lighting reserves the right to assess a finance charge
on any unpaid, past due balance up to the maximum legal rate.
If any amount due Lithonia Lighting is collected by, or
attempted to be collected through an attorney at law, Lithonia
Lighting shall be entitled to recover all collection expenses,
including attorney’s fees.
ACCEPTANCE:
Acceptance of orders can be made only at our plants,
Distribution Centers or Field Warehouses for warehouse
orders on the basis of these terms and conditions of sale.
Lithonia Lighting will not accept orders that require customerfurnished components.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT:
Except as expressly agreed in writing signed by Lithonia Lighting,
the terms and conditions stated above shall constitute the entire
sales agreement between Lithonia Lighting and the purchaser.
Any contrary or additional terms or conditions submitted by the
purchaser (other than the description of the products being
ordered and the requested quantities, shipping date, and
shipping location contained in purchaser’s purchase order) shall
be deemed to be of no force or effect and are hereby rejected.
Purchaser’s submission of a purchase order shall indicate
purchaser’s acknowledgment of and agreement with these
Terms and Conditions.
Lithonia Lighting reserves the right to change these Terms and
Conditions of Sale without notice.
ONE LITHONIA WAY, CONYERS, GEORGIA 30012 PHONE 770-922-9000 www.lithonia.com
Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
LL-Terms-US.doc, Rev. 08/08
WARRANTY PARTS REPLACEMENT PROGRAM INSTRUCTIONS
The warranty parts replacement program (WPRP) is to be used to repair merchandise
that would otherwise be returned on an RGA as defective. This FREE program is
offered as a swift means of correcting common field issues (sockets, springs, etc.) with
regard to defective and/or missing components provided that the original order is within
Juno’s warranty period and that replacement part(s) requested coincide with original
material ordered. Juno Lighting Inc. will not authorize or reimburse any labour or
expense incurred for the replacement of components ordered to repair merchandise.
NOTE: This form will not apply to ballasts, batteries, drivers, light engines or
transformers. These types of component replacements will be handled via Bill and
Credit (Reorder and RGA).
» Log onto the Juno Lighting Group Ecommerce website
http://www.junolightinggroup.com
» Pull up the Warranty Parts order form at
http://www.junolightinggroup.com/agenttoolkit/Includes/WPRP_Form.xls
» Complete agent, purchase order and customer information requested on form
» List component description or part number(s) if known in appropriate product
category section
» E-Mail form to technicalservices@junoltggroup.com for processing
» Requested parts will ship via best way. The cost of regular ground freight is
included.
(Rev 05-13)
Date
5/27/2016
Customer Staff Electric
Attn
ANGLEIKA MCKENZIE
Job Ref
St. Joe's Breast Imaging
PO
Our SO#
201604829-931581
We are enclosing here within ( 1 ) copies of drawings:
QTY
CATALOG# OR DRAWING#
TYPE / DESG
MANUFACTURER
C6H-226Q
C652-CL-WH
A6
A600-A21-CL-WH
HB-TL
JUNO
JUNO
JUNO
JUNO
JUNO
COMPLETED BY GRAYBAR
[
] For approval
[ X ] For record only
[
] Please return 2 copies of approved cuts
COMPLETED BY CUSTOMER
[
[
[
] Approved
] Approved as noted / corrected
] Revise and resubmit
This submittal represents our interpretation of the projected plans and specification as they relate to the equipment covered.
Voltages are shown for fluorescent and H.I.D. Equipment. If voltage requirements are other than indicated, the submittal should be approved as noted, and the correct voltage shown.
If no voltage is shown, it is our intent to furnish 120 Volt.
Plaster frames and other auxiliary equipment such as stems, chain hangers, special fusing, etc., are not included except when specifically indicated, or when furnished as an integral
part of the equipment as described by catalog number.
Special finishes should be noted, if not specifically indicated.
Every effort has been made to submit the correct fixture for the ceiling required. Final determination should be the responsibility of the contractor. We assume the responsibility for
furnishing material only as submitted. Any deviation must be noted on the copies returned.
Gerald "Jeeps" Starner
Quotations Dept.
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
C6H-226Q
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J1.1.20
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Optics
Reflector: Precision reflector with 55° visual cut-off to both lamp and lamp
image • Single position optics eliminate possibility of specified lamp being
installed in incorrect position • Low iridescent specular or satin Alzak®
.050” thick reflector in clear, gold, wheat, pewter or bronze with integral
flange of same finish; other finishes available upon request • Painted white
flange is optional • V-Flux Miro® specular insert increases efficiency of horizontal CFL models without sacrificing brightness control
Baffle: Specular clear Alzak® upper reflector and white or black painted
deep multi-groove aluminum baffle insert with integral flange painted white
Electrical
Ballast: Class “P” thermally protected 120V-277V universal voltage high
power factor electronic ballast with end of life protection
Lamp Holder: 4-pin G24q UV stabilized thermoplastic socket with nonfatiguing stainless steel lamp retention spring
6” HORIZONTAL CFL DOWNLIGHT
OPEN APERTURE
TWO 13, 18 or 26W Quad Tube
C6H-213Q, C6H-218Q, C6H-226Q
ONE 13, 18 or 26W Quad Tube
C6H-113Q, C6H-118Q, C6H-126Q
C650, C652, C650B-Q, C652B-Q
Mechanical
Socket Housing: Heavy gauge die-formed galvanized steel
Mounting Frame: 16-gauge galvanized steel mounting ring with factory
installed spring steel friction clips • Accommodates ceilings up to 3/4”
thick; ceiling thickness adapter accessory is available for ceilings up to 2”
• Common rough-in section accepts open, single wall wash and lensed
reflectors
Mounting Bracket: Mounting brackets have 3” vertical adjustment and
accept proprietary Tru-Lock bar hangers, 1 1/2” C-channel and flat linear
bars (ordered as accessories) or 1/2” EMT, 3/4” and 1 1/2” lathing channel (by others) • One-piece Tru-Lock bar hangers have integral T-bar locking
screws and alignment notches for locating and locking fixture in the center
or 1/4 tile increments
Junction Box: Ballast mounted to J-box cover for optimal heat dissipation
and serviceability from below the ceiling • Oversized 4”x 6” galvanized
steel junction box with (6) 1/2” and (1) 3/4” knockouts facilitate quick
wiring • Junction box rated for eight No. 12 AWG 90°C branch circuit
conductors (4-in, 4-out)
Type Cat. No.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Project:_________________________________________
Notes: _________________________________________
DIMENSIONS
5 7/8"
Labels and Listings
UL/C-UL listed for feed through and damp locations • I.B.E.W. Union made
Product specifications subject to change without notice.
5 1/2" Dia.
Baffle
6" Dia.
Open
ENGINEERING DATA
Voltage
120V-HPF
277V-HPF
347V-HPF Canada
Lamp Wattage 1x132x131x182x181x262x26 1x132x131x182x181x262x26 1x132x131x182x181x262x26
11 11/16"
6 7/8" Dia.
Ceiling Cutout
13 11/16"
Total input power 16W29W19W35W27W51W 16W29W19W35W27W51W 18W33W21W38W31W57W
Operating AMPS 0.130.250.160.300.230.43 0.060.110.070.130.100.19 0.060.100.110.060.090.17
Ballast factor
1.001.001.000.951.001.00 1.001.001.000.951.001.00 1.000.981.000.981.020.98
ORDERING INFORMATION: Rough-in, reflector and accessories each ordered separately.
Example: C6H-226Q-BR
Wattage/Lamp
Rough-In
C6HC6H
Example: C652B-Q-B
-
226Q
113Q
1x13W
213Q
2x13W
118Q
1x18W
218Q
2x18W
126Q
1x26W
226Q
2x26W
Options
Finish
-
-
347 347 Volt
Quad, 4-Pin BR Emergency Battery
Back-up w/Remote
Quad, 4-Pin Switch
BN Emergency Battery
Back-up w/Integral Test
Quad, 4-Pin Switch
Quad, 4-Pin HRHigh-Lumen Emergency
Battery Back-up with
Remote Switch
Quad, 4-Pin
HNHigh-Lumen Emergency
Battery Back-up with
Quad, 4-Pin
Integral Test Switch
D101Dimming Ballast
Advance Mark 10™
(not available for 13W)
D7 Dimming Ballast
Advance Mark 7™
DL1 Dimming Ballast
Lutron Compact SE
(not available for 13W)
***FFuse and Fuse Holder
(Where *** = voltage)
2S Dual Level Switching
CP Chicago Plenum
C650
Open
Reflector,
1-Lamp
C652
Open
Reflector,
2-Lamp
C650B-Q
Baffle, 1-Lamp
C652B-Q
Baffle, 2-Lamp
Add a -1 for 120V, a -2 for 277V
Example: C6H-118Q-D10-1
1
1/10
Color Options
Reflector
Example: HB-TL
Options
Accessories
WH
White Flange
MAX##Label for
maximum wattage
(where ## = wattage)
Hole for
BN
emergency test switch
HB-TL 25” Tru-Lock grid
ceiling bar hangers,
Pair
HB-5252” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-2828” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
LB-27 27” Linear Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-4Bar Hanger
conversion kit for
wooden joists
SCA6-*Sloped Ceiling
Adapter
*Angle must be specified
when ordering; Available in
5°, 10°, 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°
Example: SCA6-20
C
Clear
GGold
WTWheat
PTPewter
BZBronze
BBlack
WWhite
Low Iridescent
Alzak® Finishes:
LSpecular
SSatin
Blank for baffle &
white
1300 South Wolf Road • Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
PHONE 800-367-5866 • FAX 888-708-6578
www.junolightinggroup.com
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
C6H-226Q
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J1.1.20
OPEN REFLECTOR
(2X18W QUAD TUBE)
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: C6H-218Q (C652-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03061799
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 55.8%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.28
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: Two OSI CF18DD/E/827, rated at 2500 total lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
100
75ϒ
200
65ϒ
300
400
55ϒ
500
45ϒ
600
700
35ϒ
800
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
25ϒ
75ϒ
400
65ϒ
600
800
55ϒ
1000
45ϒ
1200
1400
35ϒ
1600
1800
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
75ϒ
65ϒ
300
400
55ϒ
500
45ϒ
600
700
35ϒ
800
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
25ϒ
Candela/M2
28317
6878
1376
447
0
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
27.0
19.8
15.2
12.0
9.7
8.0
6.8
5.8
5.0
4.3
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
11548
55
2716
65
389
75
0
85
506
Beam
Diameter
5.311.7’
3.913.7’
3.015.6’
2.417.6’
1.919.6’
1.621.5’
1.323.5’
1.125.4’
1.027.4’
0.929.3’
Candela/M2
39565
9305
1334
0
1734
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
843
23.4
45.9
0-40° 1342
37.3
73.0
0-60° 1825
50.7
99.3
0-90° 1838
51.1 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1838
51.1
100.0
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: C6H-126Q (C650-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03062899
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 57.1%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.43
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: One OSI CF26DD/E/841, rated at 1825 total lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
200
Beam
Diameter
4.611.0’
3.312.9’
2.614.7’
2.016.5’
1.618.4’
1.420.2’
1.122.1’
1.023.9’
0.825.7’
0.727.6’
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
658
26.3
47.1
0-40° 1035
41.4
74.2
0-60° 1382
55.3
99.1
0-90° 1395
55.8 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1395
55.8
100.0
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 972
5° 1012 97
15° 1042 295
25° 975
451
35° 794
499
45° 510
395
55° 97
87
65° 10
10
75°
0
0
85°
3
3
OPEN REFLECTOR
(1X26W QUAD TUBE)
90ϒ
85ϒ
Footcandles
Beam Edge
20.9
15.3
11.7
9.3
7.5
6.2
5.2
4.4
3.8
3.3
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
8265
55
2007
65
401
75
130
85
0
25ϒ
100
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: C6H-226Q (C652-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03062099
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 51.1%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.30
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: Two OSI CF26DD/E/827, rated at 3600 total lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 751
5° 795
76
15° 817
232
25° 756
350
35° 601
377
45° 365
283
55° 72
65
65° 11
11
75°
2
2
85°
0
0
OPEN REFLECTOR
(2X26W QUAD TUBE)
200
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 410
5° 422
40
15° 512
145
25° 547
253
35° 471
296
45° 301
233
55° 68
61
65°
6
6
75°
5
5
85°
3
3
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
11.4
8.4
6.4
5.1
4.1
3.4
2.8
2.4
2.1
1.8
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
6810
55
1902
65
213
75
281
85
484
Beam
Diameter
2.213.7’
1.615.9’
1.218.2’
1.020.5’
0.822.8’
0.725.1’
0.627.3’
0.529.6’
0.431.9’
0.434.2’
Candela/M2
23333
6516
730
964
1659
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
439
24.0
42.1
0-40°
735
40.2
70.5
0-60° 1029
56.4
98.7
0-90° 1042
57.1 100.0
90-180°
0
0.00
0.00
0-180° 1042
57.1
100.0
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
61
47
6’ x 6’
42
33
7’ x 7’
31
24
8’ x 8’
24
18
9’ x 9’
19
15
10’ x 10’
15
12
11’ x 11’
13
10
12’ x 12’
11
8
RCR8
33
23
17
13
10
8
7
6
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10 PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 66666666 65656565 626262 595959 575757
1 63615958 61605857 575655 555454 535352
2 59565351 58555250 535149 515048 504847
3 55514845 54504745 494644 474543 464442
4 52474340 50464240 454239 434139 424038
5 48433936 47423836 413835 403735 393735
6 45393532 44393532 383532 373432 363432
7 42363229 41363229 353229 343129 343129
8 40332927 39332927 322927 322926 312826
9 37312724 37312724 302724 302624 292624
10 35292523 35292522 282522 282422 272422
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
81
60
6’ x 6’
56
42
7’ x 7’
41
31
8’ x 8’
32
24
9’ x 9’
25
19
10’ x 10’
20
15
11’ x 11’
17
12
12’ x 12’
14
11
RCR8
43
30
22
17
13
11
9
8
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10 PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 61616161 59595959 575757 545454 525252
1 57565453 56555352 535150 515049 494848
2 54514846 53504846 484645 474544 454443
3 50464341 49464341 444240 434139 424039
4 47423936 46423936 413836 403735 393735
5 44393533 43383533 373432 363432 363332
6 41363229 40353229 343129 343129 333129
7 39332927 38322927 322926 312826 302826
8 36302724 35302724 292624 292624 282624
9 34282522 33282422 272422 272422 262422
10 32262320 31262320 252220 252220 252220
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
45
34
6’ x 6’
31
24
7’ x 7’
23
18
8’ x 8’
18
13
9’ x 9’
14
11
10’ x 10’
11
9
11’ x 11’
9
7
12’ x 12’
8
6
0
0
56
51
46
41
37
34
31
28
25
23
21
0
0
51
47
42
38
34
31
28
25
23
21
19
RCR8
24
17
12
9
7
6
5
4
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10 PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 68686868 66666666 636363 616161 585858
1 64626059 63615958 585756 565554 545453
2 60565451 59555351 545150 525048 504947
3 56514845 55504745 494644 474543 464442
4 52474340 51464240 454239 434139 424038
5 49433835 47423835 413735 403735 393634
6 45393532 44383432 373431 373331 363331
7 42363128 41353128 343128 343028 333028
8 39332926 39322826 322826 312825 302825
9 37302623 36302623 292623 292523 282523
10 35282421 34282421 272421 272321 262321
0
0
57
52
46
41
37
33
30
27
24
22
20
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (800) 367-5866 • Fax (888) 708-6578
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
C652-CL-WH
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J1.1.20
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Optics
Reflector: Precision reflector with 55° visual cut-off to both lamp and lamp
image • Single position optics eliminate possibility of specified lamp being
installed in incorrect position • Low iridescent specular or satin Alzak®
.050” thick reflector in clear, gold, wheat, pewter or bronze with integral
flange of same finish; other finishes available upon request • Painted white
flange is optional • V-Flux Miro® specular insert increases efficiency of horizontal CFL models without sacrificing brightness control
Baffle: Specular clear Alzak® upper reflector and white or black painted
deep multi-groove aluminum baffle insert with integral flange painted white
Electrical
Ballast: Class “P” thermally protected 120V-277V universal voltage high
power factor electronic ballast with end of life protection
Lamp Holder: 4-pin G24q UV stabilized thermoplastic socket with nonfatiguing stainless steel lamp retention spring
6” HORIZONTAL CFL DOWNLIGHT
OPEN APERTURE
TWO 13, 18 or 26W Quad Tube
C6H-213Q, C6H-218Q, C6H-226Q
ONE 13, 18 or 26W Quad Tube
C6H-113Q, C6H-118Q, C6H-126Q
C650, C652, C650B-Q, C652B-Q
Mechanical
Socket Housing: Heavy gauge die-formed galvanized steel
Mounting Frame: 16-gauge galvanized steel mounting ring with factory
installed spring steel friction clips • Accommodates ceilings up to 3/4”
thick; ceiling thickness adapter accessory is available for ceilings up to 2”
• Common rough-in section accepts open, single wall wash and lensed
reflectors
Mounting Bracket: Mounting brackets have 3” vertical adjustment and
accept proprietary Tru-Lock bar hangers, 1 1/2” C-channel and flat linear
bars (ordered as accessories) or 1/2” EMT, 3/4” and 1 1/2” lathing channel (by others) • One-piece Tru-Lock bar hangers have integral T-bar locking
screws and alignment notches for locating and locking fixture in the center
or 1/4 tile increments
Junction Box: Ballast mounted to J-box cover for optimal heat dissipation
and serviceability from below the ceiling • Oversized 4”x 6” galvanized
steel junction box with (6) 1/2” and (1) 3/4” knockouts facilitate quick
wiring • Junction box rated for eight No. 12 AWG 90°C branch circuit
conductors (4-in, 4-out)
Type Cat. No.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Project:_________________________________________
Notes: _________________________________________
DIMENSIONS
5 7/8"
Labels and Listings
UL/C-UL listed for feed through and damp locations • I.B.E.W. Union made
Product specifications subject to change without notice.
5 1/2" Dia.
Baffle
6" Dia.
Open
ENGINEERING DATA
Voltage
120V-HPF
277V-HPF
347V-HPF Canada
11 11/16"
6 7/8" Dia.
Ceiling Cutout
Lamp Wattage 1x132x131x182x181x262x26 1x132x131x182x181x262x26 1x132x131x182x181x262x26
13 11/16"
Total input power 16W29W19W35W27W51W 16W29W19W35W27W51W 18W33W21W38W31W57W
Operating AMPS 0.130.250.160.300.230.43 0.060.110.070.130.100.19 0.060.100.110.060.090.17
Ballast factor
1.001.001.000.951.001.00 1.001.001.000.951.001.00 1.000.981.000.981.020.98
ORDERING INFORMATION: Rough-in, reflector and accessories each ordered separately.
Example: C6H-226Q-BR
Wattage/Lamp
Rough-In
C6HC6H
Example: C652B-Q-B
-
Options
-
113Q
1x13W
213Q
2x13W
118Q
1x18W
218Q
2x18W
126Q
1x26W
226Q
2x26W
347 347 Volt
Quad, 4-Pin BR Emergency Battery
Back-up w/Remote
Quad, 4-Pin Switch
BN Emergency Battery
Back-up w/Integral Test
Quad, 4-Pin Switch
Quad, 4-Pin HRHigh-Lumen Emergency
Battery Back-up with
Remote Switch
Quad, 4-Pin
HNHigh-Lumen Emergency
Battery Back-up with
Quad, 4-Pin
Integral Test Switch
D101Dimming Ballast
Advance Mark 10™
(not available for 13W)
D7 Dimming Ballast
Advance Mark 7™
DL1 Dimming Ballast
Lutron Compact SE
(not available for 13W)
***FFuse and Fuse Holder
(Where *** = voltage)
2S Dual Level Switching
CP Chicago Plenum
C650
Open
Reflector,
1-Lamp
C652
Open
Reflector,
2-Lamp
C650B-Q
Baffle, 1-Lamp
C652B-Q
Baffle, 2-Lamp
Add a -1 for 120V, a -2 for 277V
Example: C6H-118Q-D10-1
1
1/10
Reflector
C652
-
Example: HB-TL
Color Options
Finish
C
L
C
Clear
GGold
WTWheat
PTPewter
BZBronze
BBlack
WWhite
Options
-
Low Iridescent
Alzak® Finishes:
LSpecular
SSatin
Blank for baffle &
white
Accessories
WH
WH
White Flange
MAX##Label for
maximum wattage
(where ## = wattage)
Hole for
BN
emergency test switch
HB-TL 25” Tru-Lock grid
ceiling bar hangers,
Pair
HB-5252” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-2828” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
LB-27 27” Linear Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-4Bar Hanger
conversion kit for
wooden joists
SCA6-*Sloped Ceiling
Adapter
*Angle must be specified
when ordering; Available in
5°, 10°, 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°
Example: SCA6-20
1300 South Wolf Road • Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
PHONE 800-367-5866 • FAX 888-708-6578
www.junolightinggroup.com
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
C652-CL-WH
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J1.1.20
OPEN REFLECTOR
(2X18W QUAD TUBE)
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: C6H-218Q (C652-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03061799
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 55.8%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.28
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: Two OSI CF18DD/E/827, rated at 2500 total lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
100
75ϒ
200
65ϒ
300
400
55ϒ
500
45ϒ
600
700
35ϒ
800
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
25ϒ
75ϒ
400
65ϒ
600
800
55ϒ
1000
45ϒ
1200
1400
35ϒ
1600
1800
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
75ϒ
65ϒ
300
400
55ϒ
500
45ϒ
600
700
35ϒ
800
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
25ϒ
Candela/M2
28317
6878
1376
447
0
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
27.0
19.8
15.2
12.0
9.7
8.0
6.8
5.8
5.0
4.3
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
11548
55
2716
65
389
75
0
85
506
Beam
Diameter
5.311.7’
3.913.7’
3.015.6’
2.417.6’
1.919.6’
1.621.5’
1.323.5’
1.125.4’
1.027.4’
0.929.3’
Candela/M2
39565
9305
1334
0
1734
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
843
23.4
45.9
0-40° 1342
37.3
73.0
0-60° 1825
50.7
99.3
0-90° 1838
51.1 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1838
51.1
100.0
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: C6H-126Q (C650-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03062899
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 57.1%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.43
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: One OSI CF26DD/E/841, rated at 1825 total lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
200
Beam
Diameter
4.611.0’
3.312.9’
2.614.7’
2.016.5’
1.618.4’
1.420.2’
1.122.1’
1.023.9’
0.825.7’
0.727.6’
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
658
26.3
47.1
0-40° 1035
41.4
74.2
0-60° 1382
55.3
99.1
0-90° 1395
55.8 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1395
55.8
100.0
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 972
5° 1012 97
15° 1042 295
25° 975
451
35° 794
499
45° 510
395
55° 97
87
65° 10
10
75°
0
0
85°
3
3
OPEN REFLECTOR
(1X26W QUAD TUBE)
90ϒ
85ϒ
Footcandles
Beam Edge
20.9
15.3
11.7
9.3
7.5
6.2
5.2
4.4
3.8
3.3
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
8265
55
2007
65
401
75
130
85
0
25ϒ
100
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: C6H-226Q (C652-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03062099
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 51.1%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.30
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: Two OSI CF26DD/E/827, rated at 3600 total lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 751
5° 795
76
15° 817
232
25° 756
350
35° 601
377
45° 365
283
55° 72
65
65° 11
11
75°
2
2
85°
0
0
OPEN REFLECTOR
(2X26W QUAD TUBE)
200
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 410
5° 422
40
15° 512
145
25° 547
253
35° 471
296
45° 301
233
55° 68
61
65°
6
6
75°
5
5
85°
3
3
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
11.4
8.4
6.4
5.1
4.1
3.4
2.8
2.4
2.1
1.8
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
6810
55
1902
65
213
75
281
85
484
Beam
Diameter
2.213.7’
1.615.9’
1.218.2’
1.020.5’
0.822.8’
0.725.1’
0.627.3’
0.529.6’
0.431.9’
0.434.2’
Candela/M2
23333
6516
730
964
1659
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
439
24.0
42.1
0-40°
735
40.2
70.5
0-60° 1029
56.4
98.7
0-90° 1042
57.1 100.0
90-180°
0
0.00
0.00
0-180° 1042
57.1
100.0
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
61
47
6’ x 6’
42
33
7’ x 7’
31
24
8’ x 8’
24
18
9’ x 9’
19
15
10’ x 10’
15
12
11’ x 11’
13
10
12’ x 12’
11
8
RCR8
33
23
17
13
10
8
7
6
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10 PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 66666666 65656565 626262 595959 575757
1 63615958 61605857 575655 555454 535352
2 59565351 58555250 535149 515048 504847
3 55514845 54504745 494644 474543 464442
4 52474340 50464240 454239 434139 424038
5 48433936 47423836 413835 403735 393735
6 45393532 44393532 383532 373432 363432
7 42363229 41363229 353229 343129 343129
8 40332927 39332927 322927 322926 312826
9 37312724 37312724 302724 302624 292624
10 35292523 35292522 282522 282422 272422
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
81
60
6’ x 6’
56
42
7’ x 7’
41
31
8’ x 8’
32
24
9’ x 9’
25
19
10’ x 10’
20
15
11’ x 11’
17
12
12’ x 12’
14
11
RCR8
43
30
22
17
13
11
9
8
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10 PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 61616161 59595959 575757 545454 525252
1 57565453 56555352 535150 515049 494848
2 54514846 53504846 484645 474544 454443
3 50464341 49464341 444240 434139 424039
4 47423936 46423936 413836 403735 393735
5 44393533 43383533 373432 363432 363332
6 41363229 40353229 343129 343129 333129
7 39332927 38322927 322926 312826 302826
8 36302724 35302724 292624 292624 282624
9 34282522 33282422 272422 272422 262422
10 32262320 31262320 252220 252220 252220
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
45
34
6’ x 6’
31
24
7’ x 7’
23
18
8’ x 8’
18
13
9’ x 9’
14
11
10’ x 10’
11
9
11’ x 11’
9
7
12’ x 12’
8
6
0
0
56
51
46
41
37
34
31
28
25
23
21
0
0
51
47
42
38
34
31
28
25
23
21
19
RCR8
24
17
12
9
7
6
5
4
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10 PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 68686868 66666666 636363 616161 585858
1 64626059 63615958 585756 565554 545453
2 60565451 59555351 545150 525048 504947
3 56514845 55504745 494644 474543 464442
4 52474340 51464240 454239 434139 424038
5 49433835 47423835 413735 403735 393634
6 45393532 44383432 373431 373331 363331
7 42363128 41353128 343128 343028 333028
8 39332926 39322826 322826 312825 302825
9 37302623 36302623 292623 292523 282523
10 35282421 34282421 272421 272321 262321
0
0
57
52
46
41
37
33
30
27
24
22
20
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (800) 367-5866 • Fax (888) 708-6578
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
A6
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J3.1.5
6” VERTICAL A19/21
DOWNLIGHT
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Optics
Reflector: Specular or satin Alzak® .050” thick reflector in clear, gold,
wheat, pewter, bronze or black with integral flange of same finish; other
finishes available upon request • Painted white flange is optional
Baffle: Specular clear Alzak® upper reflector and white or black painted
deep multi-groove aluminum baffle insert with integral flange painted white
OPEN APERTURE
40-100W A19, 75-200W A21
Electrical
A6, A6-277, A6-2772
A600-A19, A600-A21,
A600B-A19, A600B-A21
Transformer: 277 Volt class ‘H’ insulated dry type autotransformer,
277V/115V, 150-watt U.L. approved. Maximum of 5.5 watts loss under
no load
Lamp Holder: Medium base heavy duty porcelain socket with spring
loaded center contact and nickel plated brass screw shell
Socket Cap: Die-cast aluminum socket cup securely fastens to reflector with
stabilizing ribs to prevent rocking
Mechanical
Mounting Frame: 16-gauge galvanized steel mounting ring with factory
installed spring steel friction clips • Accommodates ceilings up to 3/4”
thick; ceiling thickness adapter accessory is available for ceilings up to 2”
• Common rough-in section accepts open and single wall wash reflectors
Mounting Bracket: Mounting brackets have 3” vertical adjustment and
accept proprietary Tru-Lock bar hangers, 1 1/2” C-channel and flat linear
bars (ordered as accessories) or 1/2” EMT, 3/4” and 1 1/2” lathing channel (by others) • One-piece Tru-Lock bar hangers have integral T-bar locking
screws and alignment notches for locating and locking fixture in the center
or 1/4 tile increments
Junction Box: Oversized 4”x 6” galvanized steel junction box with
(6) 1/2” and (1) 3/4” knockouts facilitate quick wiring • Junction box rated
for eight No. 12 AWG 90°C branch circuit conductors (4-in, 4-out)
Type Cat. No.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Project:_________________________________________
Notes: _________________________________________
DIMENSIONS
Labels and Listings
UL/C-UL listed for feed through and damp locations • I.B.E.W. Union made
Product specifications subject to change without notice.
A19 Baffle
A21 Baffle
A19 Open
A21 Open
=
=
=
=
8 3/4"
9 1/2"
8 3/8"
9 1/8"
5 1/2" Dia.
Baffle
6" Dia.
Open
11 11/16"
6 7/8" Dia.
Ceiling Cutout
12 1/2" (120V)
16 1/16" (277V)
ORDERING INFORMATION: Rough-in, reflector and accessories each ordered separately.
Example: A6-2772-F
Example: A600-A21-CL
Options
Rough-In
A6
A6
40-100W A19,
75-200W A21; 120V
A6-277
40-100W A19,
75-150W A21, 277V
A6-2772
200W A21; 277V
1/10
Color Options
Reflector
Example: HB-TL
Finish
-
F
Fuse and Fuse Holder
A600-A19
Open Reflector,
A-19
A600-A21
Open Reflector,
A-21
A600B-A19
Baffle, A-19
A600B-A21
Baffle, A-21
Options
Accessories
WH
White Flange
MAX##Label for
maximum wattage
(where ## = wattage)
HB-TL 25” Tru-Lock grid
ceiling bar hangers,
Pair
HB-5252” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-2828” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
LB-27 27” Linear Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-4Bar Hanger
conversion kit for
wooden joists
SCA6-*Sloped Ceiling
Adapter
*Angle must be specified
when ordering; Available in
5°, 10°, 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°
Example: SCA6-20
C
Clear
GGold
WTWheat
PTPewter
BZBronze
BBlack
WWhite
Alzak® Finishes:
LSpecular
SSatin
Blank for baffle &
white
1300 South Wolf Road • Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
PHONE 800-367-5866 • FAX 888-708-6578
www.junolightinggroup.com
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
A6
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J3.1.5
OPEN REFLECTOR
(150W A21)
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: A6 (A600-A21-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03060302
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 54.6%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.08
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: One (1) OSI 150W/IF, rated at 2780 lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
200
75ϒ
400
65ϒ
600
800
55ϒ
1000
45ϒ
1200
1400
35ϒ
1600
1800
2000
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
Beam
Diameter
33.7 8.98.8’
24.8 6.510.3’
19.0 5.011.7’
15.0 4.013.2’
12.1 3.214.7’
10.0 2.716.1’
8.4 2.217.6’
7.2 1.919.1’
6.2 1.620.5’
5.4 1.422.0’
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
3387
55
182
65
98
75
0
85
184
Candela/M2
11605
623
337
0
629
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
952
34.2
62.7
0-40° 1392
50.1
91.7
0-60° 1514
54.4
99.8
0-90° 1517
54.6 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1517
54.6
100.0
25ϒ
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: A6 (A600B-A21-B)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PT05061601
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 36.2%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 0.67
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® upper reflector with black
multi-groove baffle lower cone. Open bottom.
Lamps: One (1) GE 150A24PK, rated at 2850 lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
200
75ϒ
400
65ϒ
600
800
55ϒ
1000
45ϒ
1200
1400
35ϒ
1600
1800
15ϒ
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 1214
5° 1220 116
15° 1179 334
25° 1082 501
35° 700
440
45° 150
116
55°
7
6
65°
3
3
75°
0
0
85°
1
1
OPEN BAFFLE
(150W A21)
2000
0ϒ 5ϒ
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
25ϒ
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 1533
5° 1237 118
15° 992
281
25° 729
337
35° 364
229
45° 81
62
55°
3
3
65°
0
0
75°
0
0
85°
0
0
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
Beam
Diameter
42.6 16.35.3’
31.3 12.06.2’
23.9 9.27.1’
18.9 7.27.9’
15.3 5.98.8’
12.7 4.89.7’
10.6 4.110.6’
9.1 3.511.5’
7.8 3.012.4’
6.8 2.613.2’
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
2169
55
114
65
0
75
0
85
0
Candela/M2
7431
391
0
0
0
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
736
25.8
71.5
0-40°
965
33.9
93.7
0-60° 1031
36.2 100.0
0-90° 1031
36.2 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1031
36.2
100.0
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
67
53
6’ x 6’
46
37
7’ x 7’
34
27
8’ x 8’
26
21
9’ x 9’
21
16
10’ x 10’
17
13
11’ x 11’
14
11
12’ x 12’
12
9
RCR8
40
28
20
16
12
10
8
7
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10
PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 65656565 63636363 616161 585858 565656
1 62605958 60595857 575655 555453 535252
2 59565452 57555351 535150 515049 504948
3 55524947 54514846 504746 484645 474544
4 52484542 51474442 464442 454341 444241
5 49454139 49444139 434038 424038 413938
6 47423836 46413836 403735 403735 393735
7 44393533 43383533 383533 373433 363432
8 42363331 41363330 353230 353230 343230
9 40343128 39343128 333028 333028 323028
10 38322926 37322926 312826 312826 302826
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
46
38
6’ x 6’
32
26
7’ x 7’
23
19
8’ x 8’
18
15
9’ x 9’
14
12
10’ x 10’
11
9
11’ x 11’
9
8
12’ x 12’
8
7
0
0
55
51
47
43
40
37
34
32
29
27
25
RCR8
29
20
15
11
9
7
6
5
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10
PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 43434343 42424242 404040 383838 373737
1 41403938 40393938 383737 373636 353535
2 39373635 38373534 363534 353433 343332
3 37353332 36343331 333231 333130 323130
4 35333129 35323029 313029 312928 302928
5 34312927 33302827 302827 292826 282726
6 32292725 31282625 282625 272625 272624
7 30272523 30272523 262523 262423 252423
8 29252322 28252322 252322 252322 242322
9 28242221 27242220 242220 232220 232120
10 26232119 26232119 222019 222019 222019
0
0
36
34
32
29
27
26
24
22
21
20
19
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (800) 367-5866 • Fax (888) 708-6578
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
A600-A21-CL-WH
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J3.1.5
6” VERTICAL A19/21
DOWNLIGHT
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Optics
Reflector: Specular or satin Alzak® .050” thick reflector in clear, gold,
wheat, pewter, bronze or black with integral flange of same finish; other
finishes available upon request • Painted white flange is optional
Baffle: Specular clear Alzak® upper reflector and white or black painted
deep multi-groove aluminum baffle insert with integral flange painted white
OPEN APERTURE
40-100W A19, 75-200W A21
Electrical
A6, A6-277, A6-2772
A600-A19, A600-A21,
A600B-A19, A600B-A21
Transformer: 277 Volt class ‘H’ insulated dry type autotransformer,
277V/115V, 150-watt U.L. approved. Maximum of 5.5 watts loss under
no load
Lamp Holder: Medium base heavy duty porcelain socket with spring
loaded center contact and nickel plated brass screw shell
Socket Cap: Die-cast aluminum socket cup securely fastens to reflector with
stabilizing ribs to prevent rocking
Mechanical
Mounting Frame: 16-gauge galvanized steel mounting ring with factory
installed spring steel friction clips • Accommodates ceilings up to 3/4”
thick; ceiling thickness adapter accessory is available for ceilings up to 2”
• Common rough-in section accepts open and single wall wash reflectors
Mounting Bracket: Mounting brackets have 3” vertical adjustment and
accept proprietary Tru-Lock bar hangers, 1 1/2” C-channel and flat linear
bars (ordered as accessories) or 1/2” EMT, 3/4” and 1 1/2” lathing channel (by others) • One-piece Tru-Lock bar hangers have integral T-bar locking
screws and alignment notches for locating and locking fixture in the center
or 1/4 tile increments
Junction Box: Oversized 4”x 6” galvanized steel junction box with
(6) 1/2” and (1) 3/4” knockouts facilitate quick wiring • Junction box rated
for eight No. 12 AWG 90°C branch circuit conductors (4-in, 4-out)
Type Cat. No.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Project:_________________________________________
Notes: _________________________________________
DIMENSIONS
Labels and Listings
UL/C-UL listed for feed through and damp locations • I.B.E.W. Union made
Product specifications subject to change without notice.
A19 Baffle
A21 Baffle
A19 Open
A21 Open
=
=
=
=
8 3/4"
9 1/2"
8 3/8"
9 1/8"
5 1/2" Dia.
Baffle
6" Dia.
Open
11 11/16"
6 7/8" Dia.
Ceiling Cutout
12 1/2" (120V)
16 1/16" (277V)
ORDERING INFORMATION: Rough-in, reflector and accessories each ordered separately.
Example: A6-2772-F
Example: A600-A21-CL
Options
Rough-In
A6
40-100W A19,
75-200W A21; 120V
A6-277
40-100W A19,
75-150W A21, 277V
A6-2772
200W A21; 277V
1/10
Reflector
A600-A21 -
F
Fuse and Fuse Holder
A600-A19
Open Reflector,
A-19
A600-A21
Open Reflector,
A-21
A600B-A19
Baffle, A-19
A600B-A21
Baffle, A-21
Color Options
C
C
Clear
GGold
WTWheat
PTPewter
BZBronze
BBlack
WWhite
Example: HB-TL
Finish
Options
-
L
Alzak® Finishes:
LSpecular
SSatin
Blank for baffle &
white
Accessories
WH
WH
White Flange
MAX##Label for
maximum wattage
(where ## = wattage)
HB-TL 25” Tru-Lock grid
ceiling bar hangers,
Pair
HB-5252” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-2828” C-Channel Bar
Hangers, Pair
LB-27 27” Linear Bar
Hangers, Pair
HB-4Bar Hanger
conversion kit for
wooden joists
SCA6-*Sloped Ceiling
Adapter
*Angle must be specified
when ordering; Available in
5°, 10°, 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°
Example: SCA6-20
1300 South Wolf Road • Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
PHONE 800-367-5866 • FAX 888-708-6578
www.junolightinggroup.com
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
A600-A21-CL-WH
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J3.1.5
OPEN REFLECTOR
(150W A21)
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: A6 (A600-A21-CL)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PR03060302
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 54.6%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 1.08
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® reflector. Open bottom.
Lamps: One (1) OSI 150W/IF, rated at 2780 lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
200
75ϒ
400
65ϒ
600
800
55ϒ
1000
45ϒ
1200
1400
35ϒ
1600
1800
2000
0ϒ 5ϒ
15ϒ
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
Beam
Diameter
33.7 8.98.8’
24.8 6.510.3’
19.0 5.011.7’
15.0 4.013.2’
12.1 3.214.7’
10.0 2.716.1’
8.4 2.217.6’
7.2 1.919.1’
6.2 1.620.5’
5.4 1.422.0’
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
3387
55
182
65
98
75
0
85
184
Candela/M2
11605
623
337
0
629
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
952
34.2
62.7
0-40° 1392
50.1
91.7
0-60° 1514
54.4
99.8
0-90° 1517
54.6 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1517
54.6
100.0
25ϒ
Initial Footcandles
Catalog Number: A6 (A600B-A21-B)
PHOTOMETRIC REPORT
Test Number: PT05061601
Total Luminaire Efficiency: 36.2%
Luminaire Spacing Criteria: 0.67
Luminaire: Clear specular Alzak® upper reflector with black
multi-groove baffle lower cone. Open bottom.
Lamps: One (1) GE 150A24PK, rated at 2850 lumens.
CIE-Type: Direct
90ϒ
85ϒ
200
75ϒ
400
65ϒ
600
800
55ϒ
1000
45ϒ
1200
1400
35ϒ
1600
1800
15ϒ
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 1214
5° 1220 116
15° 1179 334
25° 1082 501
35° 700
440
45° 150
116
55°
7
6
65°
3
3
75°
0
0
85°
1
1
OPEN BAFFLE
(150W A21)
2000
0ϒ 5ϒ
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
25ϒ
Candlepower
Distribution
(Candelas)
Angle Candela Lumens
0° 1533
5° 1237 118
15° 992
281
25° 729
337
35° 364
229
45° 81
62
55°
3
3
65°
0
0
75°
0
0
85°
0
0
Distance to Illuminated Footcandles
Plane (Feet)
Beam Center
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
11’
12’
13’
14’
15’
Footcandles
Beam Edge
Beam
Diameter
42.6 16.35.3’
31.3 12.06.2’
23.9 9.27.1’
18.9 7.27.9’
15.3 5.98.8’
12.7 4.89.7’
10.6 4.110.6’
9.1 3.511.5’
7.8 3.012.4’
6.8 2.613.2’
Luminance Data
Ang
in Deg
Footlamberts
45
2169
55
114
65
0
75
0
85
0
Candela/M2
7431
391
0
0
0
Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone
Lumens
%Lamp %Fixture
0-30°
736
25.8
71.5
0-40°
965
33.9
93.7
0-60° 1031
36.2 100.0
0-90° 1031
36.2 100.0
90-180°
0
0.0
0.0
0-180° 1031
36.2
100.0
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
67
53
6’ x 6’
46
37
7’ x 7’
34
27
8’ x 8’
26
21
9’ x 9’
21
16
10’ x 10’
17
13
11’ x 11’
14
11
12’ x 12’
12
9
RCR8
40
28
20
16
12
10
8
7
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10
PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 65656565 63636363 616161 585858 565656
1 62605958 60595857 575655 555453 535252
2 59565452 57555351 535150 515049 504948
3 55524947 54514846 504746 484645 474544
4 52484542 51474442 464442 454341 444241
5 49454139 49444139 434038 424038 413938
6 47423836 46413836 403735 403735 393735
7 44393533 43383533 383533 373433 363432
8 42363331 41363330 353230 353230 343230
9 40343128 39343128 333028 333028 323028
10 38322926 37322926 312826 312826 302826
AVERAGE INITIAL FOOTCANDLES
Reflectances: 80% Ceiling, 50% Walls, 30% Floors
Luminaire
Room Cavity Ratio
Spacing
RCR1
RCR4
5’ x 5’
46
38
6’ x 6’
32
26
7’ x 7’
23
19
8’ x 8’
18
15
9’ x 9’
14
12
10’ x 10’
11
9
11’ x 11’
9
8
12’ x 12’
8
7
0
0
55
51
47
43
40
37
34
32
29
27
25
RCR8
29
20
15
11
9
7
6
5
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION – % (Zonal Cavity Method)
Effective Floor Reflectance 20%
PCC 80 70 50 30 10
PW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
0 43434343 42424242 404040 383838 373737
1 41403938 40393938 383737 373636 353535
2 39373635 38373534 363534 353433 343332
3 37353332 36343331 333231 333130 323130
4 35333129 35323029 313029 312928 302928
5 34312927 33302827 302827 292826 282726
6 32292725 31282625 282625 272625 272624
7 30272523 30272523 262523 262423 252423
8 29252322 28252322 252322 252322 242322
9 28242221 27242220 242220 232220 232120
10 26232119 26232119 222019 222019 222019
0
0
36
34
32
29
27
26
24
22
21
20
19
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (800) 367-5866 • Fax (888) 708-6578
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
HB-TL
ELAN LIGHTING INC
ACCESSORY ONLY
J6.1.26
MULTI-SPOT® LED
1000/2000 LUMENS
ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY, ENERGY EFFICIENT
•1000 lumen unit provides comparable light output to a 75W PAR30 halogen,
2000 lumen unit provides output similar to a 39W PAR30 Metal Halide; all
while utilizing less energy and having a rated life of 50,000 hours
• No harmful ultraviolet or infrared wavelengths
• No lead or mercury
Multi-Lamp Recessed Adjustables
1, 2 & 3 Head LED Units
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
LED Light Engine: High output LED arrays provide outstanding reliability, performance
and color quality/consistency • 2700K, 3000K, 3500K or 4000K color temperatures
• 80 CRI minimum • Consistent fixture-to-fixture color temperature that is within 3 MacAdams ellipses
Dimming: Dimmable via 0-10V controller • For a list of compatible dimmers see LED-DIM
LED Driver: Universal driver accommodates 120 to 277 input volts AC at 50/60Hz
• Power factor >0.9 • Easily replaceable from below or above the ceiling.
Life: Rated for 50,000 hours at 70% lumen maintenance
Operation Temperature: -40º to 45º C
Mechanical
LED Fixture Head: Cast aluminum housing is removable for ease of maintenance and
interchangeability of beam distributions and color temperatures • LED fixture heads can be
ordered and shipped separately from rough-in housing • Integral die-cast accessory holder
and optional metal snoot for improved lamp shielding • Accessory louver or snoot can be
combined with one (1) accessory color filter
Adjustability: 40º vertical aiming capability and 360° horizontal rotation • Each lampholder is individually aimable
Trim Finish: Black trim w/ black lamp heads and white flange (BL) or white trim w/ white
lamp heads and white flange (WH) • Heavy gauge steel
Housing: 22 gauge die-formed galvanized steel, vented • Universal housing design
installs in suspended grid, plaster or drywall • Integral heat sink conducts heat away from
LED light engine • Drivers are accessible from above and below ceiling • Light engine and
driver can be upgraded to accommodate future technology improvements. • Active cooling
(2000 lumens only) • Rough-in housing can be ordered separately from fixture heads, see
Individual Component Ordering Information below.
Mounting Bracket: Mounting brackets have 2.5” vertical adjustment and accept proprietary Tru-Lock bar hangers, 1-1/2” C-channel and flat linear bars (order as accessories)
or 1-½˝ EMT, ¾˝ and 1-½˝ lathing channel (by others) ● One-piece Tru-Lock bar hangers
have integral T-bar locking screws and alignment notches for locating and locking fixture in
the center or ¼” tile increments
Type
Cat. No.
Project:
Notes:
DIMENSIONS
‘C’
10-3/4˝
7-3/8˝

LED fixture heads
can be ordered
and shipped separately
from rough-in housing.
‘B’
‘A’
‘A’ CEILING CUT-OUT
‘B’ FLANGE
Labels and Listings
•
•
•
•
UL listed for dry/damp locations • UL and cUL, RoHS compliant
EMI complies with FCC 47, Part 15, Class A
Energy Star Qualified
I.B.E.W. Union made • ARRA Compliant
# of
Heads
Warranty: 5 years when used in accordance with manufacturing guidelines.
Product specifications subject to change without notice.
Ceiling Cut-out
‘A’
Dim.
‘B’
1
8-1/2˝ x 8-5/8˝
9-1/2˝ x 9-5/8˝
12-7/8˝
2
8-1/2˝ x 13-5/8˝
9-1/2˝ x 14-5/8˝
17-7/8˝
3
8-1/2˝ x 22-5/8˝
9-1/2˝ x 23-5/8
26-7/8˝
COMPLETE UNIT
ORDERING INFORMATION: Complete fixtures and accessories each ordered separately.
Example: MSS30-NN-10302-WH2
Example: HB-TL
Beam Spread/
One Per Lamp
Cat. #
Lumens
Color
Temp.
Voltage
Finish
MSS30
Options
Generation
Accessories
2
MSS30
1, 2 & 3-Lamp LED,
Multi-Spot PAR30 Size
SSpot
N Narrow Flood
FFlood
10
27 2700K
1000 Lumens
30 3000K
20
2000 Lumens 353500K
404000K
1 120V
2277V
WH White
BL Black
3 347V
HB-TL
***F
CP
†
LDI
†
Fuse and Fuse Holder
(Where *** = voltage)
Chicago Plenum
Lumen Depreciation Indicator
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT Use when ordering rough-in housing, fixture head, options and
ORDERING INFORMATION: accessories separately.
Example: MSSR303-101-WH-2
Rough-In
Lumens
Voltage
Example: MSSH30N-1030-WH-2
Finish
Options
Generation
Lamp Head/
Beam Spread
Lumens
Color
Temp.
MSSH30S
LED Head; Spot
MSSH30N
LED Head;
Narrow Flood
MSSH30F
LED Head; Flood
10
27
1000 2700K
Lumens
30
20
3000K
2000
35
Lumens
3500K
40
4000K
Finish
1-Lamp LED,
PAR30 Size Rough-in
MSSR302
2-Lamp LED,
PAR30 Size Rough-in
MSSR303
10
1000
Lumens
20
2000
Lumens
1
120V
2
277V
3
347V
3-Lamp LED,
PAR30 Size Rough-in
† Consult Factory for Availability
03/15 Rev.2
WH
White
BL
Black
Generation
2
2
MSSR301
Dim.
‘C’
***F
†
CP
†
LDI
Fuse & Fuse Holder
(Where *** = voltage)
Chicago Plenum
Lumen Depreciation
Indicator
WH
White
BL
BLACK
HB-TL
HB-28
HB-52
LB-27
Two
Two
Two
Two
1086BK
1086WH
T569BL
T561
T562
T563
T564
T565
T566
T5677
T5678
T5621
T5623
Not
25˝
28˝
52˝
27˝
Tru-Lock Grid Ceiling Bar Hangers, Pair
C-Channel Bar Hangers, Pair
C-Channel Bar Hangers, Pair
Linear Bar Hangers, Pair
Black Snoot
White Snoot
Louver - 3¾” Dia. with ½” Sq. Cells
Med. Pink Color Filter
Warm Red Color Filter
Daylite Blue Color Filter
Med. Blue Color Filter
Med. Amber Color Filter
Med. Green Color Filter
Prismatic Spread Lens
Linear Spread Lens
Uniformity Lens
High Output Uniformity Lens
for use with Chicago Plenum or 347V.
for use with snoot or any other accessory.
 Not
1300 South Wolf Road • Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
PHONE 800-367-5866 • FAX 888-708-6578
www.junolightinggroup.com
Project 16-35160-0
St Joes West Bend
Catalog Number
Submitted By
Notes
Type
HB-TL
ELAN LIGHTING INC
J6.1.26
MULTI-SPOT®
PERFORMANCE DATA
Input Watts
Efficacy Rated Life
Voltage(Typical) Lumens (LPW)(Hours)
SPOT-3K/35K/4K
NARROW FLOOD-3K/35K/4K
FLOOD-3K/35K/4K
SPOT-27K
NARROW FLOOD-27K
FLOOD-27K
SPOT-3K/35K/4K
NARROW FLOOD-3K/35K/4K
FLOOD-3K/35K/4K
SPOT-27K
NARROW FLOOD-27K
FLOOD-27K
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
1000 Lumens
2000 Lumens
Catalog Number
29.6W
29.6W
29.6W
29.6W
29.6W
29.6W
14.8W
14.8W
14.8W
14.8W
14.8W
14.8W
2026
2027
2208
1965
1966
2141
1055
1064
1175
1023
1032
1139
68
68
74
66
66
72
71
72
79
69
70
77
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
1000/2000 Lumen LED
ENGINEERING DATA
Voltage
120V277V120V277V
Light Engine Lumens
1000
1000
2000
2000
CCT
27K/3K/35K/4K27K/3K/35K/4K27K/3K/35K/4K27K/3K/35K/4K
Input Current 0.12A0.05A0.24A0.12A
Input Wattage
15W
15W
30
30
Input Frequency50/60Hz50/60Hz50/60Hz50/60Hz
Power Factor >0.92>0.86>0.92>0.86
347 Volt available, consult factory.
FOR VERTICAL AIMING ANGLES
FOR HORIZONTAL AIMING ANGLES
D
MH
X
A
W
Aim Point
0°
Aim Point
W
L
L
Aiming Angle (A°)= 0
Aiming Angle (A°)= 30
A
0°
Aim Point
L
W
CBCP - Centerbeam candlepower
FC - Footcandles at beam center (aim point)
Horizontal Aiming Angles
Vertical Aiming Angles
In vertical aiming applications, aim point (X) is determined
by dividing distance from the wall (D) by the tangent of the
desired aim angle (A) (0.5774 for 30°, 1.0 for 45°.
Lamp
Beam Beam
Type Spread°
SP
9°
30W LED,
2000 Lumens
3K/35K/4K, Spot
NFL
23°
FL
42°
30W LED,
2000 Lumens,
3K/35K/4K
Narrow Flood
30W LED,
2000 Lumens,
3K/35K/4K, Flood
SP
9°
15W LED,
1000 Lumens
3K/35K/4K, Spot
NFL
23°
FL
42°
15W LED,
1000 Lumens,
3K/35K/4K
Narrow Flood
15W LED,
1000 Lumens,
3K/35K/4K, Flood
0°
Rated
Life
CBCP MH FC L W
50000 28,092 8 439 1.2 1.2
10 281 1.51.5
12 195 1.81.8
14 1432.12.1
16 110 2.4 2.5
50000 11,276 6 313 2.4 2.4
8 176 3.2 3.2
10 113 4.0 4.0
12 78 4.84.8
14 58 5.65.6
50000 6917 4 286 3.03.0
5 183 3.8 3.8
6 127 4.6 4.6
7 93 5.3 5.3
8 71 6.16.1
50000 14,720 6 409 0.9 0.9
8 230 1.21.2
10 1471.51.5
12 1021.81.8
14 75 2.1 2.1
50000 6203 4 388 1.6 1.6
6 172 2.4 2.4
8 97 3.2 3.2
10 62 4.04.0
12 43 4.84.8
50000 4568 4 286 3.03.0
5 183 3.8 3.8
6 127 4.6 4.6
7 93 5.3 5.3
8 71 6.16.1
30°
30°
45°
60°
FC L W DFC X L W FC X L W DFC X L W
285 1.6 1.4 4219 6.92.41.2 621 4.0 1.2 0.8 6507 3.5 1.21.0
1822.01.7 6 9810.43.61.8 276 6.0 1.8 1.3 92255.21.81.5
1272.42.1 8 5513.94.82.4 155 8.0 2.4 1.7 121276.92.42.1
932.82.4 103517.3
6.03.0 9910.03.0 2.115818.73.02.6
71 3.2 2.7 1224 20.87.33.6 69 12.0 3.6 2.5 1856 10.43.63.1
203 3.2 2.8 2352 3.53.61.6 997 2.0 1.7 1.1 4458 2.3 2.21.8
114 4.3 3.7 3157 5.25.22.4 443 3.0 2.5 1.7 6203 3.5 3.22.8
73 5.4 4.6 4 88 6.97.23.2 249 4.0 3.3 2.3 8114 4.6 4.33.7
516.55.5 5568.79.04.0 1595.04.1 2.810735.85.44.6
377.56.4 63910.4
10.8
4.8 1116.05.0 3.412516.96.55.5
1854.33.5 21433.510.73.0 404 2.0 3.6 2.1 27421.22.11.8
119 5.3 4.4 3 63 5.216.14.6 179 3.0 5.3 3.2 3 330 1.7 3.2 2.6
82 6.4 5.3 4 36 6.921.46.1 101 4.0 7.1 4.3 4 185 2.3 4.3 3.5
61 7.4 6.1 5 23 8.726.87.6 65 5.0 8.9 5.4 5 119 2.9 5.3 4.4
468.57.0 61610.4
32.29.1 45 6.010.76.4 6823.56.45.3
266 1.2 1.0 4115 6.92.41.2 325 4.0 1.2 0.8 6266 3.5 1.21.0
1491.61.4 6 5110.43.61.8 145 6.0 1.8 1.3 91185.21.81.5
962.01.7 82913.9
4.82.4 81 8.02.4 1.712666.92.42.1
662.42.1 101817.3
6.03.0 5210.03.0 2.115428.73.02.6
49 2.8 2.4 1213 20.87.33.6 36 12.0 3.6 2.5 1830 10.43.63.1
252 2.2 1.8 2194 3.53.61.6 548 2.0 1.7 1.1 4252 2.3 2.21.8
112 3.2 2.8 3 86 5.25.42.4 244 3.0 2.5 1.7 6112 3.5 3.22.8
63 4.3 3.7 4 48 6.97.23.2 137 4.0 3.3 2.3 8 63 4.6 4.33.7
405.44.6 5318.79.04.0 88 5.04.1 2.810405.85.44.6
286.55.5 62210.4
10.8
4.8 61 6.05.0 3.412286.96.55.5
1854.33.5 21433.510.73.0 404 2.0 3.6 2.1 27421.22.11.8
119 5.3 4.4 3 63 5.216.14.6 179 3.0 5.3 3.2 3 330 1.7 3.2 2.6
82 6.4 5.3 4 36 6.921.46.1 101 4.0 7.1 4.3 4 185 2.3 4.3 3.5
61 7.4 6.1 5 23 8.726.87.6 65 5.0 8.9 5.4 5 119 2.9 5.3 4.4
468.57.0 61610.4
32.29.1 45 6.010.76.4 6823.56.45.3
The beam spread in degrees and the beam “L” and “W” in the above tables are computed at 50% of centerbeam candlepower
and represent areas of “effective illumination”.
For 2700K fixtures, use 0.97 multiplier.
Fixtures tested to IES recommended standard for solid state lighting per LM-79-08.
Photometric performance on a single unit represents a baseline of performance for the fixture. Results may vary in the field.
1300 S. Wolf Road • Des Plaines, IL 60018 • Phone (800) 367-5866 • Fax (888) 708-6578
Visit us at www.junolightinggroup.com
Printed in U.S.A. ©2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
107 East National Avenue
2211-3 Parview Rd.
Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204
414-645-1600
Fax: 414-645-2597
Middleton, WI 53562
608-824-9300
Fax: 608-824-9305
10/25/2013
11/14/2016
Brittany Kohls
Staff Electric Co., INC.
W133 N5030 Campbell Drive, Menomonee Falls
262.781.8230
Re: St Joe’s Hospital West Bend
Rauland Responder IV Nurse Call System
Good Day,
Select Sound Service is pleased to inform you that the Rauland Responder IV nurse call system
has been installed as part of the Breast Imaging Project at St Joe’s West Bend. The Responder IV
nurse call devices have been installed to meet the manufacturer’s specifications. The Responder IV
system has been tested and certified as fully operational by a Rauland trained and authorized
technician from Select Sound Service.
Included with the installation of the new devices is a 5-year materials and 1-year labor warranty
excluding ancillary devices such as pillow speakers. This is effective as of 11/14/2016.
If you have any further questions, please call me at (414) 982-2775
Sincerely,
Carl Grevstad
Healthcare Project Manager
Select Sound Service, Inc.
Your Total Communications Company
Operations & Maintenance Manuals Prepared By:
St. Joseph’s Hospital – Mammo/Imaging
Operations & Maintenance Manuals
Prepared By:
N58 W14782 Shawn Circle
Menomonee Falls, WI. 53051
Contact Name: Curt Miller
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
Project Contacts
Simplex Warranty Letter
Code Requirements For Testing & Inspections
Bill Of Materials
Fire Alarm Data Sheets
4009 NACP Installation Instructions
4098 Devices Operating Manual
4906 Devices Installation Instructions
Table Of Contents
MC12-5-180
OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
Section 1. Table Of Contents:
Simplex Project Contacts Page
Simplex Warranty Letter & TIS
Section 2.
Code Requirements For Testing & Inspections
Section 3.
Bill Of Materials
Section 4.
Fire Alarm Data Sheets
Section 5.
4009 NACP Installation Instructions
Section 6.
4098 Devices Operating Manual
Section 7.
4906 Devices Installation Instructions
PROJECT CONTACTS
1-800-989-4460
Project Coordinator:
Veronica Ward - (262) 825-1037
Construction Manager:
Mike Cowell - (262) 622-3911
• Pre-installation visit.*
• Support.* (see TIS page)
*Give one week notice for all
visits.
• Pre-installation visit.*
• Support.* (see TIS page)
*Give one week notice for all
visits.
System Application Specialists:
Chad Schoenherr - (262) 825-1034
Mike Knoblock – (262) 781-1710 x109
System Application Specialist
Project Engineer
• Questions concerning Drawings, Submittals.
Sales Representative:
Curt Miller - (920) 246-7185
• Questions concerning quotes, bids
• Pricing Information
• Project Additions/Needs
>>> For Monitoring & Extended Warranty, Please Contact: <<<
Service Sales Representatives:
(262) 781-1710
• Monitoring Contracts • Extended Warranty.
Total Service Manager:
Steve Bieszki - (262) 234-6950
Operations Manager:
Robert Czajka - (262) 402-7258
Area General Manager:
Jim Kishish - (763) 367-5000
_____
SimplexGrinnell LP
N58 W17482 Shawn Circle
Menomonee Falls, WI. 53051
Tele: 262-252-4460
Fax: 262-252-4255
www.simplexgrinnell.com
Simplex Warranty Letter
St. Joseph’s Hospital
3200 Pleasant Valley Rd.
West Bend, WI. 53095
Dear Customer:
Thank you for choosing SimplexGrinnell as the provider of your new Fire Alarm System. As of this date,
work/construction on this project is substantially complete and your system/equipment is operating according to
our published specifications. Accordingly, SimplexGrinnell provides a one (1) year warranty, from date of
Certification.
Unless specifically negotiated or contracted otherwise, warranty service is available during regular working hours,
i.e. 8AM-5PM, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. The warranty coverage does not include preventative
maintenance or equipment provided by others.
We want you to get the optimum performance from the equipment you have purchased from SimplexGrinnell,
but if a warranty problem reported cannot be substantiated by SimplexGrinnell, we will invoice you for our service.
Please be advised that the performance and longevity of your new system/equipment is directly related to the
amount of periodic care and maintenance to which it receives. Therefore, SimplexGrinnell recommends that
periodic preventative maintenance be performed to Protect your investment. Failure to do necessary preventive
maintenance can also put your warranty coverage at risk.
SimplexGrinnell maintains its commitment to you by providing warranty and maintenance services. Our
planned service agreements are tailored to you and your new system/equipment needs.
Should you need warranty service or wish to discuss your maintenance needs, please call our office at
(262)781-1710. The following people are available to assist you:
Steve Bieszki (262) 234-6950
Brad Culp (262) 825-1005
Total Service Manager
Service Sales Representative
SimplexGrinnell appreciates your business and wants you to maintain a long-term business partnership with
you, our customer. Please feel free to call me if you have any questions about the project. We look forward to
serving you.
Sincerely,
Robert Czajka
Project Manager
SIMPLEXGRINNELL WARRANTY
HARDWARE
1.
SIMPLEXGRINNELL WARRANTY STATEMENT:
SimplexGrinnell warrants to the purchaser of new Simplex product(s) that during the effective period of the warranty such product(s)
shall be free of defects in workmanship and material.
2.
WARRANTY PERIOD:
The warranty period will terminate immediately following the earliest occurrence of either of the following:
-
Building Systems
1)
2)
3.
18 months have elapsed following shipment of any system or subsystem from Simplex to the customer site or
12 months have elapsed following the final connection operation and beneficial use of all or any part of the system.
SIMPLEXGRINNELL OBLIGATION UNDER THE TERMS OF THE WARRANTY:
SimplexGrinnell sole responsibility shall be to repair, adjust or replace at its option any SimplexGrinnell product which fails during this
period provided purchaser has promptly reported such failure to SimplexGrinnell in writing. Replacement parts provided under
warranty of products may contain used parts which are equivalent to new parts when used. Replacement parts will be warranted only
for the balance of the equipment warranty. Simplex agrees to continue to honor all of the unexpired express warranties specified above
on defective equipment after transfer of the equipment to purchasers customer, provided purchasers customer assumes the purchasers
obligations specified below.
EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES STATED HEREIN, SIMPLEXGRINNELL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES ON
PRODUCTS FURNISHED HEREUNDER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THE STATED WARRANTIES ARE IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS. THE SELLERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OF CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE TO THE PURCHASER OR USER OF THIS EQUIPMENT
ARISING OUT OF THE FAILURE OF THE EQUIPMENT TO OPERATE IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF SAID
EQUIPMENT.
SimplexGrinnell makes no warranty and no warranty shall be deemed to exist, that purchaser holds the goods free of the claim of any
third person by way of patent infringement or the like.
4.
PURCHASER’S OBLIGATIONS UNDER THE TERMS OF THE WARRANTY:
This warranty is contingent upon the proper installation and use of the product(s). Such warranty shall not apply if the product failure is
the result of accident, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress, neglect, misuse, user programming errors, failure of
electrical power, air conditioning or humidity control, construction dust, damaging foreign substances, transportation or causes other
than manufacturing defect. Purchaser agrees to provide full and free access to authorized Simplex employees.
5.
WARRANTY SERVICE HOURS:
Services provided under this warranty will be performed during 8:00 am to 5:00 pm. Monday through Friday, excluding locally
observed Simplex holidays. Off hours response is available as an extra cost service option.
6.
WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS:
1.
Labor, travel and mileage for:
a) Service outside of Simplex normal business hours
b) Program and/or label changes
c) Failures due to external causes (lightning surges, construction dust, etc.) other than manufacturing defect.
2.
Electrical work external to the equipment supplied by Simplex or maintenance of accessories, alterations, attachments or other
devices nor furnished by Simplex.
3.
Batteries
4.
Coverage of equipment classed as a water flow monitoring/control devices installed in or on water piping.
Technical Installer Support (TIS)
Introduction
Technical Installer Support (TIS) is provided as part of the cost of the equipment and is
designed to provide the expertise of a Simplex Technician to be available at key
scheduled times during the project. This service is available during normal Simplex
working hours, if scheduled five working days in advance.
TIS Activities
TIS includes the following activities by a Simplex factory-trained technician, when
determined by Simplex to be appropriate:
• Pre-construction review of submittals and drawings with the installer
• Technical advice during initial start up of control panels before installer wiring is
connected
• Review of panel wiring, and preparation of a list of any items to be corrected by
the installer
• Checkout of Factory Program
• Program editing to correct minor errors and omissions
• System check in preparation for functional test
• Assistance with one complete, functional test of the system
• One training session for the owner’s representative (2-4 hrs. per control panel)
Additional support may be purchased. See other side for more information.
Installer’s
Responsibility
How to Avoid
Potential Problems
TIS contributes significantly to the installation of Simplex equipment but does not
alleviate the installer’s responsibility to:
• Provide skilled labor and supervision to complete the project
• Review and understand Simplex instructions for installing and testing Simplex
equipment
• Ensure that all wiring provided and installed meets equipment specification
requirements, UL, code compliance and is free of grounds and faults.
Potential problems can be avoided by following these recommendations:
• Do not initially power up the system, except in the presence of a Simplex
technician. Simplex assumes no liability for damaged equipment, and warranty
may be voided if this procedure is not followed.
• Do not install smoke detectors (unless protected by plastic bags) until final
construction clean up has occurred. This prevents damage caused by dust, dirt,
and paint. Detectors installed prior to clean up may require disassembly,
cleaning, or replacement which is not covered by warranty.
• Care must be taken to protect equipment during the installation and warranty
period. Failures due to external causes (power surges, construction dust, water
damage, etc.) will be repaired by Simplex only upon receipt of a valid written
Purchase Order.
• TIS includes one complete system test, which is coordinated by the installer. To
avoid additional charges, the installer should schedule this test so that all
appropriate parties such as the owner’s representative and local fire officials, are
present.
Introduction
Technical Labor Product (TLP)
Technical Labor Product (TLP) is designed to make available the expertise of a Simplex
technician for any support requirements outside of TIS. This service is available from
Simplex at an extra cost.
TLP Activities
TLP includes, but is not limited to the following activities that are performed by a
Simplex factory-trained technician, when determined by Simplex to be appropriate:
• A Simplex Technician performs or assists in additional System Tests beyond the
one complete test provided by TIS, including Tests done with AHJ.
• A Simplex Technician performs or assists in the System Test provided by TIS
after Simplex normal working hours.
• A Simplex Technician assists in troubleshooting or repairing installer wiring
problems such as grounds, shorts, opens etc.
• A Simplex Technician participates in the electrical installation or connects wiring
to control panels, transponders, or peripheral devices.
• A Simplex Technician interconnects an existing system with new Simplex
control panels and/or transponders by installing wiring harness, modules,
programming, etc.
• A Simplex Technician completes the interface between the Simplex system and
another supplier’s equipment or panel.
• A Simplex Technician provides customer training, as required by specification or
customer, that goes beyond the training provided under TIS.
• A Simplex Technician works on or interfaces to any existing Network
communication system.
• A Simplex Technician changes or adds to an existing program and, when
appropriate, performs a field reburn.
• A Simplex Technician performs an audit/survey of a new or existing system and
reports the results in accordance with a customer’s request or specifications.
• A Simplex Technician performs work on a system that is determined by Simplex
to be outside the definition of TIS.
All TLP labor that is required with the project shall be priced and offered as additional
installation support.
CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR VISUAL INSPECTIONS
WEEKLY (owner’s responsibility)
Sprinklers
SEMIANNUALLY
Gauges (dry, preaction, and deluge systems)
Control valves
Va l v e s , Va l v e c o m p o n e n t s , Tr i m I n s p e c t i o n s
Sealed Control valves
P re s s u re R e d u c i n g a n d R e l i e f Va l v e s
Pump house, heating ventilating louvers
Fire pump system
Casing relief Valves
Pressure relief Valves
B a c k f l o w P re v e n t i o n A s s e m b l i e s
Reduced pressure
Reduced pressure detectors
Standpipe
Fire Pump
NFPA 25
Location pressure tamper indicator, hose/nozzle sign, hanger, hazard
assessment, HMIS label
Location in designated place
No obstruction to access or visibility
Operating instructions on nameplate legible and facing outward
Safety seals and tamper indicators not broken or missing
Fullness determined by weighing or “hefting”
Examination for obvious physical damage, corrosion, leakage or
clogged nozzle
Pressure gauge reading or indicator in the operable range or position
Condition of tires, wheels, carriage, hose, and nozzle checked (for
wheeled units)
HMIS label in place
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s U n m o n i t o re d*
NFPA 10
Gauges (dry, preaction, and deluge systems)
Control Valves
Gauges (wet pipe systems)
Va l v e s , Va l v e s c o m p o n e n t s , Tr i m I n s p e c t i o n s
Locked Control Valves
Valve Supervisory Switches
Tamper switches
Exterior Alarm Valves
B a c k f l o w P re v e n t i o n A s s e m b l i e s
Reduced pressure
Reduced pressure detectors
Standpipe
Functional Test
NFPA 25
NFPA 101, 70
Owner’s Inspection
NFPA 17
Hood
Suppression
System
Automatic
Fire Alarm
MONTHLY
Portable Fire
Extinguishers
Automatic Fire
Alarm
Sprinklers
Emergency
Lights/Exit Signs
Hood
Suppression
System
Sprinklers
Sprinklers
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s M o n i t o re d*
Fuses
Interfaced equipment
Lamps and LEDs
Primary (main) power supply
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s U n m o n i t o re d*
Radiant energy fire detectors
Supervisory signal devices
Waterflow devices
Alarm devices
Fire department connections
P re s s u re R e d u c i n g a n d R e l i e f Va l v e s
Sprinkler systems
Hose connections
Hose racks
B a c k f l o w P re v e n t i o n A s s e m b l i e s
Fire Department Connections
Standpipe
Private Fire Service Maintenance
NFPA 96
Fusible Link Replacement
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s M o n i t o re d*
Fuses
Interfaced equipment
Lamps and LEDs
Primary (main) power supply
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s U n m o n i t o re d*
Transient Suppressors
Control Unit Trouble Signals
Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment
Remote Annunciators
Batteries
Nickel-Cadmium
Sealed Lead-Acid
Initiating Devices
Air sampling smoke detectors
Duct smoke detectors
Electromechanical releasing devices
Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches
Fire alarm boxes (Pull Stations)
Heat detectors
Smoke detectors
Interface Equipment
Alarm Notification Appliances – Supervised
S u p e r v i s i n g S t a t i o n F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s – Tr a n s m i t t e rs
DACT
Private Fire Service Maintenance
NFPA 17, 17A
NFPA 72
NFPA 25
NFPA 72
ANNUALLY
Hood
Suppression
System
Portable Fire
Extinguishers
Sprinklers
Emergency
Lights/Exit Signs
QUARTERLY
Automatic Fire
Alarm
Suppression System
NFPA 72
Fusible Links
Cartridge (Hydrostatic Test/Replacement) - PYROCHEM
Replace rubber caps
All of monthly inspection, plus conductivity test (carbon dioxide),
determination of 6 year or Hydrotest, inspection of shell and nameplate
Hanger/seismic bracing
Pipe and fittings
Sprinklers
Spare sprinklers
Fire Pump
90 Minute drain test and inspection, verification of charge voltage,
alignment of heads, hazard assessment, inspection sticker,
required paperwork
Battery powered systems
NFPA 17, 17A
NFPA 10
NFPA 25
NFPA 101, 70
5 YEAR INTERVAL
Sprinklers
Va l v e s , Va l v e c o m p o n e n t s , Tr i m I n s p e c t i o n s
Interior Alarm Valves
Strainers, filters, orifices (Alarm Valves)
Interior Check Valves
Standpipe
Private Fire Service Maintenance
NFPA 25
12 YEAR INTERVAL
NFPA 25
Hood
Suppression
System
Regulator
NFPA 17, 17A
Actuation Hose (Hydrostatic Test/Replacement)
Tank Cylinder (Hydrostatic Test)
Cartridge (Hydrostatic Test/Replacement) - ANSUL
See other side for Functional Testing Requirements
*Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals
Confirm local code requirements with your local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1-800-SIMPLEX
www.simplexgrinnell.com
© 2004 SimplexGrinnell LP
MC13-40-003
Rev.01 1104
CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTING
MONTHLY
S u p e r v i s i n g S t a t i o n F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s - R e c e i v e rs
Automatic Fire
Alarm Systems
NFPA 72
Sprinklers
DACR, DARR
B a t t e r i e s – F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s
Load Voltage test primary type (Dry Cell)
30 Second quick check
Emergency Lights
NFPA 101
Sprinklers
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : B u i l d i n g S y s t e m s N o t C o n n e c t e d t o a
S u p e r v i s i n g S t a t i o n*
Functions, Fuses, Interface Equipment, Lamps & LEDs, Primary (main)
power supply, Transponders
B a t t e r i e s – P u b l i c F i re A l a r m R e p o r t i n g S y s t e m s Vo l t a g e t e s t s i n
a c c o rd a n c e w i t h Ta b l e 7 - 2 . 2 i t e m 7 ( a ) - ( f )
Sealed Lead-Acid - Discharge Test (2 Hours)
Load Voltage Test (Sealed Lead-Acid, Nickel-Cadmium Type, Lead
Acid type)
Initiating Devices
Supervisory signal devices (except valve supervisory switches)
O f f - P re m i s e s Tr a n s m i s s i o n E q u i p m e n t
Alarm Devices
NFPA 72
Sprinklers
Portable Fire
Extinguishers
NFPA 25
Sprinklers
ANNUALLY
Hood
Suppression
System
Automatic Fire
Alarm Systems
Wet Chemical Systems
NFPA 17A
Initiating Devices
NFPA 72
Radiant energy fire detectors
Waterflow devices
Valve Supervisory Switches
B a t t e r i e s - F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s
Sealed Lead-Acid - Load Voltage Test
Alarm Devices
Hood
Suppression
System
Sprinklers
Hydrotest of dry chemical extinguishers
Cylinder
Replacement of cartridge
Regulator Test
Wet chemical containers
Auxiliary pressure containers
Hose assemblies
At 20 years and every 10 years thereafter
At 50 years and every 10 years thereafter
NFPA 17A
Conductivity test of all carbon dioxide hose assemblies
Empty and recharge all stored pressure-loaded stream fire extinguishers
C o n t ro l E q u i p m e n t : B u i l d i n g S y s t e m s C o n n e c t e d t o
S u p e r v i s i n g S t a t i o n*
Functions, Fuses, Interface Equipment, Lamps & LEDs
Primary (main) power supply, Transponders
B a t t e r i e s - F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s
Sealed Lead-Acid Type
1. Charger Test (5 years from date of manufacture)
2. Discharge Test (30 minutes)
B a t t e r i e s - P u b l i c F i re A l a r m R e p o r t i n g S y s t e m s
Sealed Lead-Acid Type
1. Charger Test (Replace battery as needed)
2. Discharge Test (2 hours)
C o n t ro l U n i t Tr o u b l e S i g n s
E m e r g e n c y Vo i c e / A l a r m C o m m u n i c a t i o n s E q u i p m e n t
R e m o t e A n n u n c i a t o rs
Initiating Devices
Duct smoke detectors
Electromechanical releasing devices
Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches
Fire alarm boxes (Pull Stations)
Heat detectors
All smoke detectors - Functional
Fire, Gas and other detectors
Interface Equipment
S p e c i a l H a z a rd E q u i p m e n t
Alarm Notification Devices
Audible Devices
Audible Textual Notification Appliances
Visible Devices
NFPA 25
NFPA 72
See other side for Visual Inspections Requirements
1-800-SIMPLEX
www.simplexgrinnell.com
NFPA 10
NFPA 17A
Continued (Top of next column)
Fixed Temperature Sensing
NFPA 10
Hydrotest of dry chemical hose equipped with a shut-off valve
Hydrostatic testing
NFPA 25
*Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals
Confirm local code requirements with your local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
© 2004 SimplexGrinnell LP
Hydrostatic testing of carbon dioxide, wet chemical and
foam fire extinguishers
Hydrostatic testing of cartridges associated with portable fire
extinguishers and wheeled units
Hydrostatic testing of carbon dioxide hoses equipped with
a shut-off valve
Gauges
Sprinklers – extra-high temperature
12 YEAR INTERVAL
SEMIANNUALLY
Hood
Suppression
System
Automatic Fire
Alarm Systems
NFPA 25
5 YEAR INTERVAL
Portable Fire
Extinguishers
QUARTERLY
Automatic Fire
Alarm Systems
S u p e r v i s i n g S t a t i o n F i re A l a r m S y s t e m s – Tr a n s m i t t e rs
DACT, DART
S p e c i a l P ro c e d u re s
Main drain
Antifreeze solution
NFPA 25
SimplexGrinnell
NFPA 72
Fire Alarm
10.1 Application.
10.1.1 The inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire alarm systems, their initiating devices, and notification
appliances shall comply with the requirements of this chapter.
10.1.2 The inspection, testing, and maintenance of single- and multiple-station smoke and heat alarms and household
fire alarm systems shall comply with the requirements of this chapter.
10.1.3 Procedures that are required by other parties and that exceed the requirements of this chapter shall be
permitted.
10.1.4 The requirements of this chapter shall apply to both new and existing systems.
10.2 General.
10.2.1 Performance.
10.2.1.1 Performance Verification. Inspection, testing, and maintenance programs shall satisfy the requirements of
this Code, shall conform to the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations, and shall verify correct operation of the
fire alarm system.
10.2.1.2 Impairments.
(A) The requirements of Section 4.6 shall be applicable when a system is impaired.
(B) System defects and malfunctions shall be corrected.
(C) If a defect or malfunction is not corrected at the conclusion of system inspection, testing, or maintenance, the
system owner or the owner’s designated representative shall be informed of the impairment in writing within 24
hours.
10.2.2 Responsibilities.
10.2.2.1 The owner or the owner’s designated representative shall be responsible for inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system and alterations or additions to this system.
10.2.2.2 The delegation of responsibility shall be in writing, with a copy of such delegation provided to the authority
having jurisdiction upon request.
10.2.2.3 Inspection, testing, or maintenance shall be permitted to be done by a person or organization other than the
owner if conducted under a written contract.
10.2.2.4 Testing and maintenance of central station service systems shall be performed under the contractual
arrangements specified in 8.2.3.
10.2.2.5 Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire alarm
systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall be permitted to include, but shall not be limited to, individuals with
the following qualifications:
(1)
Factory trained and certified
(2) National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies fire alarm certified
(3)
International Municipal Signal Association fire alarm certified
(4)
Certified by a state or local authority
(5)
Trained and qualified personnel employed by an organization listed by a national testing laboratory for the
servicing of fire alarm systems
10.2.3* Notification.
10.2.3.1 Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals
and all building occupants shall be notified of the testing to prevent unnecessary response.
10.2.3.2 At the conclusion of testing, those previously notified (and others, as necessary) shall be notified that testing
has been concluded.
10.2.3.3 The owner or the owner’s designated representative and service personnel shall coordinate system testing to
prevent interruption of critical building systems or equipment.
10.2.4 System Documentation. Prior to system maintenance or testing, the system certificate and the information
regarding the system and system alterations, including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor plans, shall be
provided by the owner or a designated representative to the service personnel upon request.
10.3 Inspection.
10.3.1* Visual inspections shall be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 10.3.1 or more often if
required by the authority having jurisdiction.
10.3.2 The visual inspection shall be made to ensure that there are no changes that affect equipment performance.
10.4 Testing.
10.4.1 System Testing.
10.4.1.1 Initial Acceptance Testing. All new systems shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 10.
10.4.1.2* Reacceptance Testing.
10.4.1.2.1 Reacceptance testing shall be performed as required in 10.4.1.2.1.1 through 10.4.1.2.1.4.
10.4.1.2.1.1 When an initiating device, notification appliance, or control relay is added, it shall be functionally tested.
10.4.1.2.1.2 When an initiating device, notification appliance, or control relay is deleted, another device, appliance, or
control relay on the circuit shall be operated.
10.4.1.2.1.3 When modifications or repairs to control equipment hardware are made, the control equipment shall be
tested in accordance with Table 10.4.2.2, items 1(a) and 1(d).
10.4.1.2.1.4 When changes are made to site-specific software, the following shall apply:
(1)
All functions known to be affected by the change, or identified by a means that indicates changes, shall be 100
percent tested.
(2)
In addition, 10 percent of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50
devices, also shall be tested and correct system operation shall be verified.
(3) A revised record of completion in accordance with 4.5.2.1 shall be prepared to reflect these changes.
10.4.1.2.2 Changes to all control units connected or controlled by the system executive software shall require a 10percent functional test of the system, including a test of at least one device on each input and output circuit to verify
critical system functions such as notification appliances, control functions, and off-premises reporting.
10.4.2 Test Methods.
10.4.2.1* At the request of the authority having jurisdiction, the central station facility installation shall be inspected
for complete information regarding the central station system, including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor
plans that have been submitted for approval prior to installation of equipment and wiring.
10.4.2.2* Fire alarm systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with fire alarm systems and
accessory equipment shall be tested according to Table 10.4.2.2.
10.4.3* Testing Frequency. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 10.4.3, except as
modified in other paragraphs of 10.4.3, or more often if required by the authority having jurisdiction.10.4.3.1 If
automatic testing is performed at least weekly by a remotely monitored fire alarm control unit specifically listed for
the application, the manual testing frequency shall be permitted to be extended to annually. Table 10.4.3 shall apply.
10.4.3.2* Sensitivity of smoke detectors and single- and multiple-station smoke alarms in other than one- and twofamily dwellings shall be tested in accordance with 10.4.3.2.1 through 10.4.3.2.6.
10.4.3.2.1 Sensitivity shall be checked within 1 year after installation.
10.4.3.2.2 Sensitivity shall be checked every alternate year thereafter unless otherwise permitted by compliance
with 10.4.3.2.3.
10.4.3.2.3 After the second required calibration test, if sensitivity tests indicate that the device has remained within its
listed and marked sensitivity range (or 4 percent obscuration light gray smoke, if not marked), the length of time
between calibration tests shall be permitted to be extended to a maximum of 5 years.
10.4.3.2.3.1 If the frequency is extended, records of nuisance alarms and subsequent trends of these alarms shall be
maintained.
10.4.3.2.3.2 In zones or in areas where nuisance alarms show any increase over the previous year, calibration tests
shall be performed.
10.4.3.2.4 To ensure that each smoke detector or smoke alarm is within its listed and marked sensitivity range, it shall
be tested using any of the following methods:
(1) Calibrated test method
(2) Manufacturer’s calibrated sensitivity test instrument
(3)
Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose
(4)
Smoke detector/control unit arrangement whereby the detector causes a signal at the control unit where its
sensitivity is outside its listed sensitivity range
(5) Other calibrated sensitivity test methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction
10.4.3.2.5 Detectors or smoke alarms found to have a sensitivity outside the listed and marked sensitivity range shall
be cleaned and recalibrated or be replaced.
Exception: Devices listed as field adjustable shall be permitted to be either adjusted within the listed and marked
sensitivity range and cleaned and recalibrated, or they shall be replaced.
10.4.3.2.6 The detector or smoke alarm sensitivity shall not be tested or measured using any device that administers
an unmeasured concentration of smoke or other aerosol into the detector or smoke alarm.
10.4.3.3 Test frequency of interfaced equipment shall be the same as specified by the applicable NFPA standards for
the equipment being supervised.
10.5 Maintenance.
10.5.1 Fire alarm system equipment shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
10.5.2 The frequency of maintenance of fire alarm system equipment shall depend on the type of equipment and the
local ambient conditions.
10.5.3 The frequency of cleaning of fire alarm system equipment shall depend on the type of equipment and the local
ambient conditions.
10.6.2 Maintenance, Inspection, and Testing Records.
10.6.2.1 Records shall be retained until the next test and for 1 year thereafter.
10.6.2.2 The records shall be on a medium that will survive the retention period. Paper or electronic media shall be
permitted.
10.6.2.3 A record of all inspections, testing, and maintenance shall be provided that includes the following
information regarding tests and all the applicable information requested in Figure 10.6.2.3:
(1) Date
(2)
Test frequency
(3) Name of property
(4)
Address
(5)
Name of person performing inspection, maintenance, tests, or combination thereof, and affiliation, business
address, and telephone number
(6)
Name, address, and representative of approving agency(ies)
(7)
Designation of the detector(s) tested, for example, “Tests performed in accordance with Section __________.”
(8) Functional test of detectors
(9)* Functional test of required sequence of operations
(10)
Check of all smoke detectors
(11) Loop resistance for all fixed-temperature, line-type heat detectors
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Other tests as required by equipment manufacturers
Other tests as required by the authority having jurisdiction
Signatures of tester and approved authority representative
Disposition of problems identified during test (e.g., owner notified, problem corrected/successfully retested,
device abandoned
Table 10.3.1 Visual Inspection Frequencies
Component
Initial/
Reacceptance
Monthly
(a) Fuses
X
—
—
—
X
(b) Interfaced equipment
X
—
—
—
X
(c) Lamps and LEDs
X
—
—
—
X
(d) Primary (main) power supply
X
—
—
—
X
(a) Fuses
X (weekly)
—
—
—
—
(b) Interfaced equipment
X (weekly)
—
—
—
—
(c) Lamps and LEDs
X (weekly)
—
—
—
—
(d) Primary (main) power supply
X (weekly)
—
—
—
—
(a) Lead-acid
X
X
—
—
—
(b) Nickel-cadmium
X
—
—
X
—
(c) Primary (dry cell)
X
X
—
—
—
(d) Sealed lead-acid
X
—
—
X
—
4.
Transient Suppressors
X
—
—
X
—
5.
Control Unit Trouble Signals
X (weekly)
—
—
X
—
6.
Fiber-Optic Cable Connections
X
—
—
—
X
7.
Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment
X
—
—
X
—
8.
Remote Annunciators
X
—
—
X
—
9.
Initiating Devices
(a) Air sampling
X
—
—
X
—
(b) Duct detectors
X
—
—
X
—
(c) Electromechanical releasing devices
X
—
—
X
—
(d) Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression
system(s) switches
X
—
—
X
—
(e) Fire alarm boxes
X
—
—
X
—
(f) Heat detectors
X
—
—
X
—
(g) Radiant energy fire detectors
X
—
X
—
—
(h) Smoke detectors
X
—
—
X
—
(i) Supervisory signal devices
X
—
X
—
—
(j) Waterflow devices
X
—
X
—
—
1.
2.
3.
Quarterly Semiannually
Annually
Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Monitored for
Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble Signals
Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Unmonitored
for Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble Signals
Batteries
Table 10.4.3 Testing Frequencies
Component
Initial/
Reacceptance
Monthly
Quarterly
Semi annually
Annually
1. Control Equipment — Building Systems
Connected to Supervising Station
Table
10.4.2.2
Reference
1, 7, 16,
17
(a) Functions
X
—
—
—
X
—
(b) Fuses
X
—
—
—
X
—
(c) Interfaced equipment
X
—
—
—
X
—
(d) Lamps and LEDs
X
—
—
—
X
—
(e) Primary (main) power supply
X
—
—
—
X
—
(f) Transponders
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
(a) Functions
X
—
X
—
—
—
(b) Fuses
X
—
X
—
—
—
(c) Interfaced equipment
X
—
X
—
—
—
(d) Lamps and LEDs
X
—
X
—
—
—
(e) Primary (main) power supply
X
—
X
—
—
—
(f) Transponders
X
—
X
—
—
—
X
X
—
—
—
—
X (weekly)
—
—
—
—
—
(a) Lead-acid type
—
—
—
—
—
6b
1. Charger test (replace battery as needed.)
X
—
—
—
X
—
2. Discharge test (30 minutes)
X
X
—
—
—
—
3. Load voltage test
X
X
—
—
—
—
4. Specific gravity
X
—
—
X
—
—
(d) Sealed lead-acid type
—
—
—
—
—
6d
1. Charger test (replace battery within 5 years
after manufacture or more frequently as
needed.)
X
—
—
—
X
—
2. Control Equipment — Building Systems Not
Connected to a Supervising Station
3. Engine-Driven Generator — Central Station
Facilities and Fire Alarm Systems
4. Engine-Driven Generator — Public Fire
Alarm Reporting Systems
6. Batteries — Fire Alarm Systems
12.
Component
Initial/
Reacceptance
Monthly
Quarterly
Semi- Annually
annually
Table
10.4.2.2
Reference
13. Retransmission Equipment
(The requirements of 10.4.7 shall apply.)
X
—
—
—
—
—
14. Remote Annunciators
X
—
—
—
X
10
15. Initiating Devices
—
—
—
—
—
13
(a) Duct detectors
X
—
—
—
X
—
(b) Electromechanical releasing device
X
—
—
—
X
—
(c) Fire extinguishing system(s) or
suppression system(s) switches
X
—
—
—
X
—
(d) Fire–gas and other detectors
X
—
—
—
X
—
(e) Heat detectors (The requirements of
10.4.3.4 shall apply.)
X
—
—
—
X
—
(f) Fire alarm boxes
X
—
—
—
X
—
(h) System smoke detectors — functional
X
—
—
—
X
—
(i) Smoke detectors — sensitivity (The
requirements of 10.4.3.2 shall apply.)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(j) Single- and multiple-station smoke alarms
(The requirements for monthly testing in
accordance with 10.4.4 shall also apply.)
X
—
—
—
X
—
(k) Single- and multiple-station heat alarms
X
—
—
—
X
—
(l) Supervisory signal devices (except valve
tamper switches)
X
—
X
—
—
—
(m) Waterflow devices
X
—
—
X
—
—
(n) Valve tamper switches
X
—
—
X
—
—
Bill of Materials
MC12-5-180
SimplexGrinnell LP
N58 W17482 Shawn Circle
Menomonee Falls, WI. 53051
Tele: 262-781-1710
Fax: 262-781-3573
www.simplexgrinnell.com
Attention:
GREG STROM – STAFF ELECTRIC
RE:
ST JOSEPH’S HOSPITAL – MAMMO/IMAGING
Thank you for your recent order covering equipment for the above mentioned job. The following is
a list of equipment we proposed to furnish for this job.
1
2
1
4
1
10
10
18
2
4009-9201
2081-9274
4099-9004
4906-9151
4906-9154
4098-9714
4098-9792
4906-9101
4081-9008
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
NAC EXTENDER 120VAC, IDNET
BATTERY 10AH
STATION-LED, SA ADDR
SPKR/STROBE MC WHITE WALL
SPKR/STROBE MC WHITE CEILING
PHOTO SENSOR
SENSOR BASE
STROBE MC RED
EOL, 10K 1/2W
(na) = No data sheet available
Automatic detectors shall remain in original packing until the building construction clean-up has
been completed. Detectors shall be the last electrical installation work and shall not be installed
until the building air is in the purest and most dust free state.
Normal delivery time is 90 - 120 days. All equipment is in abeyance pending release and
approval. Please advise to forestall further delay.
Sincerely,
SIMPLEXGRINNELL
Curt Miller
BUILDING SYSTEM SALES REPRESENTATIVE
LifeAlarm Fire Alarm Controls
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
4009 IDNet NAC Extender for Control with
IDNet Communications or Conventional NACs
Features
Provides additional notification appliance circuit
(NAC) capacity with flexible operation modes and
power-limited design
Four, Class B NACs are standard:
 Rated 2 A each for conventional reverse polarity
24 VDC notification appliances and providing
multiple operation modes
 Can be selected to provide synchronization for
Simplex® visible notification strobe flashes
 Capable of controlling TrueAlert non-addressable
notification appliances operating with SmartSync
two-wire control mode**
Input control options:
 IDNet addressable communications from a Simplex
model 4007ES, 4010, 4010ES, 4100ES, or 4100U Fire
Alarm Control Panel**
 Or from one or two conventional 24 VDC NACs with
multiple output control options
IDNet communications control benefits:
 Provides status monitoring and individual NAC control
using a single address per 4009 IDNet NAC Extender
 Supports IDNet “Device Level” earth fault location
WALKTEST operation is available with either
input choice
Internal 8 A power supply/battery charger:
 Charges internal batteries up to 12.7 Ah or up to 18 Ah
batteries in external cabinet
 Provides status monitoring of battery, input power, and
earth faults
 Rated 8 A for “Special Application” appliances;
including Simplex 4901, 4903, 4904, and 4906 Series
horns, strobes, horn/strobes, and speaker/strobes
 Rated 6 A for “Regulated 24 DC” appliance power
Optional 4009 IDNet NAC Extender modules:
 IDNet Communications Repeater provides Class B or
Class A output
 IDNet Communications Fiber Optic Receiver/Repeater,
available as Class B or Class X
 Four additional Class B NACs, rated 1.5 A for Special
Application appliances; 1 A for Regulated 24 DC
appliance power
 Class A, Two Circuit Adapter Module
UL Listed to Standard 864
External Accessories
IDNet communication fiber optic transmitters:
 For applications requiring the data integrity available
with fiber optic communications
 Available as Class B or Class X
 Mounts in standard six-gang electrical box
External battery cabinet for 18 Ah batteries
Up to 8 NACs
4009 IDNet
NAC Extender
CAUTI ON
DI SCO NNECT
PO W ER
BEFO RE
SERVI CI NG
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
Optional IDNet
Channel Repeater
FIRE
1 + 24 V ZO NE PWR +
2 0V
ZO NE PWR 3 +I DNET I DC +
4 - I DNET I DC -
ALARM
1
PULL
5
6
7
8
5
2
DOWN
6
3
SIMPLEXT IMERECORDERCO.
4
DATECODE:
7
4090- 91 01
MONITORZAM,CLASSB
INSTAL.INS TR.574- 183
8
1
2-Wire IDNet
Communications or
Fiber Optic IDNet
Communications or
NAC Control
FI RE ALARM
CO NTRO L
* * SYSTEM I S NO RM AL * *
12: 02: 15pm
F I R E
S Y S T E M S Y S T E M A L A R M
A C
A L A R M S U P E R V I STOR OR YU B LS E
I L E N C EPDO
W
A L A R M
A C K
S U P V
A C K
T R O
A C K
M on
9- Feb- 98
E R
U BA
L LE A R M S Y S T E M
S I L E N C ER E S E T
CAUTI O N
DI S CO NNE CT
P O W ER BEFO
SERVI CI NG
R
IDNet Fiber
Optic Transmitter
4007ES, 4010 (shown),
4010ES, 4100ES, or 4100U
Fire Alarm Control Panel
Fire Alarm Control Panel with
Conventional NACs
4009 IDNet NAC Extender Connection Reference Drawing
Introduction
ADA Compliance. Complying with the notification
requirements of ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act)
may require more notification appliance power than is
available within the fire alarm control panel. When
additional power is required, a Simplex 4009 IDNet NAC
Extender can provide up to 8 A of NAC power with up to
eight, supervised reverse polarity NACs.
Location Flexibility. The 4009 IDNet NAC Extender
can be mounted close to a compatible dedicated host
panel or can be located remotely for convenient power
distribution. Multiple operation modes and multiple
connection options further increase location flexibility.
Additional Information. For additional operation detail
and application information, refer to Installation
Instructions 574-181 and field wiring diagram 842-068.
* ULC listed model is 4009-9202CA. This product has been approved by the California
State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and
Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7300-0026:214 for allowable values and/or conditions
concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use – City of New York
Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact
your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under
Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products.
** 4100U requires revision 11 software or higher for compatibility. 4010 requires revision 2
software or higher for compatibility.
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
Application and Operation Information
Hardwire Control Applications. For applications
where an existing (or new) conventional NAC needs
additional power, the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender can be
controlled directly from the NAC. Either one or two
NACs, from either the same, or from different host fire
alarm control panels, can be connected to control the 4009
IDNet NAC Extender output NACs. Multiple control
selections provide flexible operation. (Refer to page 4 for
more detail.) Alarms from the host panel will activate the
four, 4009 IDNet NAC Extender NACs (or optionally,
eight NACs) to extend the alarm.
IDNet Addressable Communications Compatible.
Up to ten (10), 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders can be
controlled per 4007ES, 4010ES, 4100ES, or 4100U
IDNet communications channel; up to five (5) can be
controlled on the 4010 IDNet communications channel.
Each output NAC can be individually controlled for
general alarm or selective area notification requiring only
one point address per Extender. Individual Extender
NACs can also be manually controlled from the host
panel. IDNet controlled extenders will inform the host
panel of troubles via IDNet communications. 4007ES,
4010ES, 4100ES, and 4100U control panels control using
multi-point rules, refer to data sheet S4090-0011 for
details.
The 4009 IDNet Extender monitors itself and each of its
output NACs for trouble conditions, including earth
faults. Extenders wired to conventional NACs will
indicate a trouble by opening the path to the NAC’s
end-of-line resistor, but retaining the ability to respond to
alarms. Individual troubles are also annunciated by LEDs
located on the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender main circuit
board. (Refer to page 7 for more diagnostic information.)
Optional IDNet Repeaters. IDNet communications can
be repeated with the optional IDNet Repeater Module or
with the optional Fiber Optic Receiver Module. Up to 100
of the IDNet channel points can be repeated once (refer to
pages 3 and 5 for details). Repeated IDNet communications
also support the “device level” earth fault location utility of
the host panel.
Product Selection
Standard Models
Model
4009-9201
4009-9202CA*
4009-9301
Description
120 VAC input
4009 IDNet NAC Extender with 4, Class B NACs and 8 A power supply
240 VAC input
* ULC listed model
Optional Modules (for on-site installation)
Model
Description
Comments
4009-9808
Additional four point NAC module, rated 1.5 A Special
Application appliances; 1 A for Regulated 24 DC appliance
power, Class B
Dual Class A adapter (for two NAC outputs)
4009-9809
IDNet Repeater, output is Class A or Class B
4009-9807
4009-9810
4009-9811
Fiber Optic Receiver
4009-9805
Red Appliqué for door
2975-9801
2975-9802
Semi-Flush Trim Kit
Class B
Class A (IDNet), Class X (fiber)
One maximum
Select as required (4 maximum)
Select either an IDNet Repeater or a Fiber
Optic Receiver as required; one transmitter
can connect to one receiver
Select if required
Beige trim
Red trim
1-7/16” wide (78 mm), use if required for
semi-flush installations
Battery Selection (select battery size per system requirements)
Model
Description
2081-9272
2081-9274
2081-9288
6.2 Ah Battery, 12 VDC
10 Ah Battery, 12 VDC
12.7 Ah Battery, 12 VDC
Comments
2081-9275
18 Ah Battery, 12 VDC
Two batteries are required, 24 VDC
operation
Requires external battery cabinet, two
batteries are required, 24 VDC operation
External Accessories (select per system requirements)
Model
4090-9105
4090-9107
4009-9801
4081 Series
Description
IDNet Fiber Optic
Transmitter
Comments
Class B operation
Class X operation
Mounts in six-gang electrical box, refer to
page 4 for mounting details
16-1/4” W x 13-1/2” H x 5-3/4” D
(413 mm x 343 mm x 146 mm)
End-of-Line Resistor Harnesses; see data sheet S4081-0003 for details
External battery cabinet for up to 18 Ah batteries, beige
2
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
Typical IDNet Connection Example
Typical IDNet compatible devices
(Refer to individual devices for actual wiring
requirements, some wiring is not shown.)
FIRE
ALARM
1 + 24V
ZO NE PWR +
2 0V
ZO NE PWR 3 +I DNET I DC +
4 - I DNET I DC -
1
PULL
DOWN
5
6
7
8
5
2
6
3
SIMPLEXT IME RECORDERCO.
4
DATECODE:
7
4090- 9101
MONITORZAM,CLASSB
INST AL .INSTR.57 4- 18 3
8
1
IDNet addressable communications channel,
shown Class B (Style 4)
Output NACs, four standard,
eight with expansion option
4007ES, 4010, 4010ES,
4100ES (shown), or 4100U
Fire Alarm Control Panel
Conventional NAC operation (horns)
F
I
R
E
Select conventional
or SmartSync
operation per NAC
CAUTI ON
DI SCO NNECT
PO W ER
BEFO RE
SERVI CI NG
SmartSync operation (horns and strobes)
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
4009 IDNet NAC Extender with
optional internal IDNet Repeater
Conventional NAC
operation (strobes)
F
I
R
E
Repeated IDNet Channel:
up to 100 devices maximum on repeater output,
250 devices total on IDNet Channel
FIRE
ALARM
ZO NE PWR +
1 + 24V
ZO NE PWR 2 0V
3 +I DNET I DC +
4 - I DNET I DC -
1
PULL
DOWN
3
5
6
7
8
5
6
2
SIMPL EX TIMERECORDERCO.
7
4090-9101
MONITORZAM,CLASSB
4
INSTAL.INST R.5 74 - 1 8 3
DATECODE:
8
1
CAUTI ON
DI SCO NNECT
PO W ER
BEFO RE
SERVI CI NG
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
IDNet devices and additional 4009 IDNet NAC Extender(s)
NOTE: Up to ten (10) 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders may be connected per 4007ES, 4010ES, 4100ES, or
4100U IDNet channel, up to five (5) on the 4010 IDNet channel. IDNet communications can be
repeated only once (can pass through only one series connected repeater or one fiber optic
receiver).
Typical Fiber Optic System Connections
4090-9105, Class B
(Style 4) Output Fiber
Optic Transmitter
Two fiber cables, 3000 ft
(914 m) maximum distance
Output NACs
CAUTI ON
DI SCO NNECT
PO W ER
BEFO RE
SERVI CI NG
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
FI RE ALARM
CO NTRO L
* * SYSTEM I S NO RM AL * *
12: 02: 15pm
F I R E
S Y S T E M S Y S T E M A L A R M
A C
A L A R M S U P E R V I ST OR OR YU B LS EI L E N C EP DO
W
A L A R M
A C K
S U P V
A C K
T R O
A C K
M on
9- Feb- 98
E R
U BA
L LE A R M S Y S T E M
S I L E N C ER E S E T
FIRE
CAUTI O N
ALARM
1 + 24V ZO NE PWR +
ZO NE PWR 2 0V
3 +I DNET I DC +
4 - I DNET I DC -
5
6
7
8
1
PULL
DI S CO NN E C T
PO W E R BE FO
S E R V I CI NG
DOWN
5
2
6
3
SIMPLEXTIMERECORDERCO.
4
DATECODE:
7
4090- 9101
R
MONITORZAM,CLASSB
INSTAL.INSTR.574- 183
8
1
IDNet addressable communications
channel Class B (Style 4) or Class A
(Style 6), Class B shown
4007ES, 4010 (shown),
4010ES, 4100ES, or 4100U
Fire Alarm Control Panel
Repeated IDNet Channel: up to 100 devices maximum
on repeater output, 250 devices total on IDNet Channel
Four fiber cables, 3000 ft
(914 m) maximum distance
FIRE
ALARM
1 + 24V ZO NE PWR +
ZO NE PWR 2 0V
3 +I DNET I DC +
4 - I DNET I DC -
1
PULL
DOWN
3
5
6
7
8
5
2
6
SIMPLEXTIMERECORDERCO.
7
4090- 9101
MONITORZAM,CLASSB
4
INSTAL.INSTR.574- 183
DATECODE:
8
1
24 VDC power for
fiber optic transmitters
4090-9107, Class A (Style 7)
Output Fiber Optic Transmitter
CAUTI ON
DI SCO NNECT
PO W ER
BEFO RE
SERVI CI NG
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
4009 IDNet NAC Extenders with optional
internal IDNet Fiber Receivers
Output NACs
NOTE: Up to ten (10) 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders may be connected per 4007ES, 4010ES, 4100ES, or 4100U IDNet
channel, up to five (5) on the 4010 IDNet channel. IDNet communications can be repeated only once (can
pass through only one series connected repeater or one fiber optic receiver). Fiber optic transmitters connect
to only one receiver in a 4009 IDNet NAC Extender.
3
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
Hardwire Control Connection Information
SmartSync Notification Appliance Control
NAC Input Selections. The 4009 IDNet NAC
Extender can be selected to:
The TrueAlert Notification Appliance product line
includes addressable and non-addressable operation.
Non-addressable models are available with 2-wire
SmartSync operation or conventional 4-wire operation.
The following details apply to use with the 4009 IDNet
NAC Extender:

Track input NAC operation or to provide a locally
generated code, selectable per NAC input
 If selected for local coding, NAC outputs can be either
Temporal Coded or 60 Beats/min March Time Coded,
one code selection per extender (input NACs must be on
continuous with Alarm)
 Additionally, NAC outputs can be selected to provide
the Simplex strobe synchronization signal. This signal
will synchronize the flashes of synchronized strobes but
will be ignored by free-run strobes and audible devices.
(Strobes are for operation by noncoded NACs.)
 TrueAlert non-addressable models with SmartSync
operation allow audible notification to be separately
controlled over the same wire pair that controls visible
notification
 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders can be selected to provide
SmartSync operation whether controlled by IDNet
communications or conventional NACs
NAC input to NAC output control can be selected for
standard and optional NACs per the following table:
 IDNet control allows output NACs to be individually
selected for conventional or SmartSync operation
Conventional NAC Output Operation Options
 With NAC input control, all output NACs are selected
for either conventional or SmartSync operation
Input
NAC 1
NAC 2
A
NACs 1 & 2, 5 & 6
NACs 3 & 4, 7 & 8
B
NACs 1-4
NACs 5-8
C
NACs 1-8
None
 Refer to data sheet S4009-0003 for TrueAlert
Addressable operation details, contact your local
Simplex product supplier for further information on
specific TrueAlert notification appliances
SmartSync NAC Output Operation
Input
NAC 1
NAC 2
NAC Control Function
Strobe Control
All NAC outputs (1-8)
Horn Control
Hardwire Control NAC Connection One-Line Reference Diagram
Up to eight (8) output NACs total; hardwire control can be
selected to map NAC inputs to different combinations of
NAC outputs depending on system requirements
NAC 1 input
(see Note 1)
Conventional NACs
CAUTI O N
DI S C O
N NE C T
PO W E R
B E F O RE
S E R VI C I N G
Output
NACs
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
With hardwire control,
NAC outputs are all
conventional or all
SmartSync operation
4009 IDNet NAC
Extender
Fire Alarm Control Panel
with Conventional NACs
NAC 2 input
(optional, see Note 1)
SmartSync operation
Class A operation, either mode, requires
4009-9808 Dual Class A Adapter
To additional 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders (up to four (4),
4009 IDNet NAC Extenders per NAC); see Note 2
Notes:
1. For separate audible and visible output NAC control, or SmartSync NAC output operation, two (2) input NACs are required.
NAC 1 is "on-until-reset" and NAC 2 is "on-until-silenced."
2. To synchronize strobe flash outputs for up to four (4) 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders, use the synchronized strobe
output from a Synchronized Flash Module (4905-9914 for Class B operation, 4905-9922 for Class A operation) or,
if available, from a NAC selected to provide synchronized strobe flash output. NOTE: DO NOT USE a NAC selected
for SmartSync operation for this function.
Refer to Installation Instructions 574-181 for additional information and application guidance
4
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
4009 IDNet NAC Extender Specifications
120 VAC Input (4009-9201) 3A @ 102-132 VAC, 60 Hz
Input
Ratings
240 VAC Input (4009-9301) 1.5A @ 204-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Hardwire Control from External Conventional reverse polarity operation
NACs, Input Requirements 5 mA maximum; 16 to 33 VDC
Total Rating
8 A, Special Application appliances
6 A, Regulated 24 DC appliance power
Standard NACs 2 A each, Special Application or Regulated 24 DC appliance power
Optional NACs 1.5 A each, Special Application appliances
(requires 4009-9807) 1 A each, Regulated 24 DC appliance power
Simplex non-addressable horns, strobes, and combination horn/strobes and
Special Application
speaker/strobes (contact your Simplex product representative for compatible
Appliances
appliances)
Output Ratings
Regulated 24 DC Power for other UL listed appliances; use associated external synchronization
Appliances modules where required
Strobe Operation
Up to 33 strobes per NAC can be synchronized; output NACs configured for
Simplex synchronized strobe operation are synchronized to each other
Auxiliary Output 500 mA @ 24 VDC nominal
Optional Modules Ratings
Input Power 70 mA @ 24 VDC, system supplied
IDNet Input, One Address Maximum distance from IDNet source is 2500 ft (762 m)
IDNet Repeater
Module
(4009-9809)
Repeated IDNet output for up to 100 devices (total IDNet devices not to exceed
250 per channel)
IDNet Output Specifications Maximum distance to farthest device is 2500 ft (762 m)
Total distance including “T-taps” is 10,000 ft (3048 m)
Class A loop maximum distance is 2500 ft (762 m), no “T” taps
Fiber Optic Receiver Modules
Input Current
4009-9810, Class B, 65 mA @ 24 VDC, system supplied
4009-9811, Class X, 80 mA @ 24 VDC, system supplied
IDNet Output Specifications
Fiber Optic Transmission Distance
Same as those for Repeater Module (see above)
3000 ft (914 m) maximum
General (LED status indicators are listed on page 7, dimensions and mounting details are on page 6)
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity Range
Wiring Connections*
32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C)
10% to 90% RH from 32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
Terminal blocks for 18 AWG (stranded) to 12 AWG (solid)
Fiber Optic Transmitter Specifications
Input Voltage
18.9-32 VDC from compatible listed fire alarm supply
Input Current
4090-9105, Class B, 30 mA @ 24 VDC
4090-9107, Class X, 35 mA @ 24 VDC
Multimode, graded index, 50/125µm, 62.5/125 µm, 100/40 µm, or 200 µm
Fiber Optic Connections and cable
requirements
Type ST connectors
Module Size (with mounting bracket)
6-13/16” W x 3-3/4” H x 1-1/8” D (173 mm x 95 mm x 29 mm)
4090-9105, Class B operation, two fiber cables required
4090-9107, Class X operation, four fiber cables required
Green LED flashing = transmit
On-board Status Indicators
Red LED flashing = receive
Separate red LED on 4090-9107 = Class X receive
Communications
Fiber Optic Transmission Distance
Wiring Connections*
Operating Humidity
Operating Temperature
Simplex IDNet
3000 ft (914 m) maximum
Terminal blocks for 18 AWG (stranded) to 12 AWG (solid)
10% to 90% RH from 32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
32° F to 120° F (0° to 49° C)
* Metric wire equivalents: 18 AWG = 0.82 mm2; 12 AWG = 3.31 mm2
5
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
4009 IDNet NAC Extender Mounting and Module Placement Information
Cabinet depth
4-1/4" (108 mm)
16-1/4" (413 mm)
10-29/32" (277 mm)
Optional Class A
adapter modules
Door, 5/8"
(16 mm) thick
13-1/2"
(343 mm)
4009-9807 Additional Four
point module (shown with
Class A adapters)
Exposed cabinet
dimension for
semi-flush mount
1" (25.4 mm),
1-3/8" (35 mm) with
semi-flush trim
System Module
IDNet repeater or
Fiber optic receiver
Knockouts for screw
or nail mounting holes
12" (305 mm)
Battery location, no conduit entry or wiring in
this area (12.7 Ah battery outline shown)
Semi-flush trim option
1-3/16" wide (30 mm),
3/8" (9.5 mm) thick
Non-power limited wiring area (AC input)
Wall surface reference for semi-flush mount
NOTE: Recommended conduit entrance varies with module selection. Refer to general installation
instructions 574-181, specific module installation instructions, and to field wiring diagrams
842-068 before locating conduit entrance.
4009 IDNet NAC Extender Cabinet with Door Detail
Optional red appliqué
(4009-9805 )
CAUTION
DISCONNECT
POWER
BEFORE
SERVICING
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
6
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
4090-9105/9107 IDNet Fiber Optic Transmitter Mounting Information
Surface mount box:
Simplex model 2975-9217
(ordered separately)
Flush mount masonry box:
use 6-gang box, RACO # 960, 2-1/2" deep
(64 mm), or RACO # 965, 3-1/2" (89 mm)
deep, or equal (supplied by others)
Flush mount ganged boxes:
use 6-gang box, 1-1/2" (38 mm)
minimum depth; six, RACO # 400
or equal, (supplied by others)
IDNet fiber optic transmitter:
4090-9107, Shown, Class A (Style 7) output
4090-9105, Not shown, Class B (Style 4) output
INSTALLATION NOTE:
Fiber optic cable bend radius should be 2" (51 mm)
minimum, or per Manufacturer's specification.
Six-gang blank cover plate Mulberry Metal
Products 97156 or equal (by others)
LED Status Indicators are provided for the following:
Service Diagnostic Features
 Each NAC (standard and optional) has a dedicated
yellow LED that:
– During supervision provides a slow flash to indicate
a short circuit condition and a fast flash to indicate
an open circuit
– During an alarm, the LED follows the NAC output
(on steady or flashing with coded output)
Power-up Self-Diagnostics. Upon power-up, the
4009 IDNet NAC Extender tests each module and
performs earth fault diagnostics. Trouble conditions are
communicated to the host control panel and are also
displayed on diagnostic status LEDs in the 4009 IDNet
NAC Extender. When connected via IDNet
communications, detailed status information is available
at the host. When controlled with conventional NAC
inputs, common troubles are signaled by providing a
polarized open circuit that disconnects the NAC wiring
from its end-of-line resistor but still allows a reversed
polarity alarm to be received.
 Four, general status yellow LEDs provide nine
separate indications listed in priority of urgency. As a
trouble is eliminated, any remaining trouble(s) will
then be indicated until the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender
is returned to normal operation.
Door Mounted Reference Label. The 4009 IDNet
NAC Extender has a detailed programming and
diagnostic label inside the front door that provides a quick
reference for both installation and checkout.
 AC power status is indicated by a green LED that is
on when AC is normal. During low AC (brownout)
conditions or with no AC, the LED is off. Additional
power and battery status is indicated by the general
status LEDs.
7
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
4009 IDNet NAC Extender Current Calculation Chart
Step 1. Calculate Basic Extender Battery Requirements (minus NAC loads)
Panel, NAC Options, and Auxiliary Power (underlined model numbers are optional modules)
Model
Descript ion
4009-9201
120 VAC input
4009-9301
240 VAC input
4009-9807
Additional Four Point NAC
4009-9808
Dual Class A Adapter (no additional current)
Basic Panel
Supervisory
Current
Actual
Supervisory
Alarm Current
Actual Alarm
85 mA
85 mA
185 mA
185 mA
40 mA
+_______
40 mA
+_______
–
–
–
–
+_______
(500 mA
maximum)
+ [A1] _______
(500 mA
maximum)
Auxiliary Power Output
Basic Panel Supervisory Current = [S1] _____
Basic Panel Alarm Current = [A2] ______
Step 2. Calculate IDNet Output Module and Device Current (if used)
4009-9809
4009-9810*
4009-9811*
70 mA
IDNet Repeater
Select one per
Fiber Optic Receiver, Class B
Extender
Fiber Optic Receiver, Class X
IDNet Devices (connected to Repeater or Receiver above),
0.7 mA each, maximum of 100
* Note: IDNet Fiber Optic Transmitter
current is supplied from the host fire
alarm control panel
65 mA
70 mA
+_______
Total devices
x 0.7 mA each
+_______
65 mA
80 mA
80 mA
Total devices
x 0.7 mA each
+_______
+_______
IDNet Module Supervisory Current [S2] = ____
IDNet Module Alarm Current = [A3] ______
Maximum Available Current
Step 2. Calculate Available NAC Current
= 8 A*
Subtract Auxiliary Power Output - [A1] ______
Subtract IDNet Module Current - [A3] ______
* 8 A for Special Application Appliances; 6 A for Regulated 24 DC Appliances
Available NAC Current = [A4] ______
Step 3. Calculate Actual NAC Loading (Limited to Available NAC Current per Step 2.)
NAC Type
NAC Circuit #
NAC Alarm
Current
Circuit 1
+_______
Circuit 2
+_______
Circuit 3
+_______
Circuit 4
+_______
Circuit 5
+_______
Circuit 6
+_______
Circuit 7
+_______
Circuit 8
+_______
Standard Panel NACS, 2 A maximum per NAC
Optional Four Point NAC Module, 1.5 A maximum Special Application rating,
1 A maximum Regulated 24 DC rating, per NAC
Total Actual NAC Load Alarm Current = [A5] _______
Step 4. Calculate Total Supervisory Current
Total Supervisory Current = Basic Panel Current [S1] + IDNet Module Current [S2] =
________
Step 5. Calculate Total Alarm Current
Total Alarm Current = Basic Panel Current [A2] + IDNet Module Current [A3] + Actual NAC Current [A5] =
________
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.simplex-fire.com
S4009-0002-12 11/2014
© 2014 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
Multi-Application Peripherals
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed;
FM Approved *
IDNet or MAPNET II Communicating Devices
Addressable Manual Stations
Features
Individually addressable manual fire alarm
stations with:
 Power and data supplied via IDNet or MAPNET II
addressable communications using a single wire pair
 Operation that complies with ADA requirements
 Visible LED indicator that flashes during
communications and is on steady when the station has
been activated
 The NO GRIP Single Action Station and Retrofit Kit
are available with a more easily operated pull lever for
applications where anticipated users may find the
standard station lever difficult to activate
 Pull lever that protrudes when alarmed
 Break-rod supplied (use is optional)
 Models are available with single or double action
(breakglass or push) operation
 UL listed to Standard 38
Compatible with the following Simplex® control
panels:
 Model Series 4007ES, 4008, 4010, 4010ES, 4100ES,
4100U, 4020, 4100, and 4120 fire alarm control
panels equipped with either IDNet or MAPNET II
communications
 Model Series 2120 Communicating Device
Transponders (CDTs) equipped with MAPNET II
communications
Compact construction:
 Electronics module enclosure minimizes dust
infiltration
 Allows mounting in standard electrical boxes
 Screw terminals for wiring connections
Tamper resistant reset key lock (keyed same as
Simplex fire alarm cabinets)
Multiple mounting options:
 Surface or semi-flush with standard boxes or matching
Simplex boxes
 Flush mount adapter kit
 Adapters are available for retrofitting to commonly
available existing boxes
Description
The Simplex addressable manual station combines the
familiar Simplex manual station housing with a compact
communication module that is easily installed to satisfy
demanding applications. Its integral individual
addressable module (IAM) constantly monitors status and
communicates changes to the connected control panel via
IDNet or MAPNET II communications wiring.
* Refer to page 2 for specific model listings. This product has been approved by the
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health
and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7150-0026:224 for allowable values and/or conditions
concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable;
contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals
under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products.
4099-9004
Single action
4099-9021
NO GRIP
Single action
FIRE
ALARM
4099-9805
NO GRIP
Retrofit kit
FIRE
ALARM
PUSH
PULL DOWN
KEY
OPERATED
ONLY
4099-9005
Breakglass
4099-9006
Push
With 2099-9828
Institutional
Cover kit
Operation
Activation of the 4099-9004 single action manual station
requires a firm downward pull to activate the alarm switch.
Completing the action breaks an internal plastic break-rod
(visible below the pull lever, use is optional). The use of a
break-rod can be a deterrent to vandalism without
interfering with the minimum pull requirements needed for
easy activation. The pull lever latches into the alarm
position and remains extended out of the housing to provide
a visible indication.
Single Action NO GRIP Station 4099-9021. For
applications such as California Building Code, Title 24,
which requires “Controls and operating mechanisms shall
be operable with one hand and shall not require tight
grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist” the model
4099-9021 station provides a more easily operated pull
lever compared to standard stations. Retrofit of existing
stations is available using the 4099-9805 Retrofit kit.
Double Action Stations (Breakglass) require the
operator to strike the front mounted hammer to break the
glass and expose the recessed pull lever. The pull lever then
operates as a single action station.
Double Action Stations (Push Type) require that a
spring loaded interference plate (marked PUSH) be pushed
back to access the pull lever of the single action station.
Station reset requires the use of a key to reset the manual
station lever and deactivate the alarm switch. (If the breakrod is used, it must be replaced.)
Station testing is performed by physical activation of the
pull lever. Electrical testing can be also performed by
unlocking the station housing to activate the alarm switch.
S4099-0005 10/2014
Addressable Manual Station Product Selection
Addressable Manual Stations, Red Housing with White Letters and White Pull Lever
Model
Description
Housing
Pull Lever
FIRE ALARM
FEU FIRE
ALARME FEU
FOGO ALARME
ALARMA FUEGO
PULL DOWN
TIREZ PULL
ABAISSEZ
PUXE
JALE
UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
4099-9005
Double Action, Breakglass operation, English
4099-9005PO Double Action, Breakglass operation, Portuguese
4099-9005SP Double Action, Breakglass operation, Spanish
FIRE ALARM
FOGO ALARME
ALARMA FUEGO
PULL DOWN
PUXE
JALE
UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
4099-9006
Double Action, Push operation, English
4099-9006PO Double Action, Push operation, Portuguese
4099-9006SP Double Action, Push operation, Spanish
FIRE ALARM
FOGO ALARME
ALARMA FUEGO
4099-9004
4099-9004CB
4099-9004CF
4099-9004PO
4099-9004SP
4099-9021
Single Action, English
Single Action, Bilingual English and French
Single Action, French
Single Action, Portuguese
Single Action, Spanish
Single Action NO GRIP operation, English
Listings
ULC
UL, FM
UL, FM
PUSH PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
EMPURRE PUXE
UL, FM
EMPUJE JALE
FIRE ALARM
PULL DOWN
UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
Accessories (refer to pages 3 and 4 for details)
Model
Description
2975-9022
2975-9178
2099-9813
2099-9819
2099-9820
4099-9805
Model
Cast aluminum surface mount box, red
Surface mount steel box, red
Semi-flush trim plate for double gang switch
box, red
Flush mount adapter kit, black
Flush mount adapter kit, beige
2099-9803
2099-9804
2099-9828
2099-9814
Description
Replacement breakglass
Replacement break-rod
Institutional cover kit for field installation on 4099-9004;
Note: Covers LED indicator
Surface trim plate for Wiremold box V5744-2, red
Retrofit Kit for field conversion of a single action station to a NO GRIP station; refer to Installation Instructions
579-1007 for details
Specifications (refer to Installation Instructions 579-1135 for additional information)
Power and Communications
Address Means
Wire Connections
UL Listed Temperature Range
Humidity Range
Housing Color
Material
Pull Lever Color
Housing Dimensions
IDNet or MAPNET II communications, 1 address per station
DIP switch, 8 position
Screw terminal for in/out wiring, for 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm2 to 2.08 mm2)
32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) intended for indoor operation
Up to 93% RH at 100° F (38° F)
Red with white raised lettering
Housing and pull lever are Lexan polycarbonate or equal
White with red raised lettering
5” H x 3 ¾” W x 1” D (127 mm x 95 mm x 25 mm)
Addressable Manual Station Semi-Flush Mounting
4" Square Box Mount
4" (102 mm) square box, 2 1/8" (54 mm) minimum
depth, RACO #231 or equal (supplied by others)
Mount flush or with
1/16" (2 mm)
maximum extension
DO NOT RECESS
Single Gang Box Mount
Single gang box, 2 1/2" deep
(64 mm), RACO #500 or equal
(supplied by others)
FIRE
ALARM
PULL DOWN
4" Square box
with cover plate
Station
side view
Single gang cover plate, 3/4"
(19 mm) extension, RACO #773
or equal (supplied by others)
Single gang
box outline
LED Indicator
Wall surface
Semi-Flush Mount Side View
2
S4099-0005 10/2014
Addressable Manual Stations Surface Mounting
Preferred Mounting. For surface
mounting of these addressable
manual stations, the preferred
electrical boxes are shown in the
illustration to the right.
Additional Mounting
Reference. Refer to page 4 for
Wiremold box mounting
compatibility.
2975-9178 Box
5-3/16" H x 4" W x 2-3/16" D
(132 mm x 102 mm x 56 mm)
(ordered separately)
2975-9022 Cast Box
5" H x 3-7/8" W x 2-3/16" D
(127 mm x 98 mm x 56 mm)
(ordered separately)
Knockouts located
top and bottom
FIR
FIRE
E
ALARM
PULL DOWN
Access for 3/4" threaded
conduit located top and bottom
5"
(127 mm)
1" (25.4 mm)
3-3/4" (95 mm)
4099 Series Addressable Manual Station
Surface Mount Side View with Internal Detail
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
Field wiring
(shown for reference)
Application Reference
Simplex 2975-9178 box
(shown for reference)
Address setting under
resealable label (accessible
with cover open)
2-5/8"
(67 mm)
Station cover
hinges open for
installation access
Switch wiring
(prewired)
3
Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code, and all
applicable local codes for complete
requirements for manual stations. The
following summarizes the basic
requirements.
1. Stations shall be located in the
normal path of exit and distributed
in the protected area such that they
are unobstructed and readily
accessible.
2. Mounting shall be with the
operable part not less than 42 in
(1.07 m) and not more than 48 in
(1.22 m) above floor level.
3. At least one station shall be
provided on each floor. Additional
stations shall be provided to obtain
a travel distance not more than
200 ft (61 m) to the nearest station
from any point in the building.
4. When manual station coverage
appears limited in any way,
additional stations should be
installed.
S4099-0005 10/2014
Addressable Manual Station, Additional Mounting Information
For retrofit and new installations,
additional compatible mounting
boxes and the required adapter plates
are shown in the illustration to the
right.
Wiremold
receptacle box
model V5744-2
(supplied by
others)
2099-9814 Surface trim
for Wiremold box
5-1/8" H x 5" W
(130 mm x 127 mm)
Two gang switch box, each
3" H x 2" W x 2-3/4" D
(76 mm x 51 mm x 70 mm)
(supplied by others)
Addressable
station
2099-9813 Semi-flush trim for 2 gang
switch box, 6" H x 4-1/2" W
(152 mm x 114 mm)
Addressable Manual Station, Flush Mounting Information
Flush mount adapter kit
2099-9819, Black
2099-9820, Beige
Box must be recessed into wall
1" to 1-1/8" (25.4 mm to 29 mm)
8"
(203 mm)
Hole cutout must be a
minimum of 6" H by 5" W
(152 mm by 127 mm)
6"
(152
mm)
4-3/4" (121 mm)
Wall
surface
4-11/16" (119 mm)
square box, 2-1/8"
(54 mm) minimum
depth (by others)
6-3/4" (171 mm)
Front View
Side View
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Lexan is a trademark of the General Electric Co. Wiremold is a trademark of
the Wiremold Company.
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.simplex-fire.com
S4099-0005 10/2014
© 2014 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
TrueAlarm Analog Sensors – Photoelectric
and Heat; Standard Bases and Accessories
Features
TrueAlarm analog sensing provides:
 Digital transmission of analog sensor values via IDNet
or MAPNET II two-wire communications
For use with the following Simplex® products:
 4007ES, 4010, 4010ES, 4100ES, and 4100U Series
control panels; and 4008 Series control panels with
reduced feature set (refer to data sheet S4008-0001 for
details)
 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, Universal
Transponders, and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs equipped
for MAPNET II operation
Fire alarm control panel provides:
 Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each
sensor for individual sensitivity selection
 Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72 sensitivity
testing requirements; automatic individual sensor
calibration check verifies sensor integrity
 Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage
alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in
percent per foot
 Ability to display and print detailed sensor
information in plain English language
Photoelectric smoke sensors provide:
 Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7%
(refer to additional information on page 3)
Heat sensors provide:
 Fixed temperature sensing
 Rate-of-rise temperature sensing
 Utility temperature sensing
 Listed to UL 521 and ULC-S530
General features:
 Operation is for ceiling or wall mounting
 Listed to UL 268 and ULC-S529
 Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke
capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas
are minimally visible when ceiling mounted
 Designed for EMI compatibility
 Magnetic test feature is provided
 Different bases are available to support a supervised
or unsupervised output relay, and/or a remote LED
alarm indicator
Additional base reference:
 For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0025
 For sounder bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0028
 For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S4098-0024
(single address) and S4098-0033 (dual address)
* These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to
Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings
7272-0026:218, 7271-0026:231, 7270-0026:216, and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values
and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use – City of
New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable,
contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under
Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products.
4098-9714 TrueAlarm Photoelectric
Sensor Mounted in Base
Description
Digital Communication of Analog Sensing.
TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog
measurement digitally communicated to the host control
panel using Simplex addressable communications. At the
control panel, the data is analyzed and an average value is
determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal
condition is determined by comparing the sensor’s present
value against its average value and time.
Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor’s
average value provides a continuously shifting reference
point. This software filtering process compensates for
environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component
aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new
activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction
in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by
shifts in sensitivity, either up or down.
Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is
stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm
set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the
host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as
the individual application requires.
Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points
can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity
selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive
during day). Control panel programming can also provide
multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2%
level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a
2.5% level may initiate an alarm.
Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each
sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications
with the panel. If the control panel determines a sensor is
in alarm, or is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the
details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor
base’s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system
alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that
an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help
identify the alarmed sensors.
S4098-0019-20 1/2015
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories
Description
Sensor Base Features
TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable
electronics that constantly monitor the status of the
detachable photoelectric or heat sensors. Each sensor’s
output is digitized and transmitted to the system fire alarm
control panel every four seconds.
Base mounted address selection:


Address remains with its programmed location
Accessible from front (DIP switch under sensor)
General features:



Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different
sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific
location requirements. This feature also allows intentional
sensor substitution during building construction. When
conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the
smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors
may be installed without reprogramming the control
panel. Although the control panel will indicate an
incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a
default sensitivity providing heat detection for building
protection at that location.
Automatic identification provides default sensitivity when
substituting sensor types
Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or trouble
(steady on)
Locking anti-tamper design mounts on standard outlet box
 Magnetically operated functional test
Sensor Bases
4098-9792, Standard Sensor Base
4098-9789, Sensor Base with wired connections for:

2098-9808 Remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822 relay
(relay is unsupervised and requires separate 24 VDC)
Mounting Reference
Supervised Relay Bases (not compatible with 2120 CDT):
 4098-9791, 4-Wire Sensor Base, use with remote or



Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others)
locally mounted 2098-9737 relay, requires separate 24 VDC
4098-9780, 2-Wire Sensor Base, use with remote or
locally mounted 4098-9860 relay, no separate power
required
Supervised relay operation is programmable and can be
manually operated from control panel
Includes wired connections for remote LED alarm indicator
or 4098-9822 relay (relay is unsupervised and requires
separate 24 VDC)
Without relay in the box: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;
single gang, 2" deep
With relay in the box : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,
with 1-1/2" extension ring
4" (102 mm) Square Box
4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box
Surface mount reference
Sensor Base Options
1-1/2" (38 mm)
minimum box depth
2098-9737, Remote or local mount supervised relay:

DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power limited
rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 3 A
@ 120 VAC (requires external 24 VDC coil power)
2098-9737 Supervised Relay
(mounts in base electrical box or
remotely)
4098-9860, Remote or local mount supervised relay:

SPDT dry contacts, power limited rating of 2 A @ 30 VDC,
resistive; non-power limited rating of 0.5 A @ 125 VAC,
resistive

Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating local
alarm or trouble
DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power limited
rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of
1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC coil power)
4098-9860 Supervised Relay (mounts in base
electrical box or remotely; 2-3/8" X 1-1/4" X 11/32"
(1 in3 ) (60.4 mm X 31.8 mm X 8.6 mm)
NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessories being
wired to determine required box volume.
4098-9832, Adapter plate:


Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to 4” square
electrical box and for surface mounting to 4” octagonal box
Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8”
diameter base product
6-3/8" (162 mm)
1/4"
(6.4 mm)
2098-9808, Remote red LED Alarm
Indicator:

Mounts on single gang box (shown in
illustration to right)
4098-9822 Relay (mounts
in base electrical box)
Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1"
(3.75 in3 ) (64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)
4098-9822, LED Annunciation Relay:

Flush mount reference, mount even with final
surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess
4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for
mounting to surface mounted boxes
and 4" square flush box
4-7/8" (124 mm)
15/16"
(24 mm)
ALARM
TrueAlarm Bases
4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, & 4098-9792
2
S4098-0019-20 1/2015
TrueAlarm Sensors
Features
4098-9733 Heat Sensor
Sealed against rear air flow entry
Interchangeable mounting
EMI/RFI shielded electronics
Heat sensors:
TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate
compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with
or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its
small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly
measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire
alarm control panel.

Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature
sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation
 Rated spacing distance between sensors:
Fixed Temp.
Setting
UL & ULC
Spacing
FM Spacing, Either Fixed
Temperature Setting
135° F
(57.2° C)
60 ft x 60 ft
(18.3 m)
20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed
temperature only; RTI = Quick
155° F
(68° C)
40 ft x 40 ft
(12.2 m)
50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed
temperature with either rate-of-rise
selection; RTI = Ultra Fast
Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the
control panel for either 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C)
per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of
rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at
135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F (68° C). In a slow developing
fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to
operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be
initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed
temperature setting.
Smoke Sensors:



TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility
device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range
from 32° F to 155° F (0° C to 68° C). This feature can
provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system
problems. Refer to specific panels for availability.
Photoelectric technology sensing
360° smoke entry for optimum response
Built-in insect screens
4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor
4-7/8" (124 mm)
TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed
infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode
receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power
smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available
for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per
foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivities of 0.2%, 0.5%,
and 1% are for special applications in clean areas.
Standard sensitivities are 1.5%, 2.0%, 2.5%, 3.0%, and
3.7%. Application type and sensitivity are selected and
then monitored at the fire alarm control panel.*
LED status indicator
2-3/8"
(60 mm)
4098-9733 Heat Sensor with Base
The sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for
optimum response to smoke from any direction. Due to its
photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a
factor, except for impact on area smoke flow.
WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke
and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection
device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life
Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly
recommended.
4-7/8" (124 mm)
LED status indicator
Application Reference
2-1/8"
(54 mm)
Sensor locations should be determined only after careful
consideration of the physical layout and contents of the
area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code. On smooth ceilings, smoke
sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide.*
4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor with Base
* For detailed application information including sensitivity
selection, refer to Installation Instructions 574-709.
3
S4098-0019-20 1/2015
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases (for use with Sensors 4098-9714 and 4098-9733)
(Refer to Application Manual 574-709 and Installation Instructions 574-707 for additional information)
Model
Description
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
4098-9792
Standard Sensor Base
No options
4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” min.
depth; or single gang box, 2” min. depth
4098-9789
Sensor Base with connections for
2098-9808 Remote Alarm Indicator or
Remote LED Alarm Indicator or
4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay
Unsupervised Relay
4” octagonal or 4” square box
4098-9791**
4-Wire Sensor Supervised Relay
Base with connections for LED
Indicator or Unsupervised Relay
2098-9737 Supervised Remote Relay
2098-9808 Remote Alarm Indicator or
4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay
Note: Box depth requirements depend on
total wire count and wire size, refer to
accessories list below for reference.
4098-9780**
2-Wire Sensor Supervised Relay
Base with connections for LED
Indicator or Unsupervised Relay
4098-9860 Supervised Remote Relay
2098-9808 Remote Alarm Indicator or
4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay
** NOTE: 4098-9791 and 4098-9780 are NOT
compatible with the 2120 CDT
TrueAlarm Sensors
Description
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
4098-9714
Model
Photoelectric Smoke Sensor
4098-9733
Heat Sensor
Bases 4098-9792, 4098-9789,
4098-9791, and 4098-9780
Refer to base requirements
TrueAlarm Sensor/Base Accessories
Model
2098-9737
4098-9860
2098-9808
4098-9822
4098-9832
Description
Supervised Relay, mounts remote or in base
electrical box
Supervised Relay, mounts remote or in base
electrical box
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
For use with 4098-9791 base
Remote Mounting requires 4” octagonal
or 4” square box, 1-1/2” minimum depth
Base Mounting requires 4” octagonal
box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring
For use with 4098-9780 base
Remote Red LED Alarm Indicator on single
gang stainless steel plate
Unsupervised Relay, tracks base LED status;
Note: Mounts only in base electrical box
Bases 4098-9789, 4098-9791,
and 4098-9780
Bases 4098-9789, 4098-9791,
and 4098-9780
Adapter Plate
Bases 4098-9792, 4098-9789,
4098-9791, and 4098-9780
Single gang box, 1-1/2” minimum depth
4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2”
extension ring
Required for surface or semi-flush
mounted 4” square box and for surface
mounted 4” octagonal box
Specifications
General Operating Specifications
Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power
Communications Connections
Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current
Remote LED Alarm Indicator and Relay Connections
UL Listed Operating Temperature Range
Operating Temperature
Range
IDNet or MAPNET II communications, auto-selected, 1 address per base
2
2
Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm to 2.08 mm )
1 mA typical, no impact to alarm current
2
Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm )
32° to 100° F (0° to 38° C)
with 4098-9733 Heat Sensor 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
with 4098-9714 Smoke Sensor 15° to 122° F (-9° to 50° C)
Storage Temperature Range
Humidity Range
4098-9714 Smoke Sensor Air Velocity Rating
Housing Color
0° F to 140° F (-18° C to 60° C)
10 to 95% RH
0-4000 ft/min (0-1220 m/min)
Frost White
4098-9791 Base With Supervised Remote Relay 2098-9737 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage
18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current
270 A, from 24 VDC supply
28 mA, from 24 VDC supply
Alarm Current with 2098-9737 Relay
4098-9780 Base With Supervised Remote Relay 4098-9860 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Power
Supplied from communications
4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay, Requirements for Bases 4098-9789. 4098-9791, and 4098-9780 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage
Supervisory Current
Alarm Current
18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supplied from communications
13 mA from separate 24 VDC supply
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.simplex-fire.com
S4098-0019-20 1/2015
© 2015 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
TrueAlert Multi-Candela Notification Appliances
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
Visible Notification Appliances with Speaker
and Multi-Candela Strobe; Non-Addressable
Features
Speaker/visible (S/V) notification appliances with
multi-tapped speaker and multi-tapped high
intensity xenon strobe with synchronized flash:
 Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic
housings are available for wall or ceiling mount
 Operation is compatible with ADA requirements (refer to
important wall mount installation information on page 4)
Wall mount S/V features:
 Housings are available in red or white with clear lens
with contrasting white or red “FIRE” lettering
 Covers are available separately to convert housing color
Ceiling mount S/V features:
 Housing is white with clear lens
 Red “FIRE” lettering is printed on two sides
Audible notification appliance (speaker):
 High quality voice and tone reproduction with taps for
¼, ½ , 1, or 2 W, at 25 or 70.7 VRMS
 Capacitor input for connection to supervised notification
appliance circuits
 Speakers are wired separately from strobe wiring
 UL listed to Standard 1480 and ULC-S541*
 Compliant with NFPA 72, 520 Hz Low Frequency
Signal Requirements for Sleeping Areas
Visible notification appliance (strobe):
 24 VDC xenon strobe; intensity is selectable as 15, 30,
75, or 110 candela with visible selection jumper secured
behind strobe housing
 Strobes are activated from NACs selected to provide
Simplex® strobe synchronization signals or from
separate strobe Synchronization Modules that are
available for Class B or Class A operation
 Regulated circuit design ensures consistent flash output
and provides controlled inrush current
 UL listed to Standard 1971 and ULC-S526*
Options for wall mounted S/Vs:
 Red or white adapters to cover surface mounted
electrical boxes
 Red adapter for mounting to Simplex 2975-9145 boxes
 Red wire guard
*
See page 2 for additional listing details and wire guard listings. This product has been
approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the
California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7320-0026:247 for allowable values
and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use – City
of New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable;
contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals
under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products.
Wall and Ceiling Mount S/Vs
Description
Multi-Candela TrueAlert S/Vs with speaker and
synchronized strobe provide convenient installation
to standard electrical boxes with extensions. The
enclosure designs are both impact and vandal resistant
and provide a convenient strobe intensity selection. Since
each model can be selected for strobe intensity output,
on-site model inventory is minimized and changes
encountered during construction can be easily
accommodated.
Wall mount S/V housings are a one-piece assembly
(including lens) that mounts to a 4” square electrical box
with extension (see details on page 4). The cover can be
quickly removed (a tool is required) and covers are
available separately for color conversion.
Ceiling mount S/Vs also install using 4” electrical
boxes with an extension (see details on page 4).
Strobe Intensity Selection
During installation, a selection plug at the back of the
housing determines the desired strobe intensity. An
attached flag with black letters on a highly visible yellow
background allows the selected intensity to be seen at the
side of the strobe lens.
S4906-0003-8 5/2014
Synchronized Strobes
Strobe Application Selection
Multiple Strobes. When multiple strobes and their
reflections can be seen from one location, synchronized
flashes reduce the probability of photo-sensitive reactions
as well as the annoyance and possible distraction of
random flashing. The multi-candela strobes of these S/Vs
are activated by NACs that provide the Simplex
synchronization format. For additional information, refer
to data sheet S4905-0003.
Proper selection of visible notification is dependent on
occupancy, location, local codes, and proper applications
of: the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
(NFPA 72), ANSI A117.1; the appropriate model
building code: BOCA, ICBO, or SBCCI; and the
application guidelines of the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA).
Product Selection
Wall Mount Multi-Candela S/Vs
Model
Housing
Color
“FIRE”
Lettering
4906-9151
Red
White
Listings
UL & ULC
4906-9153
White
Red
Description
Housing Dimensions with Lens
Multi-tapped Speaker with Multi-Candela
Synchronized Strobe; strobe intensity
selectable as: 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela
7 ¼” H x 5” W x 2 ⅝” D
(184 mm x 127 mm x 67 mm)
Ceiling Mount Multi-Candela S/V
Model
Housing
Color
“FIRE”
Lettering
Listings
4906-9154
White
Red
UL
4906-9157
White
Red
ULC
Description
Dimensions
Multi-tapped Speaker with Multi-Candela
Synchronized Strobe; strobe intensity
selectable as: 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela
Housing = 7 ½” (191 mm)
diameter, ½” (13 mm) deep
Strobe lens protrusion = 2 ⅝”
(67 mm) above speaker housing
Depth into box = 2 ¾” (70 mm)
Wall Mount S/V Adapters
Model
Description
Dimensions
4905-9946
Surface mount red adapter skirt
4905-9947
Surface mount white adapter skirt
4905-9903
Adapter Plate, red, required to mount S/V on 2975-9145
2975-9145
Mounting box, red, for surface or flush mount, requires adapter plate
4905-9903 (this box may be available for retrofit applications)
Required when mounting to surface
mounted electrical box, 4” square,
1 ½” deep with 1 ½” deep extension
7 ¾” H x 5 ⅜” W x 3 3⁄16 ” D
(197 mm x 137 mm x 81 mm)
depth with S/V = 5 ⅞” (149 mm)
8 5⁄16 " H x 5 ¾" W x 0.060” Thick
(211 mm x 146 mm x 1.5 mm)
7 ⅞" H x 5 ⅛" W x 2 ¾" D
(200 mm x 130 mm x 70 mm)
Wall Mount S/V Replacement Covers
Model
Description
4905-9996
Red S/V cover with white “FIRE” lettering
4905-9997
White S/V cover with red “FIRE” lettering
Dimensions
7 ¼” H x 5” W x 1 ⅜” D
(184 mm x 127 mm x 35 mm)
Synchronized Flash Control Modules
Model
Description
4905-9914*
Synchronized Flash Module, Class B
operation
4905-9922*
Synchronized Flash Module, Class A
operation
Dimensions
Epoxy encapsulated with in/out
18 AWG (0.82 mm2) wire leads,
rated for 2 A NAC, requires 5 mA
for power
1 ⅜” W x 2 7⁄16” L x 13⁄16” H
(35 mm x 62 mm x 20 mm)
Wall Mount S/V Wire Guard
Model
4905-9998
Description
Dimensions
Wire guard with mounting plate, red, compatible with surface and semi-flush
boxes (UL listed by Space Age Electronics Inc.)
8 ⅜” H x 6 5⁄16 ” W x 3 ¼” D
(213 mm x 154 mm x 79 mm)
Ceiling Mount Tile Bridge
Model
Description
Dimensions
2905-9946
Tile Bridge
See diagram on page 4
* Refer to data sheet S4905-0003 for additional flash control module information
2
S4906-0003-8 5/2014
S/V Specifications
Common
Specifications
Environmental 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C); 10% to 93%, non-condensing at 100° F (38° C)
2
2
Connections Terminal blocks for 18 AWG to 12 AWG (0.82 mm to 3.31 mm ); two wires per terminal for in/out wiring
Speaker Specifications
Input Voltage
Power Taps
25 or 70.7 VRMS, see Note 1 below
¼, ½, 1, and 2 W
Fire Alarm 400 to 4000 Hz
General Signaling 125 to 12 kHz
Frequency Response
Wattage Tap
¼W
½W
1W
2W
UL Listed Models, Reverberant Chamber Test, per UL 1480
76 dBA
79 dBA
82 dBA
85 dBA
Wall Mount Models 4906-9151 and 4906-9153,
Anechoic Chamber Test, per ULC-S541
77 dBA
80 dBA
83 dBA
86 dBA*
25 VRMS Input
81.6 dBA
84.3 dBA
87.1 dBA*
89.7 dBA*
70.7 VRMS Input
80.9 dBA
84.1 dBA
87.3 dBA*
90.2 dBA*
Speaker Output
Ratings @ 10 ft (3 m)
(see Note 1 below)
Ceiling Mount Model 4906-9157,
per ULC-S541
* NOTE: Select taps as indicated to satisfy the ULC fire alarm applications requirement of 85 dBA minimum
Polar Dispersion Reference (per ULC-S541
Anechoic Chamber Testing)
Attenuation
Angle
Attenuation
Angle
-3 dB
+/- 30° off-axis
-6 dB
+/- 55° off-axis
Strobe Specifications
Rated Voltage Range
Flash Rate and Synchronized NAC Loading
Regulated 24 VDC; 16 VDC to 33 VDC, see Note 2 below
1 Hz; with up to 35 synchronized strobes maximum per NAC
7 ¼” H x 5” W x 2 ⅝” D (184 mm x 127 mm x 67 mm)
Housing Dimensions (with lens)
Wall
Mount
Maximum RMS Current Rating per
Strobe Setting
18 VDC
Reference RMS Currents at
other voltages
24 VDC
30 cd
75 cd
110 cd
94 mA
186 mA
252 mA
53 mA
40 mA
84 mA
63 mA
165 mA
124 mA
224 mA
168 mA
Speaker housing = 7 ½” (191 mm) diameter, ½” deep (13 mm); lens protrusion above
speaker housing = 2 ⅝” (67 mm); depth into box = 2 ¾” (70 mm)
Housing Dimensions
Ceiling
Mount
15 cd
60 mA
Maximum RMS Current Rating per
Strobe Setting
18 VDC
Reference RMS Currents at
other voltages
24 VDC
15 cd
30 cd
75 cd
110 cd
75 mA
125 mA
233 mA
316 mA
67 mA
50 mA
111 mA
83 mA
207 mA
155 mA
281 mA
211 mA
NOTES:
1. Speakers are for connection to conventional fire alarm audio circuits. Anechoic speaker output ratings are typically more representative
of actual installed sound output.
2.
The maximum RMS strobe current listed is the device nameplate rating. Strobe designs are constant wattage and the maximum RMS
current rating occurs at the lowest allowable operating voltage. (RMS is root mean square and refers to the effective value of a varying
current waveform.)
Speaker Directional Characteristics Reference
Sound Pressure Level (dB) at 10 ft (3 m)
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Angular Displacement (Degrees) on Horizontal Axis
2kHz
3
4kHz
S4906-0003-8 5/2014
Ceiling Mount S/V Installation Reference and Tile Bridge Dimensions
2905-9946
Tile Bridge
1/2" (13 mm)
4" (102 mm) square, 1-1/2"
(38 mm) deep box with 1-1/2"
extension (by others)
0.024" thick sheet
metal, folded with
1/2" lip each side
3-3/4" (95 mm) square
cutout, centered on plate
Wiring input terminals and
speaker tap selection are
accessible from rear of
speaker housing
23-11/16"
(602 mm)
1/4" diameter (6
mm) holes, 4 places
110
75
30
15
Strobe intensity
viewing slot
6-11/16"
(170 mm)
Intensity selection plug,
accessible only from rear of lens
housing; factory setting is 15 cd
13-3/8" (340 mm)
Wall Mount Installation Reference
Mounting to 2975-9145 Box
Standard Electrical Box Mounting
4" (102 mm) square box, 1-1/2"
(38 mm) deep, with a 4" square box
extension, 1-1/2" deep, by others
2975-9145 Box
IMPORTANT ! INSTALLATION
MOUNTING HEIGHT REFERENCE
2975-9145
box outline
4" square box outline
CL
82" (2.1 m)
minimum
4905-9903
Adapter Plate
4" (102 mm)
1-1/2" (38 mm)
NFPA 72 requires that the
78-1/2" (2 m) entire lens be not less than
minimum
80" and not greater than 96"
above the finished floor.
Wiring input terminals and
speaker tap selection are
accessible from rear
Surface Mounting Reference
Showing Optional Wire Guard
Surface mount conduit and
box shown for reference
Speaker assembly
Strobe assembly
4" (102 mm) square box
profile, 1-1/2" (38 mm)
deep with 1-1/2" extension
Removable cover
(tool required)
Transparent
housing and
lens assembly
Intensity selection
plug, accessible only
from rear of housing;
factory setting is 15 cd
Strobe intensity
viewing slot
110
75
30
15
Optional 4905-9998
Wire Guard
S/V
Surface mount adapter skirt, 3-3/16" (81 mm)
deep, required for this mounting method:
4905-9946, Red; 4905-9947, White (conduit
knockouts are provided on all four sides)
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.simplex-fire.com
S4906-0003-8 5/2014
© 2014 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
TrueAlert Multi-Candela Notification Appliances
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
Visible Notification Appliances with Synchronized Flash;
Non-Addressable, SmartSync Operation Compatible
Features
Visible only (V/O) 24 VDC notification appliances
with high output xenon strobe, available for wall
or ceiling mount:
 Intensity is selectable as 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela with
visible selection jumper secured behind strobe housing
 Operation is compatible with ADA requirements (refer
to important installation information on page 3)
 Polarized input allows connection to compatible reverse
polarity, supervised notification appliance circuit (NAC)
 Regulated circuit design ensures consistent flash output
and provides controlled inrush current
 Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic
housings are available in red or white with clear lens
 Listed to UL 1971 and ULC S526
Wall Mount Strobes
Strobes provide synchronized flash for use with:
 Simplex® fire alarm control panels with NACs selected
to provide strobe synchronization or SmartSync
two-wire control
 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders
 Separate strobe Synchronization Modules that are
available for Class B or Class A operation
 Separate SmartSync Control Modules (SCMs) that
provide Class B or Class A output from conventional
NAC inputs
Strobe housings provides flexible, easy, and
convenient semi-flush or surface wall mounting:
 Rear of housing does not extend into box
 Wall mount strobes easily mount to single gang, double
gang, or 4-inch square outlet box
 Ceiling mount strobes mount to single gang boxes
Wall mount strobe features:
 Wiring terminals are accessible from the front of the
housing providing easy access for installation,
inspection, and testing
 Covers are available separately to convert housing color
Optional adapters and wire guards:
 Wall mount strobe adapters are available to cover
surface mounted electrical boxes and to adapt to
Simplex 2975-9145 boxes
 UL listed red wire guards are available for wall or
ceiling mount strobes*
*
Refer to page 2 for guard listing. This product has been approved by the California State
Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety
Code. See CSFM Listing 7125-0026:316 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning
material presented in this document. Refer to page 2 for listing status of wire guards.
Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the
latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of
Tyco Fire Protection Products.
Ceiling Mount Strobes
Description
Multi-Candela TrueAlert synchronized strobes
provide convenient installation to standard electrical
boxes. The enclosure designs are both impact and vandal
resistant and provide a convenient strobe intensity
selection. Since each model can be selected for intensity
output, on-site model inventory is minimized and changes
encountered during construction can be easily
accommodated.
Wall mount strobe housings are a one-piece assembly
(including lens) that mounts to a single or double gang, or
4” square standard electrical box. The cover can be
quickly removed (a tool is required) and covers are
available separately for color conversion.
Ceiling mount strobes install using standard single gang
electrical boxes. Color choice is determined by model
number.
Strobe Intensity Selection
During installation, a selection plug at the back of the
housing determines the desired strobe intensity. An
attached flag with black letters on a highly visible yellow
background allows the selected intensity to be seen at the
side of the strobe lens.
Strobe Application Reference
Proper selection of visible notification is dependent on
occupancy, location, local codes, and proper applications
of: the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72), ANSI
A117.1; the appropriate model building code: BOCA,
ICBO, or SBCCI; and the application guidelines of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
S4906-0001-5 11/2014
Synchronized Strobes
SmartSync Control Sources
Multiple Strobes. When multiple strobes and their
reflections can be seen from one location, synchronized
flashes reduce the probability of photo-sensitive reactions
as well as the annoyance and possible distraction of
random flashing. These multi-candela strobes are
synchronized over a two-wire circuit when connected to
compatible NACs, to compatible Synchronized Flash
Modules, or to SmartSync Control Modules.
SmartSync two-wire control is available from:
 4006, 4007ES Hybrid, 4008, 4010, 4010ES, 4100ES,
and 4100U Fire Alarm Control Panels (refer to
individual product data sheets for more information)
 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders (refer to data sheet
S4009-0002)
 SmartSync Control Module (SCM) Model 4905-9938
(refer to data sheet S4905-0003)
SmartSync Two-Wire Control
Additional SmartSync compatible notification
appliances include separate horns and combination
horn/strobe notification appliances.
Some applications desire the audible notification
appliances to be capable of being silenced before the
alarm condition is reset (on-until-silenced) while the
visible notification appliances are kept activated until the
alarm condition is reset (on-until-reset). SmartSync
operation mode provides this function using a single
circuit (two-wire operation).
Product Selection
Multi-Candela Visible Notification Appliances (Strobes)
Model
4906-9101
4906-9103
4906-9102
4906-9104
Mounting
Housing Color
“FIRE” Lettering
Wall
Red
White
White
Red
Ceiling
Red
White
White
Red
Description
Multi-candela strobe with intensity selectable as:
15, 30, 75, or 110 candela; synchronized flash rate;
SmartSync two-wire control compatible
Wall Mount Strobe Adapters
Model
Description
Dimensions
4905-9937
Red
4905-9940
White
4905-9931
Red Adapter Plate for mounting to Simplex 2975-9145 box (typically for
retrofit, may be mounted vertical or horizontal)
2975-9145
Red Mounting Box, requires Adapter Plate 4905-9931
Surface Mount Adapter Skirt; use to cover 1-1/2” (38 mm)
deep surface mounted boxes
5-3/8” H x 5-1/4” W x 1-5/8” D
(136 mm x 133 mm x 41 mm)
Total depth with strobe = 4-3/8” (111 mm)
8-5/16” x 5-3/4” x 0.060” Thick
(211 mm x 146 mm x 1.5 mm)
7-7/8" x 5-1/8" x 2-3/4" D
(200 mm x 130 mm x 70 mm)
Ceiling Mount Strobe Adapter
Model
4905-9910
Description
Dimensions
Surface Mount Adapter Plate; zinc plated; required for mounting to
handy box; not needed when using 4905-9926 guard
4-7/8” x 3-1/8” x 0.060” D
(124 mm x 79 mm x 1.5)
Synchronization Modules (refer to data sheet S4905-0003 for additional information)
Model
Description
Dimensions
Synchronized Flash Module; epoxy encapsulated with
in/out 18 AWG (0.82 mm2) wire leads, rated for 2 A NAC,
requires 5 mA for power
4905-9914
Class B
4905-9922
Class A
4905-9938
SmartSync Control Module with Class B or Class A output; mounts in
4” (102 mm) square box
1-3/8” x 2-7/16” x 13/16”
(35 mm x 62 mm x 20 mm)
4” x 4-1/8” x 1-1/4” D
(102 mm x 105 mm x 32 mm)
Replacement Covers and Guards
Model
Description
Dimensions
4905-9992
Red cover with white “FIRE” lettering
4905-9993
White cover with red “FIRE” lettering
4905-9961*
Wall mount
4905-9926*
Ceiling mount
For Wall mount strobes
Red wire guard with mounting plate, compatible with
semi-flush or surface mounted boxes
5-1/8” H x 5” W x 1-1/2” D
(130 mm x 127 mm x 38 mm)
6-1/16” H x 6-1/16” W x 3-1/8” D
(154 mm x 154 mm x 79 mm)
6-1/8” x 4-3/8” x 2-7/8” deep
(156 mm x 111 mm x 73 mm)
* UL listed by Space Age Electronics Inc.
2
S4906-0001-5 11/2014
Strobe Specifications
Wall Mount or Ceiling Mount, Common Specifications
Rated Voltage Range
Flash Rate
Synchronized NAC Loading
Temperature Range
Humidity Range
Regulated 24 VDC; see Note 1 below
1 Hz
Up to 35 synchronized strobes maximum per NAC
32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
10% to 93%, non-condensing at 100° F (38° C)
Terminal blocks for 18 AWG to 12 AWG (0.82 mm2 to 3.31 mm2); two wires per
terminal for in/out wiring
Connections
Housing Dimensions (with lens)
Wall
Mount
5-1/8” H x 5” W x 2-3/4” D (130 mm x 127 mm x 70 mm)
15 cd
30 cd
75 cd
60 mA
94 mA
186 mA
Maximum RMS Current Rating per
Strobe Setting (see Note 2 below)
Reference RMS Currents
at other voltages
18 VDC
24 VDC
Housing Dimensions (with lens)
Ceiling
Mount
Reference RMS Currents
at other voltages
53 mA
84 mA
165 mA
224 mA
40 mA
63 mA
124 mA
168 mA
4-3/4” L x 2-5/16” W x 2-5/8” D (121 mm x 75 mm x 67 mm)
15 cd
30 cd
75 cd
75 mA
125 mA
233 mA
Maximum RMS Current Rating per
Strobe Setting (see Note 2 below)
18 VDC
24 VDC
110 cd
252 mA
67 mA
50 mA
111 mA
83 mA
207 mA
155 mA
110 cd
316 mA
281 mA
211 mA
NOTES:
1. “Regulated 24 VDC” refers to the voltage range of 16 to 33 VDC per UL Standard 1971, Signaling Devices for the Hearing
Impaired. This voltage range is the absolute operating range. Operation outside of this range may cause permanent damage to
the strobe. Please note that 16 VDC is the lowest operating voltage that is allowed at the last appliance on the NAC under worst
case conditions.
2. The maximum RMS current listed is the device nameplate rating. Strobe designs are constant wattage and the maximum RMS
current rating occurs at the lowest allowable operating voltage. (RMS is root mean square and refers to the effective value of a
varying current waveform.)
Installation Reference, Surface or Semi-Flush Wall Mounting
Mounting is compatible with
single gang, double gang, and
4" (102 mm) square boxes,
1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, by others
IMPORTANT! WALL MOUNT
INSTALLATION HEIGHT REFERENCE
Bottom of lens
is either even
with, or slightly
above bottom
of compatible
boxes
Wiring access hole
2
Wiring terminals
1
Mounting Holes:
4" square (4)
Single gang (2)
Double gang (3)
Transparent housing
and lens assembly
80" (2.03 m)
minimum
110
75
30
15
Intensity selection
plug, accessible only
from rear of housing;
factory setting is 15 cd
Removable cover
(tool required)
NFPA 72 requires
that the entire lens
be not less than
a
80" and not greater
than 96" above the
finished floor
Electrical
box outline
Strobe intensity
viewing slot
3
S4906-0001-5 11/2014
Ceiling Mount Strobe Installation Reference
Single gang box (Wiremold
V5744S) 2-1/4" (57 mm)
deep, supplied by others
Handy box, 1-1/2" ( 38 mm) deep
(RACO 650 or equal) or single gang
box, 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep (RACO 519
or equal) supplied by others
Also can be attached to boxes
mounted to drop ceiling T-bar with
clips (ERICO No. 512 or equal)
4905-9910 Adapter Plate, required for
surface mount with handy box unless
using the 4905-9926 wire guard
Ceiling mount strobe
Optional 4905-9926 wire guard
with mounting plate
110
75
30
15
Strobe intensity
viewing slot
Intensity selection plug,
accessible only from rear of lens
housing; factory setting is 15 cd
Wall Mount Installation Reference; Adapter Plate, Guard, and Adapter Skirt
2975-9145 Box
Surface Mounting Reference
with Optional Adapter Skirt
and Optional Wire Guard
Surface mount conduit and
box shown for reference
4" (102 mm) square
box profile, 1-1/2"
(38 mm) deep
Optional
4905-9961
Wire Guard
Strobe
4905-9931 Adapter Plate
4905-9931 Adapter Plate
4905-9961 Optional Wire Guard
(shown here for reference only,
can be used on other mounting options)
Optional Surface Mount Adapter Skirt,
1-1/2" deep: 4905-9937, Red;
4905-9940, White (conduit knockouts
are provided on all four sides)
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.simplex-fire.com
S4906-0001-5 11/2014
© 2014 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
System Accessories
4081 Series End-of-Line
Resistor Harnesses
UL Listed*
Features
For use as Class B end-of-line resistor:
x Connect these resistor harnesses where
end-of-line resistors are required at remote
locations to monitor wiring continuity
x Refer to specific circuit specifications for
end-of-line resistor requirements
UL Listed to Standard 864
Product Selection
~ 9-1/2"
(241 mm)
Model
Reference
Number
Description**
4081-9001
733-892
2.2 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9002
733-893
3.3 k:, 1 W
4081-9003
733-896
4.7 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9004
733-886
6.8 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9005
733-984
1.8 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9006
733-890
560 :, 1 W
4081-9007
733-891
1.2 k:, 1 W
4081-9008
733-894
10 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9009
733-912
20 :, 1 W
4081-9010
733-973
1 k:, 1 W
4081-9011
733-974
100 :, 1/2 W
4081-9012
733-985
22 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9013
734-086
4.99 k:, 1/2 W, ± 1%
4081-9014
734-092
2.4 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9015
734-093
1.5 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9016
734-149
150 k:, 1/2 W
4081-9017
734-171
3.9 k:, 1 W
4081-9018
734-168
10 k:, 1 W
** ± 5% tolerance except as noted.
Typical 4081 Series Resistor Harness Assembly
(full size except for lead length)
Specifications
Overall Length
Approximately 9-1/2” (241 mm)
Wire Length
7” (178 mm) ± 1” (25 mm)
Wire Size
18 AWG (0.82 mm2)
Insulation
600 V, black
Leads
Stripped 0.5” (13 mm); tinned
Resistor
Attachment
Resistor leads are crimped to wires
and covered with heat shrink tubing
* This product was not approved by ULC, FM, MEA (NYC), or CSFM as of document revision
date. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for
the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property
of Tyco Safety Products Westminster.
S4081-0003 7/2004
Tyco, Simplex, and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Services AG or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Tyco Safety Products Westminster • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.tycosafetyproducts-usa-wm.com
S4081-0003 7/2004
© 2004 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
4009 Installation Instructions
MC12-5-180
4009 IDNet™ NAC Extender
Installation Instructions
Introduction
The 4009-9201 (120VAC) or 4009-9301 (220/240VAC) IDNet™ Notification Appliance Circuit
(NAC) Extender is a self-contained adjunct panel for use with Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panels
(FACPs). The base version of the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender (4009 IDNet) is a single-board
system consisting of four NACs, a power supply and charger, an IDNet slave interface, and two
conventional NAC inputs for hardwired control (not applicable to the 4009 IDNet when used as an
IDNet device). Option cards are available to provide the following additional capabilities:
•
4009-9808 Class A Adapter Option Card -- allows fault tolerance in the case of open circuit
wiring faults on the NACs.
•
4009-9807 NAC Option Card -- adds four conventional Notification Appliance Circuits.
•
4009-9809 IDNet Repeater Option Card -- regenerates the IDNet signal and provides a power and
distance boost for the IDNet channel. When IDNet Repeater Option Card is used, the fiber option
is not available to the 4009 IDNet.
•
4009-9810 (Class B)/4009-9811 (Class A) Fiber Optic Receiver -- receives IDNet communication
over a fiber optic channel and regenerates the IDNet signal. The fiber option is used with the
4090-9105 (Class B)/4090-9107 (Class A) Fiber Optic Transmitter to form an IDNet fiber link.
Certain Notificaion Appliances are UL rated ‘Special Applications’ compatible with the 4009 IDNet;
this rating enables advanced operation capabilities and higher power capacity. Some Special
Applications compatible appliances are identified in this document. See 842-068, ‘4009 IDNet Field
Wiring Diagram’, for the complete list of compatible appliances and accessories.
In this Publication
This publication discusses the following topics:
Topic
See Page #
Cautions and Warnings
2
Overview
3
Identifying Optional Equipment
7
Configuring and Wiring IDNet Operation
9
Hardwired Operation -- Conventional A/Vs
13
Hardwired Operation -- SmartSync Appliances
18
System Installation
23
© 2005 Tyco Safety Products Westminster, Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA
All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date, and are subject to change without notice.
Tyco, Simplex, and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Services AG or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or other countries.
574-181
Rev. E
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation
manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated
equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon
unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If
damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized Simplex
representative.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal
adjustments or repairs. Qualified Simplex representatives should perform servicing.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
•
Ground yourself before opening or installing.
•
Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
EYE SAFETY HAZARD - Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of
this device may exceed eye safety limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other
focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are
designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference
in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper
system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming
operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change,
addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to
system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a
change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently
affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a
maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
2
Overview
Introduction
The 4009 IDNet provides Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs) with additional notification
appliance circuit (NAC) capacity, flexible operation modes, and a power-limited design.
The standard version includes four, Class B (Style Y) NACs, each rated as either special
applications or REGULATED 24 DC per Field Wiring Drawing 842-068. The NACS are
compatible with standard 24 VDC notification appliances, and can be configured to provide
synchronization for Simplex visible notification strobe flashes. NACS are also capable of
controlling TrueAlert™ non-addressable notification appliances operating with SmartSync™
two-wire control mode.
F
I
R
E
F
I
R
E
F
I
R
E
F
I
R
E
Up to 8 NACs
4009 IDNet
NAC Extender
CAUTION
DISCONNECT
POWER
BEFORE
SERVICING
4009 IDNet NAC EXTENDER
TM
Optional IDNet
Channel Repeater
FIRE
ZONE PWR +
1 + 24V
ZONE PWR 2 0V
3 +IDNET IDC +
4 - IDNET IDC -
ALARM
1
PULL DOWN
5
6
7
8
5
2
6
3
SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO.
4
DATE CODE:
7
4090-9101
MONITOR ZAM, CLASS B
INSTAL. INSTR. 574-183
8
1
2-Wire IDNet
Communications or
Fiber Optic IDNet
Communications or
NAC Control
FIRE ALARM
CONTROL
** SYSTEM IS NORMAL **
12:02:15pm
Mon 9-Feb-98
FIRE
ALARM
ALARM
ACK
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SUPERVISORY
TROUBLE
SUPV
ACK
TROUBLE
ACK
ALARM
SILENCED
AC
POWER
ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
CAUTION
DISCONNECT
POWER BEFORE
SERVICING
IDNet Fiber
Optic Transmitter
4010 Fire Alarm
Control Panel
Fire Alarm Control Panel with
Conventional NACs
4009 IDNet NAC Extender Connection Reference Drawing
Input control from the host panel can be from either:
•
IDNet addressable communications from a Simplex model 4010 or 4100U Fire Alarm Control
Panel. IDNet communications provide status monitoring and individual NAC control using a
single address per 4009 IDNet NAC Extender, and support for IDNet “Device Level” Earth
fault location.
•
Hardwired from one or two conventional 24 VDC NACs, providing multiple output control
options.
Continued on next page
3
Overview, Continued
4009 IDNet System
Board
Figure 1 identifies the major components of the 4009 IDNet system board. Be aware that the
brownout and charger are factory adjustments.
Note: Do not make field adjustments to the brownout and charger components.
SW1
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH
SW2 SOFTWARE
ADDRESS/CONFIGURATIO
N DIPSWITCH
TB4
IDNet CONTROL INTERFACE
TB1, TB2
HARDWIRED NAC
(NAC 1-4)
P4
4-CIRCUIT NAC
OPTION CARD
INTERFACE
P1 AND P2
CLASS A ADAPTER
INTERFACE
LED(s) 1-4
NAC STATUS
INDICATORS
LED(s) 5-8
SYSTEM TROUBLE
INDICATORS
TB6
AUXILARY POWER
OUTPUT
(1 AMP AVAILABLE)
LED 9
AC POWER
INDICATOR
BROWNOUT
ADJUSTMENT
(SEE NOTE)
P6
IDNet REPEATER
CARD or FIBER
RECEIVER CARD
TB5
NAC CONTROL
INTERFACE
(HOST NAC IN)
CHARGER
(SEE NOTE)
P7 SIGNAL POWER TO
NAC OPTION CARD
P8 (ORANGE WIRE)
P9 (YELLOW WIRE)
CHARGER INPUTS
FROM TRANSF0RMER
TB7
BATTERY
TERMINAL
H1 (RED WIRE), H2 (BLACK WIRE)
MAIN POWER INPUTS FROM
BRIDGE RECTIFIER
Figure 1. 4009 IDNet System Board
NAC (Notification
Appliance Circuit)
Outputs
The 4009 IDNet system board provides 4 hardwired, Class B, reverse polarity Notification
Appliance Circuits. Each circuit has one polarity for supervision state and the opposite polarity
for alarm state. Field wiring terminations are provided for 12 AWG - 18 AWG wire. Refer to the
842-068 Field Wiring Diagram for complete wiring, compatible appliances, current, and line
distance information.
Continued on next page
4
Overview, Continued
NAC (Notification
Appliance Circuit)
Outputs, (continued)
The notification circuits use a 10k end-of-line resistor for supervision. The circuit is monitored
for short and open circuit line faults when in the standby (not energized) condition. In the event of
a short circuit, the 4009 IDNet will not activate the NAC while the short circuit fault is present.
During coded signal operation, the 4009 IDNet checks for a short during each “off”, and holds the
circuit off if a short is detected. Short and open circuit faults are reported to the host panel via the
command channel (either IDNet or hardwired, depending on configuration) and can be identified
by a blinking trouble LED on the 4009 IDNet during supervisory state.
The NACs are configurable as “Class A” circuits with the addition of an option card that plugs
onto the base board. The option card also provides the additional field wiring terminations needed
for Class A. The 4009 IDNet monitors for insertion of the Class A Option Card.
In addition, when configured as an IDNet peripheral, each circuit can be independently controlled
and each has the ability, under software control, to disconnect its supervision, allowing Earth fault
isolation (this operation is also performed automatically as part of the power-up sequence). The
4009-9808 Class A Option Card is not compatible with two-wire SmartSync appliances.
Certain Notification Appliances are UL rated ‘Special Applications’ compatible with the 4009
IDNet; this rating enables advanced operation capabilities and higher power capacity. Some
Special Applications compatible appliances are identified in this document. See 842-068, ‘4009
IDNet Field Wiring Diagram’, for the complete list of compatible appliances and accessories.
Battery Charger
The battery charger charges lead acid batteries up to 18AH. Batteries are supervised for
low/missing battery and depleted battery. The battery charger output remains disabled until a
battery is sensed.
Battery Cutout
Module (Canadian
Version only)
The Canadian version of the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender includes a low battery cutout module and
harness. The factory installed battery cutout module replaces the standard (US version) battery
harness. The module disconnects the batteries if the terminal voltage drops below 19.3VDC
during battery standby operation. Connection to the batteries is restored on resumption of AC
power.
DIP Switch SW1 -Hardware
Configuration
The hardware configuration switch is located at the top edge of the system board (see Figure 1). It
has two functions:
DIP Switch SW2 -IDNet
Address/Hardwired
Configuration
•
Switches 1 through 7 identify the optional equipment installed on the 4009 IDNet. A trouble
condition is reported to the FACP if hardware is configured, but not present or hardware is
present but not configured.
•
Switch 8 indicates whether the unit is communicating with the host panel via IDNet (4010
only) or over a hardwired interface.
The Software Address/Configuration Switch (SW2) is an 8-position DIP switch located at the top
edge of the system board. It has two functions:
•
When the 4009 IDNet is operating as an addressable IDNet peripheral, this switch sets the
IDNet address to which the 4009 IDNet responds. Each 4009 IDNet has a unique address (1
through 250).
•
When operating as a 4009 non-addressable NAC Extender (conventional or “hardwired” 4009
mode), this switch (SW2) configures the operation of the output NACs, based on the state of
the two NAC control inputs.
Continued on next page
5
4009 IDNet NAC Extender, Continued
NAC Status
Indicators (LED(s) 14)
Each output NAC has a yellow LED (see Figure 1 for location of LEDs) to indicate a trouble
condition or the active state of that NAC. The condition/state for the NACs are as follows:
•
•
•
•
System Trouble
Indicators (LED(s) 58)
IN ALARM = NAC (1-4) LED “ON”
IN SUPERVISORY = LED “OFF” (OK)
SLOW FLASH (1 flash per second) = SHORT
FAST FLASH (2 flashes per second) = OPEN
The system trouble indicators consist of a bank of four yellow LEDs (see Figure 1 for location of
LEDs) that are used to signify various trouble conditions within the 4009 IDNet system. Only one
trouble at a time is indicated, highest trouble state indicated first. When that trouble clears,
additional troubles, if present, will be indicated. Table 1 lists system troubles from highest trouble
state (invalid configuration) to lowest trouble state (Normal).
Table 1. System Trouble LED Indicators
AC Power Indicator
(LED 9)
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
TROUBLE DESCRIPTION
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Invalid Configuration
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Diagnostic Test Fail
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Software Failure
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Running on Depleted Battery
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Low/Missing Battery
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Earth Ground Fault
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
NAC Trouble
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
AC Power Loss
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Normal
This green LED indicates that AC power is present and is being used as the 4009 IDNet power
source. The 4009 IDNet is switched to batteries whenever the green LED is “OFF”.
CAUTION: The green AC LED indicates “Good AC Power”. In the event of a
brownout condition, the unit will switch to battery power but lethal
voltages may still exist. DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE SERVICING.
6
Identifying Optional Equipment
Overview
Setting Switches
SW1-1 through
SW1-7
The 4009 IDNet supports the optional add-on cards described in this section. Optional hardware
must be identified with DIP Switch SW1-1 through SW1-7, as described in this section. Option
modules for the 4009 IDNet include the following:
•
Class A Adapter Option Card (565-789). The Class A Adapter Option Cards (see
Figure 1) plug into connectors P1 and P2 located on the 4009 IDNet system Board (see Figure
1). One Class A Adapter Option Card provides Class A/Style Z functionality on two NACs.
Refer to the 4009-9808 Class A Adapter Option Card Installation Instructions 574-326 for
detailed information on installing this option card. Note that this card is not directly
compatible with two-wire SmartSync appliances; use the 4905-9938 SCM for Class A NAC
operation. .
•
NAC Option Card (565-828). The 4-ciruit NAC Card is an option card for the 4009
IDNet. Refer to the 4009-9807 NAC Option Card Installation Instructions 574-325 for
detailed information on installing this option card. The NAC option card provides four
additional hardwired NACs to the 4009 IDNet base configuration of four NACs. Each of the
four NACs on the NAC option card is functionally equivalent to the NACs on the 4009
system board, except that the option NACs are rated at 1.5 amps. The NAC option card plugs
into connector P4 (see Figure 1) on the 4009 system board. The NACs are configurable as
“Class A” circuits with the addition of Class A Adapter Option Cards that connect to the two
Class A adapter connector interfaces located on the NAC Option Card. The NAC Option Card
signal power for the four NACs is received from 4009 IDNet system board connector P7 (see
Figure 1) using wiring harness 733-972.
•
IDNet Repeater Option Card (565-773). The IDNet Repeater Card is an option card for
the 4009 IDNet. The IDNet Repeater Option Card takes the IDNet signal that the 4009 IDNet
receiver has received, and retransmits it on its output side at host panel IDNet levels. The
IDNet Repeater Option Card is used in IDNet mode only (SW1/Position 8 OFF). Refer to the
4009 IDNet Repeater Option Card Installation Instructions 574-327 for detailed information
on installing this option card. The IDNet Repeater Option Card connects via a 14-pin header
to 4009 IDNet system board connector P6 (see Figure 1).
•
Fiber Receiver Card (565-903 Class B or 565-902 Class A) and Fiber Transmitter
Card (565-901 Class B or 565-900 Class A). The IDNet Fiber Transmitter and 4009
IDNet Fiber Receiver work together to form a fiber optic link from an IDNet run to a remote
4009 Addressable NAC. Refer to the 4009 Fiber Optic Link Installation Instructions 574-182
for detailed information on installing this option card. The primary intent of the fiber optic
link is to allow remote buildings (within 3,000ft.) to be connected to the IDNet channel, but to
minimize susceptibility to electrical transients. The fiber optic link is made up of these two
boards and the optical fibers. The 4009 IDNet Fiber Receiver Card receives power from, and
communicates with the 4009 IDNet through 14-pin connector P6 (on the 4009 IDNet system
board). The fiber receiver regenerates the IDNet channel for connection to other IDNet
peripherals at the remote site. The IDNet Fiber Transmitter is located on the FACP end of the
fiber optic link and receives power (24VDC) from the host panel.
The 8-position Hardware Configuration DIP Switch (SW1) is used to configure what hardware is
present and supervised by the 4009 IDNet. The hardware configuration switch is located at the
top edge of the system board (see Figure 1). The “ON” position of the switch indicates which
associated hardware is installed on the 4009 IDNet. A trouble condition is reported to the FACP if
hardware is configured, but not present or hardware is present but not configured.
Set switches 1-1 through 1-7, as shown in Table 2, to identify the optional equipment installed on
the 4009 IDNet.
Continued on next page
7
Identifying Optional Equipment, Continued
Setting Switches
SW1-1 through
SW1-7, (continued)
Table 2. Hardware Configuration Switch SW1
Switch
SW1-1*
Configured Hardware “ON” = Present
Set to ON if Class A Adapter for NAC 1 & 2. Set to Off if no option
card is present.
SW1-2*
Set to ON if Class A Adapter for NAC 3 & 4. Set to Off if no option
card is present.
SW1-3*
Set to ON if Class A Adapter for NAC 5 & 6. Set to Off if no option
card is present.
SW1-4*
Set to ON if Class A Adapter for NAC 7 & 8. Set to Off if no option
card is present.
SW1-5
Set to ON if IDNet Repeater/Fiber card is used. Set to Off if no option
card is present.
SW1-6
Not Used
SW1-7
Set to ON if a NAC Option Card is used. Set to Off if no option card
is present.
SW1-8
Set to ON if 4009 IDNet is hardwired to host panel. Set to OFF if
4009 IDNet connects to 4010 via IDNet channel.
* Not applicable for two-wire SmartSync Notification Appliances
8
Configuring and Wiring IDNet Operation
Overview
This section describes the configuration and wiring process required to setup the 4009 IDNet for IDNet
communications.
Set Switch SW1-8 to
OFF
Dip Switch SW1/Position 8 controls how the 4009 IDNet receives it commands. This switch must be
set to the OFF position for IDNet communications
Set IDNet Address
Using Switch SW2
The Software Address/Configuration Switch (SW2) is an 8-position DIP switch, located at the top
edge of the system board. When the 4009 IDNet is operating as a addressable IDNet peripheral, this
switch sets the IDNet address to which the 4009 IDNet responds.
Each 4009 IDNet must have a unique address (1 through 250). This address is assigned by the 4010 or
4100U programmer and must be set on the hardware also. When setting the address, DIP switch
position 1 is the least significant bit (LSB) and position 8 is the most significant bit (MSB). Set the
4009’s IDNet address using the following figure as reference. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set
the switches.
Note: DIP switch in “1” position is “ON” while DIP switch in “0” position is “OFF”.
MSB
LSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIPSWITCH IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.
8
ON
1 = ON
OFF
0 = OFF
DIP SWITCHES 5 THRU 8
0000
1000
0100
1100
0010
1010
0110
1110
0001
1001
0101
1101
0011
1011
0111
1111
0000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1000
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
0100
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1100
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
0010
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
1010
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
0110
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
1110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
0001
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
1001
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
0101
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
1101
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
0011
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
1011
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
0111
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
1111
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Figure 2. 4009 IDNet (IDNet Addressable Mode) Address Chart
Continued on next page
9
Configuring and Wiring IDNet Operation, Continued
Class A and B
Wiring – TrueAlert
Non Addressable
and Rectangular
A/Vs
This section describes wiring Class A or Class B circuits for the following TrueAlert Non-Addressable
A/Vs and older style, rectangular A/Vs.
•
TrueAlert Non-Addressable A/Vs with the following PIDs: 4903-9425, -9426, -9427, -9431,
-9432, -9433. See 574-721 for device wiring/configuration
•
Older Style, Rectangular A/Vs with PIDs ranging from 4903-9252 through 4903-9258.
Remove jumpers for 4-wire operation. See 579-237 for device wiring/configuration
If Class B circuit, then no Class A
board or return wires required.
Add a 10K EOLR to each circuit
at last appliance.
4100U
Install 4009-9808, Cass
A Card, for every pair of
used Class A NACs.
As many as five 4009A
modules may be connected
to the same IDNet circuit.
Certain visible appliances
(See 842-068) driven by
these 4009As can be
configured for operation
synchronized across all
output NACs.
SW2
SW1 switches
Note: For information on wiring TrueAlert Non-Addressable A/Vs with SmartSync, see the next
section.
Continued on next page
10
Configuring and Wiring IDNet Operation, Continued
Class B Wiring -TrueAlert NonAddressable A/Vs
with SmartSync
This section describes Class B wiring for the following TrueAlert Non-Addressable A/Vs with
SmartSync. See the next section for information on Class A wiring with these appliances.
Continued on next page
11
Configuring and Wiring IDNet Operation, Continued
Class A Wiring
TrueAlert NonAddressable A/Vs
with SmartSync
Class A wiring for TrueAlert Non-Addressable A/Vs with SmartSync requires the use of a 4905-9938
Sync Control Module (SCM). Wire this module as shown in the figure below. Note that 4009 NACs
must be configured for “ON steady” operation.
Refer to 574-719 for information on wiring additional SCMs.
12
Hardwired Operation -- Conventional A/Vs
Overview
This section describes:
•
•
•
Set Switch 1
Configuring the switches on the 4009 IDNet to define the operation of the 4009’s NACs.
Wiring conventional 4-wire NAC appliances to the NAC outputs of the 4009 IDNet. For
information on hardwired operation with SmartSync appliances, see “Hardwired Operation –
SmartSync Appliances,” later in this document.
Hardwiring the 4009 IDNet to the host panel. The term “hardwiring” refers to the dedicated
wiring connecting a set of NAC outputs on the host panel with the input terminals of the 4009
IDNet.
Set Switch 1 (SW1) as follows:
Set Switch 2 for
Conventional,
Hardwired A/V
Operation
•
Switches 1 through 7 on Switch 1 (SW1) are used to identify the optional hardware installed on
the 4009 IDNet. Refer back to “Identifying Optional Equipment,” earlier in this document for
specific information on setting these switches.
•
Switch 8 on SW1 determines whether the 4009 is communicating with the host via IDNet or over
a hardwired connection. This switch must be set to the ON position.
When operating as a 4009 Non-Addressable NAC Extender (4009 is hardwired to host panel), Switch
SW2 configures the operation of the 4009’s output NACS based on the state of its two NAC control
inputs. The following table summarizes the available choices.
Table 3. SW2 Settings
Switch #
Mode of Operation
Switches 1, 2, and 3 control which 4009 NAC outputs turn on and off when a specific input from the host panel turns on or off.
Several different options are available as shown below. Example. Setting 1, 2, and 3 to the OFF position causes NACs 1 and 2
(plus 5 and 6 if the option card is installed) to turn ON when hardwired Input 1 turns on and OFF when it turns off. If however, Input
2 activates, NACs 3 and 4 (plus 7 and 8 if the option card is installed) track the state of input 2.
1-3
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
When this Input
from Host Panel
Turns ON
Power is Applied
to these 4009
NAC Circuits
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
1 & 2 (5 & 6)
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
3 & 4 (7 & 8)
ON
OFF
OFF
1
1-4
ON
OFF
OFF
2
5-8
OFF
ON
OFF
1
1-8
OFF
ON
OFF
2
None
4
Set this switch to the ON position when using the switch on the A/Vs to synchronize the visuals. Set this switch to OFF when using
a Sync Cube on the host input to synchronize visuals. If neither method of synchronizing visuals is used (i.e., the visuals are
operating in free run mode), set this switch to the OFF position.
5
If switch 6 or 7 is set to OFF, this switch identifies the locally generated code pattern: ON = Marchtime OFF = Temporal.
6
When hardwired, Input 2 activates, the setting of this switch determines the source of the coding pattern used by the 4009’s NACs.
If this switch is set to ON, the 4009 NACs controlled by Input 2 track the coding pattern used by the host panel. If this switch is set
to OFF, the 4009 NACs controlled by Input 2 use the 4009’s locally generated coding pattern, which is determined by the setting of
Switch 5.
7
When hardwired, Input 1 activates, the setting of this switch determines the source of the coding pattern used by the 4009’s NACs.
If this switch is set to ON, the 4009 NACs controlled by Input 1 track the coding pattern used by the host panel. If this switch is set
to OFF, the 4009 NACs controlled by Input 1 use the 4009’s locally generated coding pattern, which is determined by the setting of
Switch 5.
8
Set to OFF for hardwired operation with Conventional, 4-wire A/Vs. Set to On for hardwired operation with SmartSync appliances,
and refer to “Hardwired Operation – SmartSync Appliances,” later in this document.
Continued on next page
13
Hardwired Operation -- Conventional A/Vs, Continued
Example: Wiring
Class A or B NAC
Operation --Single
Host Input
With this type of application, a single hardwired, input from one of the host panel’s NAC outputs
controls the 4009 IDNet’s output appliances. Important points to note for this application include:
•
Only a single 4009 IDNet can be used. Daisy-chaining additional 4009s is NOT allowed.
•
Single input control prevents individual control of the audibles and visuals. Audibles and visuals
both track the host input, turning on when the input is on and off when it is off. In the example
outlined below, Input 1 is Off on Reset, so both horns and visuals operate until a reset is
performed.
•
Although audibles cannot turn on and off separately from the visuals, it is possible to configure
marchtime or temporal audible signaling without affecting the operation of the visuals.
The following example illustrates the steps required to implement this type of signaling:
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Configure the host NAC connected to 4009 Input 1 as Off on Reset and use an ON Steady
signaling pattern.
Jumper Channel 1 to Channel 2, as shown in figure. This causes both audibles and visuals to
track the state of Input 1.
Wire Visual side of A/V to 4009 NAC1 and Audible side to 4009 NAC3.
If synchronized visuals are required, set the switch on the back of the A/V to the synchronized
setting and set Switch 2-4 on the 4009 to the ON position.
Set switches 1, 2, and 3 on SW2 to the OFF position. This configures the 4009 so that 4009
NACs 1 & 2 (Visuals) are associated with host Input 1 and 4009 NACs 3 & 4 (Audibles) are
associated with host Input 2.
Set Switch 7 on SW2 to the ON position. This causes the 4009 NACs associated with Input 1
(i.e., NACs 1 & 2/Visuals) to track the state of the host Input.
Set Switch 6 on SW2 to the OFF position. This causes the 4009 NACs associated with Input
2 (i.e., NACs 3 & 4/Audibles) to use the 4009’s locally generated coding pattern. To set the
locally generated coding pattern, set Switch 5 on SW2 to the appropriate setting (ON =
Marchtime; OFF = Temporal).
Continued on next page
14
Hardwired Operation -- Conventional A/Vs, Continued
Example: Wiring
Class A or B NAC
Operation --Single
Host Input,
(continued)
TrueAlert NonAddressable A/Vs
4903-9425, -9426,
-9427, -9431, -9432,
-9433. See 574-721
for device wiring.
If Class B, terminate at
last device on circuit
with two 10K EOL
resistors -- one for horn
circuit and one for
visual circuit
For Class A operation, add 4009-9808 Class
A Adapter Option Cards. Terminate wiring
from last device in circuit at adapter card as
shown.
Rectangular A/Vs:
4903-9252 through
4903-9258. Jumpers
must be removed for 4wire operation. See
Installation instruction
579-237 for device
wiring.
Both style of A/Vs
contain a switch that
allows the visuals to
operate in Free Run
mode (visuals not
syncronized) or Sync
Strobe mode (all
visuals flash
simultaneously). To
enable Sync Strobe
mode, you must set
dipswitch SW2-4 to
ON.
Configure host NAC to use
STEADY signaling pattern.
Program as Off on Reset or Off
on Silence as required.
For Class B operation, do not use adapter
cards. Add 10 K EOL resistors to last device
on circuit.
+ALM
-ALM
NAC
1
+ALM
-ALM
+ALM
-ALM
+ALM
+ALM
-ALM
-ALM
+ALM
-ALM
TB6
+
-
+ALM
6
1
SW1 SW2
-ALM
Settings for Switch 2 depend on
application. See Table 3 for
settings.
1
Off on
Reset
-ALM
Switches 1-1 through
1-7 identify optional hardware. See
“Identify Optional Hardware,“
earlier in this manual for
information on this switch.
2
+
+ALM
NAC NAC
4
3
NAC
2
1+
2+
345+
6+
78-
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
Note jumpers from Channel 1 to Channel
2. This causes both channels to turn ON
when Input 1 from host NAC turns ON.
TB5
Set switches 1, 2, and 3 on SW2 to the
OFF position to apply power to 4009 NACs
1&2 and NACs 3&4 each time this input
turns on.
Continued on next page
15
Hardwired Operation -- Conventional A/Vs, Continued
Example: Wiring
Class A or B NAC
Operation – Dual
Host Input
This section provides an example of hardwiring a 4009 IDNet to a host panel using two NAC inputs
from the host panel. Two NAC inputs from the host allows the host panel to separately control the
4009’s A/Vs, turning off the audibles on signal silence and turning off the visuals when a system reset
occurs.
•
•
•
Wire the visual side of the A/Vs to NAC1. Wire the audible side to NAC3. See Figure below.
Configure host NAC connected to Input 1 as Off on Reset. Configure the host NAC connected to
Input 2 as Off on Silence
Set switches 1, 2, and 3 on SW2 to the OFF position. This configures the 4009 so that 4009 NACs
1 & 2 (Visuals) are associated with host Input 1 and 4009 NACs 3 & 4 (Audibles) are associated
with host Input 2.
•
Set Switch 7 on SW2 to the ON position. This causes the 4009 NACs associated with Input 1
(i.e., NACs 1 & 2/Visuals) to track the state of the host Input.
•
Set Switch 6 on SW2 to the OFF position. This causes the 4009 NACs associated with Input 2
(i.e., NACs 3 & 4/Audibles) to use the 4009’s locally generated signaling pattern. To set the
locally generated signaling pattern, set Switch 5 on SW2 to the appropriate setting (ON =
Marchtime; OFF = Temporal).
Continued on next page
16
Hardwired Operation -- Conventional A/Vs, Continued
Example: Wiring
Class A or B NAC
Operation – Dual
Host Input,
(continued)
NOTE: Program 4100U &
40[10/08/06] panel NACs for
Sync Strobe mode, or use
4905-9914/9922 Sync Cube if
some other host FACP is
used.
Switches 1-1 through
1-7 identify optional
hardware. See “Identify
Optional Hardware,“
earlier in this manual for
information.
If only a single 4009 IDNet is
connected to the host, no
Sync Cube is required. Set
Switch 2-4 ON; otherwise, set
SW2-4 OFF.
Settings for Switch 2
depend on application.
See Table 3 for
settings.
For Class A operation,
add 4009-9808 Class A
Adapter Option Cards.
Terminate wiring from
last device in circuit at
adapter card as shown.
For Class B operation,
do not use adapter
cards. Add 10 K EOL
resistors to last device
on circuit.
Continued on next page
17
Hardwired Operation -- SmartSync Appliances
Overview
This section describes:
•
•
•
Set Switch 1
Set Switch 2 for
SmartSync
Operation
Configuring the switches on the 4009 IDNet to define the operation of the 4009’s NACs when
using hardwired SmartSync appliances.
Wiring two-wire SmartSync appliances to the NAC outputs of the 4009 IDNet.
Hardwiring the 4009 IDNet to the host panel. The term “hardwiring” refers to the dedicated
wiring connecting a set of NAC outputs on the host panel with the input terminals of the 4009
IDNet.
Set Switch 1 (SW1) as follows:
•
Switches 1 through 7 on Switch 1 (SW1) are used to identify the optional hardware installed on
the 4009 IDNet. Refer back to “Identifying Optional Equipment,” earlier in this document for
information on setting these switches.
•
Switch 8 on SW1 determines whether the 4009 is communicating with the host via IDNet or over
a hardwired connection. This switch must be set to the ON position.
Switch SW2 configures the operation of the 4009’s output NACS based on the state of its two NAC
control inputs. The following are valid settings for SmartSync Appliances.
Table 4. SW2 Settings
Switch #
Mode of Operation
Switches 1, 2, and 3 control which 4009 NAC outputs turn on and off when a specific input from the host panel turns on and off.
Valid options for use with SmartSync appliances are shown below.
1-3
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
When this Input
from Host Panel
Turns ON
Power is Applied
to these 4009
NAC Circuits
ON
OFF
OFF
1
1-4
OFF
ON
OFF
1
1-8
4
Set this switch to the ON position when using SmartSync appliances, unless a Sync Cube is being used on the host input for the
visual appliances. If a Sync Cube is used, this switch must be OFF.
5
Identifies the locally generated code pattern: ON = Marchtime OFF = Temporal. This switch is used in conjunction with
Switches 6 and 7.
6 and 7
For two-wire, SmartSync operation, switches are always set the same (i.e., both OFF or both ON) as follows:
•
Switches 6 and 7 ON. This setting specifies that the 4009 audibles will generate a steady tone pattern.
•
Switches 6 and 7 OFF. This setting specifies that the 4009 audibles will use the 4009’s locally generated coding pattern,
which is determined by the setting of Switch 5.
Important Note: The host panel inputs to the 4009 IDNet MUST be a steady tone pattern. No coding (marchtime or temporal)
from the host panel is allowed.
8
Set to ON for hardwired operation with two-wire SmartSync A/Vs. Set to OFF for hardwired operation with conventional, 4-wire
A/Vs and refer to “Hardwired Operation — Conventional A/Vs” earlier in this document.
Continued on next page
18
Hardwired Operation -- SmartSync Appliances, Continued
Example: Class B
Wiring -- Single NAC
Input from Host
Panel
A single NAC input cannot control audible and visuals separately from one and another (i.e., audibles
off on silence; visuals off on reset). Audibles and visuals track the state of the input (i.e., they are on
when the input is on and off when it is off).
Audibles can however use either marchtime, temporal, or on steady signaling, as shown by the switch
settings in the following example.
The example shown below is valid for a single 4009 IDNet.
Compatible Two-Wire SmartSync A/Vs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
4903-9417
4903-9418
4903-9419
4903-9428
4903-9429
4903-9430
•
•
•
•
10 K EOL
Resistor
4906-9127
4906-9128
4906-9129
4906-9130
10 K EOL
Resistor
10K EOL
Resistor
10 K EOL
Resistor
+ALM
-ALM
+ALM
-ALM
+ALM
TB1
-ALM
+ALM
-ALM
Note: Example shows
switches 1, 2, and 3 set for
4009 NACs 1 through 4.
See Table at beginning of
this section if using 8
NACs.
TB2
Steady Output
TB6
HOST
FCP
ON
2
1
+
1+
2+
345+
6+
78-
+
-
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
TB5
ON
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Set Switches as shown for
Steady NAC signaling
8
8
SW1
SW2
ON
1
2
Program host NAC to use STEADY
signaling pattern.
Program as Off on Reset or Off on
Silence as required.
3
FACP EOL
Resistor
4
Set Switches as shown for
Marchtime NAC signaling
5
Set Switches SW1-1 through SW1-7
as described in “Identifying Optional
Equipment” earlier in this document.
Refer to Table 2 for specific settings.
6
7
8
SW2
ON
1
Note: Switch SW1-8 must be set to
ON.
2
3
4
Set Switches as shown for
Temporal NAC signaling
5
6
7
8
SW2
Continued on next page
19
Hardwired Operation -- SmartSync Appliances, Continued
Example: Class B
Wiring -- Dual NAC
Host Input
Dual NAC input allows the 4009 IDNet’s horns and strobes to operate independently of one and other
(i.e., horns turn off on silence and visuals turn off on system reset). Signaling can be Marchtime,
Temporal, or Steady. For the application shown below, only a single 4009 IDNet is allowed; daisychaining additional 4009s is not allowed. See the next section for information on connecting multiple
4009 IDNet to the host panel.
Compatible Two-Wire SmartSync A/Vs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
4903-9417
4903-9418
4903-9419
4903-9428
4903-9429
4903-9430
•
•
•
•
10K EOL Resistor
4906-9127
4906-9128
4906-9129
4906-9130
10 K EOL
Resistor
10K EOL
Resistor
+ALM
-ALM
NAC1
+ALM
-ALM
NAC2
+ALM
TB1
Steady Output
from FACP
HOST
FCP
NAC1
Off on
Reset
NAC1
Off on
Silence
+
10 K EOL
Resistor
Note: Example
shows switches 1, 2,
and 3 on SW2 set for
4009 NACs 1
through 4. See
Table at beginning of
this section if using 8
NACs
-ALM
NAC4
TB2
ON
2
1+
2+
345+
6+
78-
-
+ALM
TB6
1
+
-ALM
NAC3
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
TB5
ON
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Settings for
Steady
8
8
SW1
SW2
ON
1
2
or as required
by host FCP
3
Settings for
Marchtime
4
5
Set Switches SW1-1 through SW1-7
as described in “Identifying Optional
Equipment” earlier in this document.
Refer to Table 2 for specific settings.
Note: Switch SW1-8 must be set to
ON.
6
7
8
SW2
ON
1
2
3
Settings for
Temporal
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
Continued on next page
20
Hardwired Operation -- SmartSync Appliances, Continued
Example: Class B
Wiring -- Dual NAC
Input from Host
Panel to Multiple
4009s
A single host panel can control multiple 4009s daisy chained to one and other. Note the following
about this application:
•
Two NAC inputs must be available on the host panel and a SyncCube must be attached to NAC
Input 1 in order to synchronize the visuals.
•
•
•
All 4009 IDNets use Rev. 1.08.02 or higher firmware (Simplex Part Number 741-106).
Signaling can be Marchtime, Temporal, or Steady. See jumper settings below.
Horns and strobes operate independently of one and other (i.e., horns turn off on silence and
visuals turn off on system reset).
Up to three additional 4009 IDNet extenders may be connected to the host panel. The last 4009
IDNet must have 10K EOL resistors installed across Terminals 2 and 4 and Terminals 6 and 8.
•
Compatible Two-Wire SmartSync A/Vs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
4903-9417
4903-9418
4903-9419
4903-9428
4903-9429
4903-9430
•
•
•
•
Set Switches SW1-1 through
SW1-7 as described in “Identifying
Optional Equipment” earlier in this
document. Refer to Table 2 for
specific settings.
4906-9127
4906-9128
4906-9129
4906-9130
Note: SW1-8 must be set to ON.
Note: Example
shows switches 1, 2,
and 3 on SW2 set for
4009 NACs 1
through 4. See
Table at beginning of
this section if using 8
NACs
Program 4100U &
40[10/08/06] panel NACs
for Sync Strobe mode, or
use 4905-9914/9922 Sync
Cube if some other host
FACP is used.
Continued on next page
21
Hardwired Operation -- SmartSync Appliances, Continued
Example: Class A
Wiring -- Dual NAC
Input from Host
Panel to Multiple
4009s
This wiring provides an example of a hardwired 4009 IDNet that uses Class A wiring and SmartSync
NAC appliances.
•
Two NAC inputs must be available on the host panel and a Sync Control Module (SCM) must
be attached to NAC Input 1 as shown in the figure.
Signaling can be Marchtime, Temporal, or Steady.
Horns and strobes operate independently of one and other (i.e., horns turn off on silence and
visuals turn off on system reset).
Each class A NAC circuit requires a dedicated 4905-9938 Sync Control Module. A maximum of
eight SCMs can be used, meaning you can only have eight Class A NAC circuits.
•
•
•
Compatible Two-Wire SmartSync A/Vs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4903-9417
4903-9418
4903-9419
4903-9428
4903-9429
4903-9430
4906-9127
4906-9128
4906-9129
4906-9130
Note: HORN OUT
terminals connect
to HORN In on
next 4905-9938
(up to 8 total), or
terminate with 10K
EOL resistor
Set Switches SW1–1
through SW1-7 as
described in “Identifying
Optional Equipment”
earlier in this document.
Refer to Table 2 for
specific settings.
Note: SW1-8 must be
set to ON.
- + - + - +
4905-9938 Sync
Control Module.
See 574-719 and
842-058 for
detailed wiring and
installation
instructions
Class A
Ret.
NAC
IN
HORN
IN
NAC
OUT
HORN
OUT
+ -
+ 10 K EOL
Resistors on
unused NACs
+ALM
-ALM
+ALM
-ALM
+ALM
NAC1 NAC2
TB1
HOST
FCP
NAC1
Off on
Reset
NAC1
Off on
Silence
Note: Example
shows switches 1, 2,
and 3 on SW2 set for
4009 NACs 1
through 4. See
Table at beginning of
this section if using 8
NACs
Steady Output
from FACP
-ALM
+ALM
-ALM
NAC3 NAC4
TB2
TB6
ON
2
1
+
1+
2+
345+
6+
78-
+
-
TB5
10 K EOL
Resistor or as
required by host
panel NACs
22
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
ON
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
Settings for
Steady
Signaling
8
SW1
SW2
Marchtime and
Temporal
Signaling set
via SCM. See
574-719
System Installation
General Information
Important: Notify the appropriate personnel (building occupants, fire department, monitoring
facility, etc.) of the installation.
The following paragraphs contain material that is applicable to all 4009 IDNet systems. Be sure that
you are thoroughly familiar with this material before installing your 4009 IDNet.
To help you with installation of this and other Simplex Fire Alarm equipment, the following
publication is available for general reference: How to Wire a Building for a Fire Alarm System
(FA2-91-001 or 575-892).
Tools and
Equipment Required
The following tools and equipment are required to install the 4009 IDNet:
•
1/4-inch flat-tip screwdriver, 8-inches long
•
1/8-inch flat-tip screwdriver, 4-inches long
•
Volt-Ohmmeter
•
Diagonal cutting pliers
•
Wire strippers
•
Listed end-of-line resistors (ordered separately)
10K resistor (733-894)
General Notes
•
Field Wiring Diagram 842-068.
•
All wiring must be installed in accordance with local codes.
•
A minimum of 6 inches of free conductor is required at each electrical box to facilitate
terminations.
•
A 12-inch service loop of cable is required for all continuous pulls through an electrical box.
•
All system wiring subject to physical damage must be mechanically protected based on the
environment to which the cable is subjected.
•
A neatly wired system helps ensure an accurate inspection of all connections and simplify
troubleshooting.
Continued on next page
23
System Installation, Continued
Mounting the 4009
IDNet
Note:
The following pages provide a detailed description of the installation. If you experience
problems that cannot be resolved, call your local Simplex Branch Office.
Use the following procedure when mounting a 4009 IDNet.
CAUTION:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Read all instructions carefully before cutting conduit/service entrances
and installing back box. Failure to comply with all installation
requirements may result in a violation of UL or FCC regulations.
Carefully open the shipping container.
Remove the 4009 IDNet from the shipping container and lay the unit on a flat surface.
Unlock and open the panel door. Remove the electronic card cage assembly and store it in a safe
dry area. Disconnect the AC wiring harness from the card cage before removing it from the box.
Determine the amount and proper location of conduit/service entrances (see Figure 6). Make all
appropriate entrances into the back box.
Power-Limited and Non-Power Limited wiring must enter through separate conduit/service
entrances. AC power entrance into the back box is recommended at the bottom right side of the
back box.
Maximum intrusion into back box for conduit is ½ -inch.
TOP VIEW
C
B
D
KNOCKOUT
SCREW/NAIL
HOLES for
SEMI-FLUSH
MOUNTING
Recommended Conduit Locations
Locate conduit entry approximately
where shown.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Class B or Class A Fiber Feed and
AC Power
Notification Appliance Circuits and
IDNet
Class A Fiber Return
Notification Appliance Circuits and
IDNet or Class A Fiber Return
Control Inputs: IDNet or
Notification Appliance Circuits
E
NON-POWER-LIMITED
WIRING ONLY
A
BATTERY
MOUNTING
AREA (NO
CONDUIT
ENTRY)
Continued on next page
24
System Installation, Continued
Mounting the 4009
IDNet, continued
Wiring the 4009
IDNet
5.
Mount back box to wall. Back box must be level and plumb. For surface mounting use the
teardrop and clearance holes located in the rear of the box and screw to wall.
6.
Wire Non-Power-Limited wiring in the shaded areas only (see Figure 6), this includes AC input
and battery connections. All other wiring is Power-Limited. Maintain at least ¼-inch spacing
between all Power-Limited and Non-Power-Limited wiring.
7.
Connect the AC wiring harness and install the electronic card cage assembly to the 4009 IDNet
cabinet.
When wiring the 4009 IDNet, refer to the 842-068 Field Wiring Diagram, the 4009 IDNet NAC
Extender Connection Diagram (Figure 7), and the following system wiring requirements.
•
All wiring, except incoming power and ground connecting wires, must be free from grounds or
shorts and have a resistance of one megohm, or higher, to EARTH.
•
All wires are to be copper conductors only, except fiber cables. All equipment must be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the specifications and standards of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The installation of all wiring, cable, and equipment must be
in accordance with NFPA 70.
•
If shielded wire is used, the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained and insulated
throughout the entire length of the cable. The entire length of the cable must have a resistance of
one megohm to Earth.
•
Splicing is permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. All wiring must be terminated with UL listed
devices (e.g., wire nuts, pressure connectors). Wiring terminated with only electrical tape is not
permitted. All splicing (free ends of conductors) must be covered with insulation equivalent to
that of the conductors.
•
An appropriate system ground must be provided for Earth detection and lightning protection
devices. This connection shall be made to an approved dedicated Earth connection per NFPA 70.
•
When running wires to the 4009 IDNet, identify the wires appropriately: Only system wiring can
be run in the same conduit which includes dedicated NAC wiring, IDNet wiring, 24V AUX
wiring, and the four NAC circuits (an additional four NAC circuits are available as a
field-installed option).
Input power and external battery power are Non-Power-limited and cannot be run with
Power-Limited system wiring.
Continued on next page
25
System Installation, Continued
System Power
Requirements
Model 4009-9201 NAC (120VAC System)
AC Input - 120VAC, 3 amperes, 60Hz
Battery Input - 24VDC, 8 amperes
Power Output - 24VDC, 8 amperes
Exception: Notification circuit current de-rated to 6 Amps if any circuit used for
REGULATED 24 VDC NACs. See 842-068 for more details.
Model 4009-9301 NAC (220/240 System)
AC Input - 220/240VAC, 1.5 amperes, 50/60Hz
Battery Input - 24VDC, 8 amperes
Power Output - 24VDC, 8 amperes
Exception: Notification circuit current de-rated to 6 Amps if any circuit used for
REGULATED 24 VDC NACs. See 842-068 for more details.
Mounting and Wiring
Peripheral Devices
Refer to the 842-068 Field Wiring Diagram for detailed information, and the
procedure listed below when installing the 4009 IDNet peripheral devices.
1.
Determine the mounting locations of the peripheral devices and install system
wires from the mounting location of each peripheral device to the 4009 system
board. All wiring to be minimum 18 AWG, supervised, and Power-Limited.
2.
Install all peripheral devices and connect them to appropriate wires. (Refer to
the installation instructions packed with the devices.)
3.
For 2-wire Class B/Style Y and 4-wire Class A/Style Z devices, a 10K, 1/2 W
End-of-Line Resistor (EOLR: P/N 733-894, PID# 4081-9008) is required. Refer
to Field Wiring Diagram 842-068.
White Text
574-181
Rev. E
FIRE
4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases
Application Manual
574-709
Rev. T
ii
Copyrights and Trademarks
Copyrights
© 2008- 2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. All rights reserved.
Specifications and other information shown were current as of publication and are subject to
change without notice.
Suffix “C” or “CA” following an eight-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product.
Suffix “E” following an eight-digit Product ID number denotes Global product. The second suffix
identifies market country, models with this suffix are not UL Listed.
Trademarks
Tyco, IDNet, Simplex and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its
affiliates and are used under license.
MAPNET II Communication Net is protected by US Patent No. 4,796,025.
TrueAlarm Analog Detection is protected by US Patent No. 5,155,468.
TrueAlarm Detector Base is protected by US Patent No. 5,173, 683.
All illustrations of actual detectors, sensors, and bases shown in this publication are artist’s renditions.
iii
Cautions and Warnings
Cautions and
Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS- Follow the instructions in this installation
manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated
equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX® PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED- Upon
unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If
damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized
Simplex product supplier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjust-
ments or repairs. All repairs should be performed by a representative or authorized agent of
your local Simplex product supplier.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:


Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15 - This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
iv
Table of Contents
Copyrights and Trademarks ........................................................................................... iii Copyrights ................................................................................................................... iii Trademarks ................................................................................................................. iii Cautions and Warnings .................................................................................................. iv Table of Contents ............................................................................................................ v Chapter 1 Overview .............................................................................. 1-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1-1 In this Chapter ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Special Considerations ................................................................................................ 1-2 Overview .................................................................................................................. 1-2 Special Considerations for Smoke Detectors and Sensors..................................... 1-2 Smoke Detector/Sensor Applications ...................................................................... 1-2 Where to Place Detectors and Sensors ...................................................................... 1-3 Proper Locations for Detectors and Sensors ........................................................ 1-3 Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors................................................................ 1-6 Improper Locations for Detectors and Sensors ....................................................... 1-6 Principles of Operation ................................................................................................ 1-8 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1-8 Heat Detector Operation .......................................................................................... 1-8 Photoelectric Smoke Detectors/Sensors ................................................................. 1-8 Ionization Smoke Detectors/Sensors ...................................................................... 1-8 Carbon Monoxide Gas Detectors/Sensors .............................................................. 1-8 Chapter 2 4098 Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors and Bases .......... 2-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 2-1 In this Chapter ......................................................................................................... 2-1 4098 Smoke Detectors ................................................................................................ 2-2 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 2-2 Smoke Detector Limitations ..................................................................................... 2-2 Specifications ........................................................................................................... 2-3 Mounting Requirements........................................................................................... 2-4 4098 Heat Detectors .................................................................................................... 2-5 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 2-5 Heat Detector Types ................................................................................................ 2-5 Specifications ........................................................................................................... 2-5 4098 Bases .................................................................................................................. 2-8 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 2-8 Mounting .................................................................................................................. 2-9 Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 2-10 Chapter 3 TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases, and QuickConnect
Smoke Sensors .................................................................................... 3-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3-1 v
In this Chapter ......................................................................................................... 3-1 4098 TrueAlarm Sensors............................................................................................. 3-2 Specifications ........................................................................................................... 3-2 Special Applications................................................................................................. 3-2 Mounting .................................................................................................................. 3-2 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases ................................................................................... 3-3 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................... 3-3 Setting the Base’s Address...................................................................................... 3-3 Address Setting for the 2120 CDT System.............................................................. 3-5 Address Setting for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4008, or 4120 System3-5 Multi-Sensor Bases 4098-9795 and 4098-9796 ..................................................... 3-7 Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 3-7 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors....................................................... 3-12 Overview ................................................................................................................ 3-12 Specifications ......................................................................................................... 3-12 Setting the Sensor’s Address ............................................................................... 3-13 Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 3-14 Chapter 4 Accessories ......................................................................... 4-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 4-1 In this Chapter ......................................................................................................... 4-1 Relay Module Accessories .......................................................................................... 4-2 2098-9737 Relay Module Wiring ............................................................................ 4-2 4098-9822 Relay Module Wiring ............................................................................. 4-3 Relay Module Installation......................................................................................... 4-4 Remote LED Module ............................................................................................... 4-4 Chapter 5 Compatibility and Testing .................................................. 5-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 5-1 In this Chapter ......................................................................................................... 5-1 Compatibility ................................................................................................................ 5-2 Compatibility for 4098 Detectors and Detector Bases............................................. 5-2 Maintenance and Testing ............................................................................................ 5-4 Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 5-4 Preferred Method of Testing Smoke Detectors/Sensors ......................................... 5-4 Test Equipment Available ........................................................................................ 5-4 Alternate Method for Testing Sensors ..................................................................... 5-5 Magnetic Test for Photoelectric Detectors............................................................... 5-5 Magnetic Test for Ionization Detectors .................................................................... 5-7 Ion Detector Sensitivity Test .................................................................................... 5-7 Cleaning....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 5-8 Photoelectric Smoke Detector/Sensor Cleaning ..................................................... 5-8 Special Considerations for Ion Detectors and Sensors ........................................... 5-8 Trouble Indications ...................................................................................................... 5-9 Trouble Indications for TrueAlarm Sensors ............................................................. 5-9 Trouble Indications, Continued .................................................................................. 5-10 vi
Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log ................................................................. 5-11 Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log ............................................................ 5-11 Index ............................................................................................................................. I-1 vii
Chapter 1
Overview
Introduction
The purpose of this publication is to provide information concerning the proper application of both
heat and smoke detectors/sensors in conjunction with fire alarm systems.
The information in this publication is intended to be used only as a technical guide. The
requirements of applicable codes and standards, as well as directives of Authorities Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ’s), should be followed.
In this Chapter
Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.
Topic
Special Considerations
Where to Place Detectors and Sensors
Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors
Principles of Operation
1-1
See Page #
1-2
1-3
1-6
1-8
Special Considerations
Overview
Before installing detectors/sensors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with
information provided in NFPA 72, (an excerpt of which is provided in the “Smoke Detector/
Sensor Applications” section below). For additional information, refer to NFPA 72 and the
NEMA Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors.
Special
Considerations for
Smoke Detectors
and Sensors

Is there human occupancy?

Contents to be protected.

Type of construction and use.

Burning characteristics of contents.

Air movement - stratification.

Deflections and obstructions.

Height of ceilings.

Surface conditions of ceilings.

Type of ceiling construction.

Total area.

Vent locations - velocities - dilution.
Smoke
Detector/Sensor
Applications
Each detector/sensor is capable of providing up to 900 square feet (84 square meters) of coverage,
depending on the following:

Requirements of local codes.

Results of engineering evaluation.
1-2
Where to Place Detectors and Sensors
Proper Locations
for Detectors
and Sensors
IMPORTANT: The guidelines in this section are adapted from standards
published by the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy,
Massachusetts, U. S. A. These standards include NFPA 72,
“National Fire Alarm Code”; NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”,
Article 760; and NFPA 90A, “Standard for the Installation of
Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”
To provide effective early warning of a developing fire situation, smoke detectors/sensors should
be installed in all areas of the protected premises. Total coverage as defined by NFPA 72 should
include all rooms, halls, storage areas, basements, attics, lofts, and spaces above suspended
ceilings including plenum areas utilized as part of the HVAC system. In addition, this should
include all closets, elevator shafts, enclosed stairways, dumbwaiter shafts, chutes and other
subdivisions and accessible spaces.
Fire detection systems installed to meet local codes or ordinances may not be adequate for early
warning of the fire. Some codes or ordinances have minimum objectives such as capturing
elevators or preventing circulation of smoke through HVAC systems instead of early detection of
fire.
You should weigh the costs against the benefits of installing a complete fire detection system
when any detection system is being installed. The location, quantity and zoning of
detectors/sensors should be determined by what objectives are desired rather than the minimum
requirements of any local codes or ordinances.
Detectors/sensors may be omitted from combustible blind spaces when any of the following
conditions prevail:

Where the ceiling is attached directly to the underside of the supporting beams of a
combustible roof or floor deck.

Where the concealed space is entirely filled with noncombustible insulation. (In solid joist
construction, the insulation need only fill the space from the ceiling to the bottom edge of the
joist of the roof or floor deck.)

Where there are small concealed spaces over rooms, provided the space in question does not
exceed 50 square feet (4.6 square meters).

In spaces formed by sets of facing studs or solid joists in walls, floors, or ceilings where the
distance between the facing studs or solid joists do not exceed 6 inches (15 cm).
Detectors/sensors may also be omitted from below open grid ceilings where all of the following
conditions are met:

The openings of the grid are at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the smallest dimension.

The thickness of the material does not exceed the smallest of the grid openings.

The openings constitute at least 70% of the area of the ceiling material.
Continued on next page
1-3
Where to Place Detectors and Sensors, Continued
Proper Locations
for Detectors
and Sensors
Detectors/sensors are usually required or recommended underneath open loading docks or
platforms and their covers, and in accessible under-floor areas in buildings without basements.
Detectors/sensors may be omitted from combustible blind spaces when all of the following
conditions prevail:
1.
The space is not accessible for storage purposes, it is protected against the entrance of
unauthorized persons, and it is protected against the accumulation of windblown debris.
2.
The space contains no equipment/structures (such as steam pipes, electrical wiring, ducts,
shafts, or conveyors) that could potentially ignite or conduct the spread of fire.
3.
The floor over the space is tight.
4.
Non flammable liquids are processed, handled, or stored on the floor above the space.
“Total coverage” as described in NFPA 72, is the definition of a complete fire detection system.
In some of the specified areas of coverage, such as attics, closets, under open loading docks or
platforms, a heat detector may be more appropriate than a smoke detector. Careful consideration
should be given to the detector manufacturer’s instructions and the following recommendations in this
guide.
In general, when only one detector/sensor is required in a room or space, the detector/sensor should
be placed as close to the center of the ceiling as possible. Central location of the detector/sensor is
best for sensing smoke and/or fire in any part of the room. If a center location is not possible, it may
be placed no closer than 4 inches (10 cm) from the wall, or if listed for wall mounting, it may be
mounted on the wall. Wall mounted detectors/sensor should be located approximately 4 to 12 inches
(10 to 30 cm) from the ceiling to the top of the detector, and at least 4 inches (10 cm) from any
corner wall junction (see the figure below).
FigureTag FD4-709-01
4in
(10cm)
Ceiling
4in
(10cm)
Minimum
Acceptablehere
Neverhere
12in
(30cm)
Maximum
Topofthedetector
acceptablehere
Note:
Measurements shown are to the
Note:
closest
Measedge
urementsshof
aownthe
aretothdetector.
e
closestedgeofthedetector.
Side
wall
Figure 1-1. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Detector/Sensor
Continued on next page
1-4
Where to Place Detectors and Sensors, Continued
Proper Locations
for Detectors
and Sensors
When an air supply and/or an air return duct opening is present in a room or space, the
detector/sensor(s) should be placed in the path of the air flow toward the return air duct opening
(see below).
FigureTag FD4-709-02
Return
air
Supply
air
Correct
Incorrect
Figure 1-2. Detector Placement - Air Supply and/or Return Ducts
Smoke tests are helpful in determining proper placement. Special attention should be given
to smoke travel directions and velocity, since either can affect detector/sensor performance.
Placement of a detector/sensor near air conditioning or incoming air vents can also cause
excessive accumulation of dust and dirt on the detector/sensor. This dirt can cause the
detector/sensor to malfunction and cause nuisance alarms. Detectors/sensors should not be located
closer than 3 feet (0.9 m) from an air supply diffuser.
Spot type detectors/sensors in properly engineered systems, may also be placed in return air ducts, or
in approved duct detector housings designed for this application. Although duct detectors are not a
substitute for open area detectors, they can provide an effective method of initiating building control
functions to prevent smoke from being transported from the fire area to other parts of a building.
1-5
Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors
Improper Locations
for Detectors
and Sensors
One of the major causes of nuisance alarms is improper placement of detectors/sensors.
The best way to avoid nuisance alarms is to not install detectors/sensors in environments that can
cause them to malfunction. See the table and examples provided below.
Table 1-1. Environmental Conditions that Influence Detector Response*
Air Velocity
>300 ft.
(91.4m)/min.
Atm. Pressure
3000 ft. (914m)
Above Sea Level
Humidity
>93% RH
Temp. <32°F (0C)
>100°F (38C)
Color of
Smoke
Ion
X
X
X
X
O
Photo
O
O
X
X
X
Beam
O
O
X
X
O
Air Sampling
O
O
X
X
O
Detection
Protection
* See Table A-5-3.6.1.1 in NFPA 72
X = May affect detector/sensor response
O = Generally does not affect detector/sensor response
DO NOT PLACE DETECTORS/SENSORS:

In excessively dusty or dirty areas, such as feed rooms, steel mills, etc. Dust and dirt can
accumulate on the detector/sensor’s sensing chamber and make it overly sensitive, or block
the air entrances to the sensing chamber and make the detector/sensor less sensitive to smoke.
Be especially careful to avoid areas where fumigants, fog or mist-producing materials, or
sweeping and cleaning compounds are used. These substances may cause nuisance alarms.

Outdoors, in stables, open storage sheds, or other open structures affected by dust,
air currents, or excessive humidity and temperature.

In damp or excessively humid areas, or next to bathrooms with showers. Water droplets
can accumulate inside the sensing chamber and make the detector/sensor overly sensitive.
A tremendous amount of humid air is produced during a hot shower. The moisture in this
humid air can enter the sensing chamber as water vapor, then cool and condense into droplets
that can cause a nuisance alarm.

In elevator lobbies over ashtrays or where people smoke while waiting for the elevator.

In very cold or very hot environments, or in unheated buildings or rooms where the
temperature can fall below or exceed the operating temperature range of the detector/sensor.
At temperatures below 32° F (0° C), ice crystals or condensation can appear inside the sensing
chamber and make it overly sensitive or cause a nuisance alarm. At temperatures above the
operating range of the detector/sensor greater than 120° F (49° C), its internal components
may not function properly.

In or near areas where combustion particles are normally present, such as in kitchens or other
areas with ovens and burners; in garages, where particles of combustion are present in vehicle
exhausts; within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of any type of furnace, hot water heater, or gas space
heater; or in welding shops or other types of work areas where some form of combustion is
used in the activity normally conducted in that area. When a detector must be located in or
adjacent to such an area, a fixed temperature heat detector may be appropriate.
Continued on next page
1-6
Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors, Continued
Improper Locations
for Detectors
and Sensors

In air streams passing by or through kitchens. Air often enters a residence or a residential unit
of an apartment building through cracks around the front and/or back doors. If the air return
is in the bedroom hallway or in the bathroom, and if air from the kitchen easily enters the air
stream going from the door to the air return, combustion particles from cooking can cause
nuisance alarms. Install detectors/sensors so that they protect the bedrooms, but so they are
out of the air stream.

In or near manufacturing areas, battery rooms, or other areas where substantial quantities of
vapors, gases or fumes may be present. Strong vapors, like excessive humidity, can make
detectors/sensors overly sensitive or less sensitive than normal. In very large concentrations,
gases heavier than air, such as carbon dioxide, may make detectors/sensors more sensitive,
while gases lighter than air, such as helium, may make them less sensitive. Aerosol particles
may collect on detector/sensor chamber surfaces and cause nuisance alarms.

Insect-infested areas. If insects enter a detector/sensor’s sensing chamber, they can cause a
nuisance alarm. Take proper insect eradication procedures before installing detectors/sensors
in such locations. If spraying is done, do not allow insect spray to enter the detectors/sensors.

Near fluorescent light fixtures. Electrical noise generated by fluorescent light fixtures may
cause nuisance alarms. Install detectors/sensors at least 1 foot (0.3 meters) away from such
light fixtures.

When using the CO Base for CO fire detection, do not install in locations that could have
potentially high non-fire levels of CO.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) has three standards for smoke detectors: one for duct
detectors/sensors, UL 268A; one for single and multiple station detectors/sensors, UL 217; and
one for system type detectors/sensors, UL 268. Detectors/sensors should only be used in the
applications for which they are specifically listed.
The NFPA 101 Life Safety Code states that single station smoke detectors shall sound an
alarm only within an individual living unit or similar area and shall not actuate the building
fire alarm system. It also states, “All systems and components shall be approved for the
purpose for which they are installed.”
In addition to possible code noncompliance, the following deficiencies would exist in a series
of residential smoke detectors connected in a fire alarm system mode:

Since the fire alarm system is not supervised, vandals or others could disconnect a detector or
the entire system, leaving a building without protection. The residents would be unaware of
the serious life threatening condition.

Residential detectors do not latch in alarm. In other words, the detector self-resets. One
detector in alarm sounds all the detectors connected together. It would be difficult to
identify or locate a specific detector that initially put the system into alarm after the alarm
condition was cleared.
System detectors/sensors latch in alarm. They do not reset until power is momentarily
disconnected. This makes it convenient to identify the location of the detector/sensor that caused
the control panel to alarm. In addition, system detectors are specifically designed to connect to a
supervised control panel. Two-wire detectors require a UL compatibility review to verify that the
detector and panel properly operate together. A typical life safety fire alarm system for an
apartment complex would be to use system detectors/sensors and manual fire alarm stations in the
hallways and common areas of the complex and residential single station type detectors and heat
detectors in the individual apartments. The system detectors/sensors, manual stations and heat
detectors would be connected to a supervised control panel, sound a general alarm and
automatically notify the proper authorities that a fire condition exists. The residential detectors
located in the apartments would be interconnected only within the individual living quarters of
each apartment. These residential units would sound an alarm only in the apartment unit.
1-7
Principles of Operation
Introduction
This section describes how the different types of detectors and sensors work. For additional
information on TrueAlarm sensor operation, refer to the TrueAlarm Concepts publication
(PER-91-024).
Heat Detector
Operation
The heat detector senses the heat or the Rate-of-Rise (ROR) in the air temperature of the
environment in which it is located. The heat detector is comprised of electronic circuitry and a
mechanical package that is designed to sense the ROR of the air temperature in an expedient and
reliable fashion. Upon detection of an abnormal increase in air temperature, or ROR in air
temperature, the electronics indicate an alarm by increasing the amount of current draw from the
monitor zone it is connected to. The monitor zone is a supervised detection circuit that is tied
back to a main control panel that takes appropriate action to indicate an alarm has been reported,
if the zone current is substantially increased.
Being of an electronic design, the temperature of the air is sensed by using two negative
temperature coefficient thermistors. The resistance of the thermistors goes down with an increase
in temperature. One thermistor is placed in a position such as to sense the open air temperature
very rapidly (RT1). The second thermistor is positioned in a small cavity that protrudes out from
the main body of the detector (RT2). The location of RT2 allows for fast detection of a quick
change in the air temperature, but yet for a slow or medium rate of temperature change, the
detector does not trip due to the ROR feature. For a slower change in temperature, the detector
trips into alarm due to a set fixed temperature that is sensed by RT1. For a fast temperature rise,
when a difference in temperature sensed by RT1 and RT2 has reached a predetermined amount,
the detector trips into alarm.
Photoelectric Smoke
Detectors/Sensors
These devices operate on a light scattering principle. The smoke sensing chamber contains an
infrared LED source with a peak spectral emission of 880 nanometers. This source is placed at an
angle from a spectrally matched photodiode receiver. During a NO SMOKE condition, only light
reflected from the chamber walls enters the receiver and shows up as a small photocurrent. As
smoke particles enter the sensing chamber and cross the light beam of the LED, more light reaches
the receiver due to scattering. The receiver circuitry converts this photocurrent into a signal
voltage. In a detector, when this voltage reaches a preset level, an alarm is produced. In a sensor,
this signal voltage goes into an 8-bit, A to D (analog to digital) converter. A digital representation
of this signal voltage is then transmitted to the fire alarm panel for further processing.
Ionization Smoke
Detectors/Sensors
These devices use a small radiation source, Americium-241, which emits alpha particles that
ionize air molecules between two electrically charged electrodes. With the application of a
DC voltage .to these electrodes, a small ionization current flows within the chamber. As smoke
enters the chamber, a decrease in ionization current results. This current is converted into a signal
voltage by a transimpedance circuit. In a detector, when this signal voltage drops below a preset
level, an alarm is produced. In a sensor, this signal voltage goes into an 8-bit A to D (analog to
digital) converter. A digital representation of this signal voltage is then transmitted to the fire
alarm panel for further processing.
Carbon Monoxide
Gas
Detectors/Sensors
The CO Sensor and Sounder Bases with a CO Replaceable Sensor (CRS) module work in
conjunction with existing detector heads. The CO Sensor Base enhances fire detection and
provides the ability to combine fire and toxic gas leakage detection in a single device. The CO
sensor measures the concentration of carbon monoxide gas in the air in part per million (PPM).
When toxic gas operation is selected, the FACP panel may generate either a supervisory, utility or
priority 2 alarms. The alarm level is calculated within the panel based on the time integrated CO
levels that have been measured at the detector.
1-8
Chapter 2
4098 Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors and Bases
Introduction
This chapter contains specification and mounting information for 4098 Smoke Detectors,
Heat Detectors, and Bases.
In this Chapter
Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.
Topic
4098 Smoke Detectors
4098 Heat Detectors
4098 Bases
See Page #
2-2
2-5
2-8
2-1
4098 Smoke Detectors
Introduction
CAUTION: Install the detectors described in this publication in accordance with
applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction (AHJs). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
failure of the detector to initiate an alarm condition. The manufacturer
is not responsible for detectors that have been improperly installed,
tested, or maintained.
Smoke Detector
Limitations
The smoke detectors used with these bases are designed to activate and initiate emergency action,
but do so only when used in conjunction with other equipment. They are designed for installation
in accordance with NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.

Smoke detectors do not work without power. AC or DC powered smoke detectors do not
work if the power supply is cut off for any reason.

Smoke detectors do not sense fires when smoke does not reach the detectors. Smoke from
fires in chimneys, in walls, on roofs or on the other side of closed doors may not reach the
smoke detector and alarm it.

A detector may not detect a fire developing on another level of a building. For this reason,
detectors should be located on every level of a building.

Smoke detectors have sensing limitations. Ionization detectors are better at detecting fast,
flaming fires than slow, smoldering fires. Photoelectric detectors sense smoldering fires
better than flaming fires. Because fires develop in different ways, and are often unpredictable
in their growth, neither type of detector is always best, and a given detector may not always
provide warning of a fire. In general, detectors cannot be expected to provide warning for
fires resulting from inadequate fire protection practices, violent explosions, escaping gases,
improper storage of flammable liquids like cleaning solvents, other safety hazards, or arson.

Smoke detectors cannot last forever. Smoke detectors contain electronic parts. Even though
detectors are made to last for many years, any of these parts could fail at any time. Therefore,
test your smoke detector system per NFPA 72 at least annually. Clean and take care of your
smoke detectors regularly. (See Chapter 5 of this publication for cleaning instructions.)
Continued on next page
2-2
4098 Smoke Detectors, Continued
Specifications
Table 2-1. Smoke Detector Specifications
Specifications
Smoke Detector Data
Detector
PID (4098)
-9601, -9605
-9602
-9603
Type of Detector
Photoelectric
Photoelectric
with Heat
Ionization
Working Voltage
(2-wire)
8.5 – 33 VDC
8.5 – 33 VDC
8.5 – 33 VDC
Rated Voltage
(4-wire)
15 – 32 VDC
15 – 32 VDC
15 – 32 VDC
Input Ripple
Voltage
25% Max.
25% Max.
25% Max.
Max. Alarm
Current
86 mA
86 mA
86 mA
Surge Current
<200 A
<200 A
<200 A
Standby Current
<100 A
<100 A
<100 A
N/A
135 F
N/A
Humidity Range
(Non-Condensing)
10-95% RH
10-95% RH
10-95% RH
Air Velocity
Range
0-2000 FPM
0-2000 FPM
0-200 FPM
Heat Element
Rating
Continued on next page
2-3
4098 Smoke Detectors, Continued
Mounting
Requirements
All smoke detectors identified in Table 2-1 mount to a detector base (refer to the “4098 Bases”
section of this chapter for more information). Use the following considerations and Figure 2-1
when mounting smoke detectors.
IMPORTANT: Smoke must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air
stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air migration affects
detector efficiency.
Note:
Where the possibility of positive airflow from the electrical conduit/junction box exists,
seal the conduit openings with 3M Weatherban #606 (or equivalent), a non-flammable
sealing compound.

Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 F (38 C)
or fall below 32 F (0 C).

Because the 4098-9602 detector combines heat sensing, DO NOT install this detector in
locations where the ambient temperatures exceed 100 F (38 C) or where temperature
fluctuations above 6 F/min. occur.

Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall.

Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it
reaches the detector.

Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace
rooms, laundry rooms, loading docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles,
soldering rooms, etc.).

Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient
rooms with vaporizers, near shower rooms, above large sinks, etc.).

Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies.

Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (10-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to
detector head.

Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris.
Remove any protective covers before activating the system.

If using the adapter plate, tighten the mounting screws without warping the adapter plate.
2-4
4098 Heat Detectors
Introduction
This section contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the heat
detectors shown in Table 2-2.
WARNING:
Heat detectors are NOT life-safety devices; USE HEAT DETECTORS
FOR PROPERTY PROTECTION ONLY! For life-safety requirements,
use smoke detectors.
Notes:
Heat Detector Types

For all heat detectors, provide electronic supervision with battery back-up at the fire alarm
control panel.

Where the possibility of positive airflow from the electrical conduit/junction box exists, seal
the conduit openings with 3M Weatherban #606 (or equivalent), a non-flammable sealing
compound.

Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test, and maintenance requirements.
Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors:
Electronic fixed temperature heat detectors use a fast response, thermistor based design to provide
temperature sensing that quickly, accurately, and consistently identifies when fixed temperatures are
exceeded. For this reason, the fixed temperature detectors are recommended for most applications.
With a UL spacing distance of 60 X 60 feet, the fixed temperature electronic heat detectors replace
both mechanical fixed as well as mechanical ROR heat detectors.
ROR Temperature Heat Detectors:
Electronic Rate-of-Rise (ROR) heat detectors detect fixed temperature alarm thresholds the same as
the fixed temperature heat detectors, plus detect a ROR alarm with a patented ROR detection design
that can quickly respond to sudden temperature variations. Due to the nature of the fast response to
temperature changes, care must be taken for proper installation of ROR heat detectors. ROR heat
detectors should be installed in stable environmentally controlled areas. These detectors must not be
installed where hot or cold air can be blown on them (near ductwork, industrial equipment, air vents
etc.). ROR detectors should not be installed where more then 6 F per minute temperature changes
can normally occur.
Specifications
Features:

Rate-of-Rise and Fixed Temperature (see Table 2-2)

Alarm LED

Compatible with 2-Wire Initiating Device Circuits

Current-Limited Alarm State
Electrical Specifications:

Typical Standby Current - 80 Microamps

Typical Alarm Current - 40 Milliamps

Maximum Current - 80 Milliamps while in alarm state

Operating Range - 15-32 VDC

Maximum Ripple Voltage Allowed - 30%
Continued on next page
2-5
4098 Heat Detectors, Continued
Specifications
Table 2-2. Heat Detector Models and Features
Detector Model
Rating or Class*
Area /
Language
Color Code
4098-9612 (UL)
135 F (57 C) FT
English

4098-9613 (UL)
135 F (57 C) FT and RR
English

4098-9614 (UL)
200 F (93 C) FT
English
White
4098-9615 (UL)
200 F (93 C) FT and RR
English
White
4098-9616E
A1
European
Green
4098-9617E
C
European
Red
4098-9618E
A
Australian
White
4098-9619E
B
Australian
Blue
4098-9621E
D
Australian
Red
4098-9622E
I
Chinese
Green
4098-9624E
134 F (56.7 C) FT
Korean

4098-9625E
134 F (56.7 C) FT and RR
Korean

4098-9626E
134 F (56.7 C) FT
Taiwanese

4098-9627E
134 F (56.7 C) FT and RR
Taiwanese

4098-9628E
190 F (87.8 C) FT
Korean

4098-9629E
190 F (87.8 C) FT and RR
Korean

4098-9630E
190 F (87.8 C) FT
Taiwanese

4098-9631E
190 F (87.8 C) FT and RR
Taiwanese

* RR abbreviates Rate-of-Rise; FT abbreviates Fixed-Temperature.
Continued on next page
2-6
4098 Heat Detectors, Continued
Specifications
All heat detectors identified in the table below mount to a detector base (refer to the “4098 Bases”
section of this publication for more information). Use the information in Figure 2-1 when
mounting.
Table 2-3. Heat Detector Specifications
Product ID
4098-9612
4098-9613
4098-9614
4098-9615
Description
Application
Max. Spacing
Allowed (UL)
FM
Fixed-Temp. Only,
135 F (57 C)
Unusually violent
temp. fluctuations
and ceiling
temperatures not
exceeding
100 F (38 C)
70 X 70 ft
(21 X 21 m)
RTI = Quick
20 X 20 ft
(6.1 X 6.1 m)
Fixed-Temp. and
Rate-of-Rise,
135 F (57 C)
Normal temp.
fluctuations
and ceiling
temperatures not
exceeding 100 F
(38 C)
70 X 70 ft
(21 X 21 m)
RTI = Quick
20 X 20 ft
(6.1 X 6.1 m)
Fixed-Temp. Only,
200 F (93 C)
Unusually violent
temp. fluctuations
and ceiling
temperatures
exceeding 100 F
(38 C) but not
150 F (68 C)
70 X 70 ft
(21 X 21 m)
RTI = Quick
20 X 20 ft
(6.1 X 6.1 m)
Fixed-Temp. and
Rate-of-Rise,
200 F (93 C)
Normal temp.
fluctuations
and ceiling
temperatures
exceeding 100 F
(38 C) but not
150 F (68 C)
70 X 70 ft
(21 X 21 m)
RTI = Ultra Fast
50 X 50 ft
(15.2 X 15.2 m)
2-7
4098 Bases
Introduction
The 4098-9788 base is designed to be used with 4098 Series smoke and heat detectors, as well as
the QuickConnect2 photo sensor. To use a 4-wire configuration, you must use the 4098-9682
relay base. Heat detectors require the 4098-9684 base when used with a remote LED. This
section only covers the information necessary to mount and wire these base configurations.
Before installing these bases, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with
information provided in NFPA 72. For additional information, refer to the NEMA Guide for
Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors.
CAUTION: Install the bases in this section in accordance with applicable NFPA
standards, local codes, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in failure of the detector
to initiate an alarm condition. The manufacturer is not responsible for
detectors that have been improperly installed, tested, or maintained.
Continued on next page
2-8
4098 Bases, Continued
Mounting
The 4098-9788 base mounts to a 4-inch octagonal, 4-inch square, or single gang electrical box.
When mounting to a 4-inch square or any surface mounted box, the 4098-9832 adapter plate kit
must be used.
ALL BASES FLUSH MOUNTED
(BOX TO BE FLUSH OR RECESSED 1/4 " MAX )
4098-9794, AND 4098-9795 ONLY
FLUSH MOUNTED
(BOX WITH ADAPTER BRACKET TO
BE FLUSH OR RECESSED 1/4" MAX)
4098-9789, -9791, -9792, -9796
AND ALL DETECTOR BASES FLUSH MOUNTED
(BOX TO BE FLUSH MOUNTED OR RECESSED 1/4" MAX)
4" (10.16cm x 1 1/2" DEEP)
OCTAGONAL
ELECTRICAL BOX
( NOT SUPPLIED)
SINGLE GANG (2 1/8" DEEP)
ELECTRICAL BOX
(NOT SUPPLIED)
4098-9832
ADAPTER PLATE KIT
(REQUIRED FOR 4" SQUARE/
OCTAGONAL SURFACE MOUNTED
ELECTRICAL BOX)
(SEE NOTE 4)
4" (10.16cm x 1 1/2" DEEP)
SQUARE
ELECTRICAL BOX
(NOT SUPPLIED)
RACO 787
ADAPTER BRACKET
OR EQUIVALENT
(NOT SUPPLIED)
BASE
# 8-32 x 1 1/4"
PANHEAD MACHINE
SCREW
(TIGHTEN UNTIL SNUG,
1-3 in.-lbs.)
# 6-32 SCREW
WITH WASHER
(NOT SUPPLIED)
# 8-32 x 1 1/4"
PANHEAD MACHINE
SCREW
(TIGHTEN TO 4-6 in.-lbs.)
# 8 x 1" THREAD FORMING
PANHEAD SCREW
(TIGHTEN TO 4-6 in.-lbs.)
BASE
#6-32 x 1 1/4"
PANHEAD SCREW
(TIGHTEN TO 4-6 in.-lbs.)
SENSOR
(AS REQUIRED)
SEE NOTES 1 AND 2
CLOCKWISE
FOR ATTACHMENT
Figure 2-1. Typical Detector/Sensor Mounting
Notes:
1.
Break off plastic lock tab to engage locking mechanism. To lock detector/sensor into base,
turn unit until the locking tab clicks into place. To unlock detector/sensor, insert the blade of a
screwdriver into this slot and then pull down on handle. This action allows the detector/sensor
to be turned and removed (see Figure 2-1).
2.
Refer to the “Compatibility and Testing” chapter of this publication for detailed information
on compatible detectors/sensors.
3.
Bases with relay modules require a 1 ½-inch extension ring (not supplied) mounted to the
4-inch square or octagonal electrical box to meet the space requirement of the relay cube and
its wires. The relay module(s) cannot be used in single-gang electrical box installations. The
relay cube 4098-9822 must be installed in the electrical box directly behind the sensor base.
4.
Use Adapter Plate Kit 4098-9832 when mounting the 4098-9794 and 4098-9795 to a surface
mounted 4-inch square or octagonal box. Adapter plates must be installed with textured side
towards the electrical box for this installation only.
Continued on next page
2-9
4098 Bases, Continued
Wiring
All screw terminals accommodate 14 to 18 AWG solid or stranded wire. When tightening
screws, the range of torque is 8 to 12 in-lbs. Connect wiring to the terminals shown in the figure
below. (Figures 2-2 through 2-6 show typical wiring applications for the 4098 bases.)
CAUTION: Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide
supervision of connections.
2
1
3
4
See Note 2
See Note 1
See Note 3
Figure 2-2. Wiring and Mounting the Bases
FigureTag FD4-709-03
Notes:
1.
Break off plastic tab where indicated to engage locking mechanism.
2.
Once locking mechanism is engaged, you must insert a flat-head screwdriver in slot
indicated to release the detector from the base.
3.
Use the slotted hole indicated for the first screw when mounting the base.
Continued on next page
2-10
4098 Bases, Continued
Wiring
BACKUP 2
(SEE NOTE 3)
(SEE NOTE 4)
+
INITIATING
CIRCUIT
4098-9788
BASE
PRIMARY 1
(SEE NOTE 3)
4098-9788
BASE
4098-9788
BASE
+
-
(SEE NOTE 5 )
(SEE NOTE 5 )
EOL
RESISTOR
(IF USED)
(SEE NOTE 5)
4
4
4
(SEE NOTE 2)
LISTED
SIMPLEX
FIRE ALARM
CONTROL
PANEL
2120,
4001, 4002
4020, 4100+, 4100U,
4100ES, 4004, 4005 OR
4006
3
3
3
1
1
2
1
2
2
RED
BLK
REMOTE LED
4098-9830
(SEE NOTE 1)
RED
BLK
REMOTE LED
4098-9830
(SEE NOTE 1)
FigureTag FD4-709-04
Figure 2-3. 4098-9788 Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits
Notes:
1.
If used, 4098-9830 Remote LED is polarized. Refer to Figure 2-6 to wire remote LED to the
Heat Detector; observe color-coded wiring.
2.
Refer to wiring diagrams provided with system panel for proper End-Of-Line (EOL) resistor
value.
3.
It is recommended that the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines be in separate wire runs and
in compliance with local requirements.
4.
For Style D initiating circuit, wire per dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor.
5.
Break wires before connecting to Terminal 4 to maintain supervision. Do not loop wire
underneath Terminal 4.
Continued on next page
2-11
4098 Bases, Continued
Wiring
FigureTag FD4-709-05
BACKUP 2
SEE NOTE 4
SEE NOTE 3
SEE
NOTE
3
+
INITIATING
CIRCUIT
PRIMARY 1
SEE NOTE 4
+
-
EOL
RESISTOR
(IF USED)
2
1
LISTED
SIMPLEX
FIRE ALARM
CONTROL
PANEL
2120,
4001, 4002
4020, 4100+, 4100U,
4100ES, 4004, 4005 OR
4006
3
4
VIO
RED
BLU
GRY
BLK
RED
BLK
YEL
BLK
ORN
GRN
REMOTE LED
4098-9830
(SEE NOTE 1)
N/C
C
N/O
(SEE NOTE 5)
N/C
C
N/O
(SEE NOTE 2)
Figure 2-4. 4098-9683 2-Wire Relay Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits
Notes:
1.
If used, 4098-9830 remote LED is polarized; refer to Figure 2-6 to wire remote LED to a heat
detector, observe color-coded wiring.
2.
Wire only one relay base per initiating circuit.
3.
For Style D initiating circuit, wire per dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor. If Style B
initiating circuit, refer to wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for proper EOL
resistor value.
4.
It is recommended that the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines be in separate wire runs and in
compliance with local requirements.
5.
Aux. Relay contacts, each rated 1 amp at 28 VDC/0.5 amp at 125 VAC, resistive.
Continued on next page
2-12
4098 Bases, Continued
Wiring
FigureTag FD4-709-06
24VDC
EOL RELAY
2098-9735
OR
2098-9739
RED
+
RESETABLE
POWER
SOURCE
24VDC
INITIATING
CIRCUIT
REMOTE LED
4098-9830
(SEE NOTE 1)
-
BLK
REMOTE LED
4098-9830
(SEE NOTE 1)
YEL
YEL
+
-
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
RED
LISTED
SIMPLEX
FIRE ALARM
CONTROL
PANEL
2120,
4001, 4002
4020, 4100+, 4100U
4100ES ,
4004, 4005 OR 4006
RED
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
GRN
GRN
GRN
GRN
GRN
N/C
VIO
BLU
GRY
N/O
BLK
BLK
N/C
SEE
NOTE
6
VIO
BLU
GRY
N/O
BLK
RELAY
BLK
RELAY
EOL
RESISTOR
(SEE NOTE 3)
RED
ORG
GRN
N/C
SEE
NOTE
6
VIO
BLU
GRY
N/O
BLK
SEE
NOTE
6
BLK
RELAY
Figure 2-5. 4098-9682 4-Wire Base Connections for Style B Initiating Circuits
Notes:
1.
If used, 4098-9830 remote LED is polarized, observe color-coded wiring.
(Refer to Figure 2-6 to wire remote LED to heat detector.)
2.
Aux. Alarm contacts - Form C - each rated 3 amps at 28 VDC/115 VAC, resistive.
3.
Refer to wiring diagrams provided with system panel for proper EOL resistor value.
Continued on next page
2-13
4098 Bases, Continued
Wiring
FigureTag FD4-709-07
BACKUP 2
SEE NOTE 2
-
SEE NOTE 3
SEE
NOTE
3
+
INITIATING
CIRCUIT
PRIMARY 1
SEE NOTE 2
+
4098-9684
HEAT DETECTOR
BASE
-
EOL
RESISTOR
(IF USED)
4098-9684
HEAT DETECTOR
BASE
2
2
1
1
3
LISTED
SIMPLEX
FIRE ALARM
CONTROL
PANEL
2120,
3
4
4
4098-9830
REMOTE LED
(SEE
NOTE 1)
4098-9830
REMOTE LED
(SEE
NOTE 1)
4001, 4002
4020, 4100+, 4100U
4100ES ,
4004, 4005 OR 4006
RED
RED
BROWN
BLK
BLK
BLK
BROWN
BLK
WHITE
WHITE
Figure 2-6. 4098-9684 Heat Detector LED Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits
Notes:
1.
If used, 4098-9830 remote LED is polarized; observe color-coded wiring.
2.
It is recommended that the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines be in separate wire runs and in
compliance with local requirements.
3.
For Style D initiating circuit, wire per dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor. If Style B
initiating circuit, refer to wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for proper EOL
resistor value.
2-14
Chapter 3
TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases, and
QuickConnect Smoke Sensors
Introduction
This chapter contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the TrueAlarm
Sensors, Sensor Bases and QuickConnect Smoke Sensors.
WARNING:
Be sure that the location of each smoke sensor and each heat
sensor has been planned per local and national fire codes
(see NFPA 72).
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control panel. This
functionality complies with NFPA 72. When functional testing of these sensors is required per
NFPA 72, use the test methods described in Chapter 5 of this manual “Compatibility and Testing.”
Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test, and maintenance requirements.
The 4098-9733 heat sensor and 4098-9754 multi-sensor provide a Rate-of-Rise function that is
software programmed and selectable at 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C) per minute. The
4098-9733 and 4098-9754 also provide general temperature monitoring within the range of
32°-122° F (0°-50° C).
In this Chapter
Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.
Topic
See Page #
4098 TrueAlarm Sensors
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases
4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors
3-2
3-3
3-12
Table 3-1. 4098-9733 Spacing
Agency
Program Selection
Spacing
UL
135º F (57 C)
60 X 60 ft
(18.3 X 18.3 m)
UL
155º F (68 C)
40 X 40 ft
(12.2 X 12.2 m)
FM
135º F/155º F (57 C/68 C)
RTI = Quick
20 X 20 ft
(6.1 X 6.1 m)
FM
135º F/155º F (57 C/68 C)
with 15 or 20 º F/min (8.3 or
11.1 C/min)Rate of Rise
RTI = Ultra Fast
50 X 50 ft
(15.2 X 15.2 m)
3-1
4098 TrueAlarm Sensors
Specifications
Table 3-2. TrueAlarm Sensor Specifications
Sensor PID
Type of Sensor
Average
Operating
Current
UL Temperature
Rating*
Humidity Range
(Non-Condensing)
Air Velocity
Range
*
**
†
40989717
4098-9733
4098-9754
4098-9746
Photoelectric
Ionizat
ion
Heat
Photo/Heat
Gas
80 A
80 A
6 A at 68 F (20°C)
13 A at 135 F (57 C)
90 A
50µA


135 F (57 C)**
155 F (68 C)†
135 F (57 C)**
155 F (68 C)†
10-95% RH
1095%
RH
0-2000 FPM
0-200
FPM
10-95% RH
10-95% RH
15-95% RH
(15-90% for
long term
exposure)

0-2000 FPM
0-1000 FPM
Fixed temperature functions are software programmed and selectable from the UL temperature rating.
UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 100° F (38° C) at 3600 sq. ft of Max. Coverage.
UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 100° F (38° C) at 1600 sq. ft of Max. Coverage.
Special Applications
Mounting
4098-9714
1.
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control unit.
The sensitivity range (setting) for the 4098-9714 and 4098-9754 sensor is 0.2%/FT to
3.7%/FT smoke obscuration. The sensitivity range (setting) for 4098-9717 sensors is
0.5%/FT to 1.3%/FT.
2.
The 0.2%/FT, 0.5%/FT, and 1.0%/FT settings for the 4098-9714 and 4098-9754 sensor and the
0.5%/FT and 0.9%/FT settings for the 4098-9717 sensor are for special applications only.
The 0.2%/FT, 0.5%/FT, 0.9%/FT, and 1.0%/FT settings are very sensitive settings: only use the
0.2%/FT setting when a sensor is located in a totally smoke-free and controlled
temperature environment, such as a computer room or telephone switching exchange.
3.
To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.2%/FT setting, set the sensitivity for the installed
sensor at 1.5%/FT and monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of
0.1%FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.2%/FT setting.
4.
To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.5%/FT setting, set the sensitivity for the installed
sensor at 1.5%/FT and monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of
0.25%FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.5%/FT setting.
5.
To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.9%/FT or 1.0%/FT setting, set the sensitivity for
the installed sensor at 1.3%/FT (Ion) 1.5/FT (Photo) and monitor the peak values for
90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.5% or higher during the 90 days, do not use the
0.9%/FT (Ion) or 1.0%/FT (Photo) settings.
All sensors identified in Table 3-2 mount to a sensor base (refer to the “4098 TrueAlarm
Sensor Bases” section of this chapter for more information). Use the following information and
Figure 2-1 when mounting TrueAlarm sensors.
3-2
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases
Introduction
TrueAlarm smoke/heat sensor bases are connected to a 2120 Multiplex Communicating Device
Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120, 4008, or 4010 panel by a single wire
pair (MAPNET II/IDNet). The 4098-9792, -9789, 9793, 9796, 9797, and 9798 bases and their
sensors obtain both power and data over MAPNET II/IDNet wiring. The 4098-9791 sensor base
requires 24VDC power for relay operation and the 4098-9794 and 4098-9795 sensor base with
sounder requires 24 VDC or Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power. The 4098-9791, -9794,
-9795, and –9796 are NOT compatible with the 2120 CDT. The 4098-9793 is only compatible
with the 4010, 4008, 4100U and 4100ES (except with 4100-3103 Quad Panel Isolator).
Specifications
The table below contains specifications for TrueAlarm Sensor Bases.
Table 3-3. TrueAlarm Sensor Bases Specifications
Sensor Base
PID
4098-9789
(w/
Remote
LED)
4098-9791
(w/ Relay
and
Remote
LED)
Working
Voltage
(MAPNET
II/IDNet)
24-40 VDC
4098-9792
4098-9793
(Isolator
Base)
4098-9794
(Sounder
Base)
4098-9795
(MultiSensor
Sounder
Base)
4098-9796
(MultiSensor w/
Remote
LED)
4098-9797
(CO Sensor
Base)
4098-9798
(CO Sounder
Base)
24-40
VDC
24-40
VDC
24-40 VDC
24-40 VDC
24-40 VDC
24-40 VDC
24-40 VDC
24-40 VDC

18 – 32
VDC


18 – 32
VDC
18 – 32
VDC


18 – 32 VDC
400 A
400 A
400 A
500 A
400 A
500 A
500 A
450 A
500 A
24V Standby
Current
(Relay or
Sounder)

270 A


270 A
270 A


270 A
24V Current
(Relay or
Sounder
Activated)

28 mA


17 mA
20 mA


17 mA
LED Output
Yes
Yes


Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes




88 dBA
minimum
88 dBA
minimum


88 dBA
minimum
24V Working
Voltage
(Relay or
Sounder
Power)
MAPNET
II/IDNet
Current *
Sounder
Output
* MAPNET II/IDNet current with Photo Sensor plugged into Base
Setting the Base’s
Address
Each sensor base has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label that
identifies its physical location within a building. The base’s address and location must match up
with the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Configuration Report or the
Programmer’s Report for the 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120, 4008, or 4010 System. See
Figure 3-1 for DIP Switch location for 4098-9789, -9791, -9792, -9793, and -9796, Sensor Bases.
See Figure 3-2 for DIP Switch location for 4098-9794, 4098-9795, -9797 and -9798.
Continued on next page
3-3
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
Setting the Base’s
Address
ON
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP Switches
Figure 3-1. 4098-9789, -9791, -9792, -9793, -9796, Sensor Bases Location of DIP Switches
DIP Switch Position 9
“ON” for NAC Power Input
“ON” Position
DIP Switches
DIP Switch Position 9
“OFF” for 24 VDC
Power Input
“OFF” Position
Figure 3-2. 4098-9794, 4098-9795, , 4098-9798 Sensor Bases Location of DIP Switches
Note: The 4098-9794 Sounder Base, 4098-9795 Multi-Sensor Sounder Base, and 4098-9798
Sounder Base have a 9-position DIP Switch. The first eight DIP Switches set the sounder
base address. DIP Switch Position 9 is set to OFF or ON depending upon the sounder base
power source. When the sounder base is connected to a 24 VDC power source, DIP
Switch Position 9 is set to “OFF” and the 24 VDC power is supervised by the sounder
base. When the sounder base is powered by the panel’s Notification Appliance Circuit
(NAC), DIP Switch Position 9 is set to “ON” and the power is supervised by the NAC and
not the sounder base. The -9797 Base has the same layout, but doesn’t offer sounder
functionality. It uses only an 8-way DIP switch.
Continued on next page
3-4
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
Address Setting for
the 2120 CDT
System
Address Setting for
the 4010, 4020,
4100+, 4100U,
4100ES, 4008, or
4120 System
1.
Using the 2120 Job Configuration Report, find the entry for the sensor base (4098-9792 and
4098-9789 only) you are about to install. The CUSTOM LABEL column provides the
location while the DEVICE ADDRESS column provides the switch setting data.
2.
Using the switch setting data for the base you are installing, set the base’s address.
See Figure 3-1 for location of switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches.
3.
Double-check the location of the sensor base and its address before proceeding to electrical
installation (see Figure 2-1).
1.
Using the Programmer’s Report for the 4020 (Figure 3-3), 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120,
4008, or 4010 (Figure 3-4), find the entry for the sensor base you are about to install. The
device ADDRESS and CUSTOM LABEL are located in the SYSTEM POINT SUMMARY
under “M.”For example, Address M1-7 (for the 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120, 4008, or 4010
system) is circled in Figure 3-4. M1 is the addressable channel while -7 is the device address
on the channel. For a base with Address M1-7, Address 7 must be set on the base’s DIP
Switches (SW1).
2.
Using the example given in Step 1 as guideline, set the base’s address using the information in
Figure 3-5. See Figure 3-1 and 3-2 for location of DIP Switches. Use a small screwdriver or
pen to set the switches.
3.
Mark an address label with the appropriate address for your base by shading a label box for
each base DIP Switch in the ON position. Then apply the label to the base near the base’s
DIP Switch.
4.
Double-check the location of the sensor base and its address before proceeding to electrical
installation.
Device
Address
Figure 3-3. 4020 Programmer’s Report
Device
Address
Figure 3-4. 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120, 4008, or 4010 Programmer’s Report
Continued on next page
3-5
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
Address Setting for
the 4010, 4020,
4100+, 4100U,
4100ES, 4008, or
4120 System
The figure below shows the address DIP Switch settings for the 4010, 4008, 4020, 4100+, 4100U,
4100ES and 4120 Systems. Refer to the “Compatibility and Testing” chapter of this publication
for information on which devices are compatible with the various FACPs.
Note:
The 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4008, and 4120 systems support up to 127 devices on
each of their MAPNET II channels. The 4010 supports up to 250 devices on its IDNet
channel.
FigureTag FD4-709-08
MSB
LSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIPSWITCH IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.
8
ON
1 = ON
OFF
0 = OFF
DIP SWITCHES 5 THRU 8
0000
1000
0100
1100
0010
1010
0110
1110
0001
1001
0101
1101
0011
1011
0111
1111
0000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1000
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
0100
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1100
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
0010
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
1010
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
0110
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
1110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
0001
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
1001
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
0101
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
1101
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
0011
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
1011
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
0111
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
1111
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Figure 3-5. 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4008, or 4120 MAPNET/IDNet Addresses
Continued on next page
3-6
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
Multi-Sensor Bases
4098-9795 and
4098-9796
The 4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor Bases are only for use with the 4098-9754
multi-sensor and are not compatible with the 2120 CDT. Both bases have remote LED output and
the 4098-9795 also has an integrated sounder similar to the 4098-9794 Sounder Base. The
4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor Bases must be used with the 4098-9754 multi-sensor
when connected to a 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4008, or 4120 system. When connected to a 4100U or a
4100ES the 4098-9754 multi-sensor can also be used with the 4098-9789, -9791, -9792, -9793, 9794, -9797, and -9798 bases.
The Multi-Sensor Base answers to two addresses, therefore the DIP Switch must be set for
even addresses only. The even address is a photo sensor/sounder base (4098-9795) or a photo
sensor/standard base (4098-9796), and the odd address (DIP Switch + 1) is a heat sensor/standard
base. The figure below shows the allowable addresses for the Multi-Sensor Bases.
IMPORTANT: Switch Position 1 is not used and must always be OFF (0) for the
Multi-Sensor Bases to function properly. The odd address immediately
after the DIP Switch setting must not be used by any other sensor base or
MAPNET/IDNet device.
LSB
SEE
NOTE 1
1
MSB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIPSWITCH IS SHOWN
SET AT ADDRESS 4.
9
ON
1 = ON
OFF
0 = OFF
SEE
NOTE
RESERVED FOR
FUTURE USE
DIP SWITCHES 5 THRU 8
0000 1000 0100 1100 0010 1010 0110 1110 0001 1001 0101 1101 0011 1011 0111 1111
DIP
SWITCHES
1 THRU 4
0000
0100
0010
0110
0001
0101
0011
0111
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
SWITCH 1 MUST BE SET TO OFF
FOR PROPER OPERATION
96
98
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
134
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
202
204
206
208
210
212
214
216
218
220
222
224
226
228
230
232
234
236
238
240
242
244
246
248
250
252
254
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
Figure 3-6. 4098-9795, -9796, 9798 Multi-Sensor Base DIP Switch Address Settings
Note:
Wiring
The 4098-9795 Multi-Sensor Sounder Base has a 9-position DIP Switch that is used for
setting base address and selecting the sounder power source. See Figure 3-2 for DIP Switch
location.
Sensor bases are connected to the fire alarm control panel via a single wire pair for the 4098-9789,
-9792, -9793, -9796, and -9797 and two pairs of wires for the 4098-9791, -9794, -9795, and -9798.
Using Figure 3-7 as a reference, connect the bases to the MAPNET II/IDNet wire pair and 24V
power
(if used).
IMPORTANT: For additions to existing installations, remove power from the panel
before wiring any bases to avoid damage to equipment.
Continued on next page
3-7
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
Wiring
FigureTag FD4-709-09
RED
RED
4 0 9 8 - 9 82 2
RELA Y
M O D U LE
(S E E
NO TE 6)
C EN TE R
N .C .
N .O .
N .C .
BR O W N
O RAN G E
V IO L E T
YE LLO W
GREY
G RE EN
N .O .
CE N TE R
YE LLO W
G R EY
G RE EN
N .C .
N .O .
S H IE L D
(S E E N O T E 3 )
C ENTE R
N .C .
N .O .
CONTACT A
(S E E N O T E 7 )
4 0 9 8 - 9 7 91
SE NSO R BA SE
-COMM
C EN TE R
+COMM
-COMM
S H IE L D
(S E E N O TE 3 )
+COMM
4 0 9 8 -9 7 8 9 , - 9 7 9 6
SE NSO R B ASE
-COMM
-COMM
+COMM
SHIELD
(S E E N O TE 3 )
+COMM
-S
+S
BLA CK
40 9 8 - 97 9 2
SE NS O R B AS E
OR A N G E
V IO LE T
C ON T AC T B
(S E E N O T E 7 )
BLA CK
4 0 9 8 - 97 9 4, - 9 7 95
-9797 , -979 8
BLUE
20 9 8- 9 7 3 7
RELA Y
(S E E
N O TE 9 )
4 0 9 8 - 9 7 93
SE NSO R B ASE
( S E N O T E 8)
S H IE L D
( S E E N O T E 3)
COMM
BLUE
WHITE
(S E E N O T E S 8 & 1 0 )
B LU E
W H ITE
B LAC K
COMM
(S E E
N O T E 5)
B LAC K
COMM
-
COMM
-
T O O T H E R 2 4 V D E V IC E S
(S E E
N O TE 9)
(S E E
NOTE 6)
BLACK
+
BLUE
WHITE
0V
+
+
-
-
+2 4 V
0V
BLUE
2 0 98 - 9 8 0 8
R E M O TE L ED
O R 4 0 9 8 - 9 82 2
R E L A Y (I F U S E D )
(S E E N O TE 1 )
+
TO N EXT
24 V O R N A C
C I R C U IT
+24V
WHITE
FROM
P ANE L
BLACK/WHITE
0V OR NAC -ALM
+24V OR NAC +ALM
FROM
P AN EL
C O N TA C T A
(S E E N O TE 4 )
C O N TA C T B
(S E E N O T E 4 )
+ M A P N E T II/ID N e t
+ M A P N E T II/ID N e t
- M A P N E T I I /I D N e t
- M A P N E T I I/ ID N e t
F R OM
P AN EL
Figure 3-7 Smoke/Heat Sensor Base Connections
TO O THER
M A P N E T I I/
I D N e t D E V IC E S
(S E E N O T E 2 )
FROM
40 1 0
PAN EL
TO O TH ER
ID N E T D E V I C E S
(S E E N O T E 2 )
ID N et
ID N et
S H IE L D IS O P T I O N A L
(S E E N O T E 3 )
S H IE LD
Notes:
1. Remote LED and relay wires are not supervised.
2. Maximum quantity of devices per circuit is 127 for 4020, 4100+, 4100U/4100ES (MAPNET), or 4120, 128 for the 2120 CDT panel, 200 for the 4008 panel, and 250 for the 4010 and
4100U/4100ES (IDNET) panel. Maximum quantity of 4098-9795 -9796 and -9797 Multi-Sensor bases is 63 with 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES and 4120, 100 for 4008 panel, and 124
for the 4010 panel. If the sounder output is coded (Temporal code, etc.) via MAPNET II/IDNet control see Note 10.
3. If shield is used, twist shield wires together and cap with wire nut. Shield should be insulated from electrical box.
4. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C - each rated 2 amperes at 24 VDC/0.5 amperes at 110 VAC, resistive.
5. 18 to 32 VDC, .008 amperes typical/.013 amperes max.
6. Do not use remote LED if the 4098-9822 relay module is used.
7. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C – Each rated at 3 amperes at 28 VDC/115 VAC, resistive.
8. Remove the protective tape over the CO Sensor on the 4098-9797 and -9798 bases only after the sensor head has been installed.
9. Maximum wire length between 4098-9791 sensor base and 2098-9737 relay module is 100 feet.
10. Maximum quantity of sensors with 4098-9794, -9795, and -9798 sounder bases limited to 43 if output is coded (Temporal code, etc.) via MAPNET II/IDNet control.
If coding is performed via 24VDC or NAC circuit, see Note 2.
Continued on next page
3-8
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
Wiring
Figure 3-8 shows the wiring connections for the isolator sensor base. All screw terminals accept
14 to 18-gauge AWG solid or stranded. Maximum torque should not exceed 12-inch-pounds.
CAUTION: Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide
supervision.
Figure 3-8. 4098-9793 Isolator Sensor Base Connections
Notes:
1.
Isolator base compatible with 4010, 4100U, 4100ES or 4008 panel ONLY.
2.
Maximum quantity of devices per circuit is 250 for 4010, 4100U and 4100ES panels.
3.
If shield is used, twist shield wires together and cap with wire nut. Shield should be insulated
from electrical box.
3-9
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
CRS Replacement
Instructions
This section contains the instructions for the end-of-life replacement of the 4098-9746 CO
Replacement Cartridge (CORC), in the CO SSD Bases (Carbon Monoxide Smoke Sensor and
Detector Bases). Replacement is necessary due to normal component degradation over time. It is
standard maintenance for the CO SSD Bases in order to prolong normal function without requiring
base replacement.
Note:
During installation, you may be exposed to live circuits - attention required to ensure
personal safety and to avoid product damage.
Model number reference:
Model
4098-9746
4098-9797
4098-9798
Name
CORC Replacement
CO SSD Sensor Base
CO SSD Sounder Base
Removing the expired CORC
1. Remove sensor head (not shown) and set aside for later re-installation.
2. Insert a fine blade screwdriver into the slot, as shown below.
3. Gently free the CORC from the sensor base by pushing straight in. Do not pry. Remove the
CORC and dispose.
Figure 3-9. Removing the CORC from the Sensor Base
______________________________________________________________________________
Continued on next page
3-10
4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued
CRS Replacement
Instructions
Installing the replacement CORC (refer to photo below)
1.
Remove the replacement CORC from its packaging.
2.
Hook the loop of the CORC on the tab in the outer rim of the base (center of the CORC below
the CO sensor cylinder)
3.
Gently rotate the CORC inward until it snaps onto the CO SSD Sensor Base.
4.
Re-install the detector head.
5.
Remove the dust cover from the CORC (shown to the side below).
6.
The CORC replacement is complete.
Figure 3-10. Installing the replacement CORC
3-11
4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors
Overview
This section contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the TrueAlarm
QuickConnect Smoke Sensor shown in Table 3-4.
WARNING:
Specifications
Ensure that the location of each smoke sensor has been planned
per local and national fire codes (see NFPA 72).
1.
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control panel.
This functionality complies with NFPA 72. When functional testing of these sensors is
required per NFPA 72, use the test methods described in the “Compatibility and Testing”
chapter of this publication. The sensitivity range (settings) of the 4098-9757 is 1.5%/ft to
3.7%/ft smoke obscuration.
2.
Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test, and maintenance requirements.
Table 3-4. TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensor Specifications
Sensor PID
4098-9757
Type of Sensor
Photoelectric
Operating Current
500 A max.
Humidity Range (Non-Condensing)
10-95% RH
Air Velocity Range
0-2000 FPM
Working Voltage
(MAPNET II and IDNet)
24-40 VDC
24V Working Voltage
(Sounder Power

Sounder Output

24V Standby Current
(Sounder)

24V Current
(Sounder Activated)

Remote LED Output
NO
Continued on next page
3-12
4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors, Continued
Specifications
The 4098-9757 QuickConnect2 sensor requires the 4098-9788 base.
The 4098-9757 QuickConnect2 sensor is only compatible with the 4010, 4100U and 4100ES (with
4100-3106). The sensors obtain both power and data over IDNet wiring.
Setting the
Sensor’s Address
Each QuickConnect sensor has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label
that identifies its physical location within a building. The sensor’s address and location must
match up with the address listed in the Programmer’s Report for the 4010, 4100U or the 4100ES.
Use the method described in the “4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases” section of this chapter to
complete the sensor setup. Refer to the figure below for the location of the DIP Switches.
Double-check the location of the QuickConnect sensor and its address before proceeding to
electrical installation (see Figures 3-12 and 3-13).
Address DIP Switches
4098-9757
Figure 3-11. Location of DIP Switches on QuickConnect Sensor
Continued on next page
3-13
4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors, Continued
Wiring
Use the following to wire the QuickConnect smoke sensors.
CAUTION:
Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide
supervision.
4098-9788
(SEE
NOTE 1)
4098-9788
4098-9788
-IDNet
FROM
PANEL
-IDNet
+IDNet
SHIELD IS
OPTIONAL
(SEE NOTE 3)
+IDNet
SHIELD
SHIELD
TO OTHER IDNet
DEVICES
(SEE NOTE 2)
SHIELD
Figure 3-12. QuickConnect Sensor Connections
FigureTag FD4-709-10
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4098-9757 QuickConnect sensor uses the 4098-9788 base.
Maximum quantity of devices per IDNet circuit is 250 for the 4010, 4100U and 4100ES (with
4190-3106) panel.
If shield is used, twist shield wires together and cap with wire nut. Shield should be insulated
from electrical box.
3-14
Chapter 4
Accessories
Introduction
This chapter covers relay module accessories.
In this Chapter
Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.
Topic
Relay Module Accessories
See Page #
4-2
4-1
Relay Module Accessories
2098-9737
Relay Module Wiring
The 2098-9737 Relay module is used with 4098-9791 sensor base. Install the relay module using
Figure 3-7 and the figure below as a reference.
#" !
! "
Figure 4-1. 2098-9737 Relay Module Wiring
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
18 to 32 VDC 24 mA typical/35 mA maximum.
Contact A or B: dry, Form C, each rated 3 amps at 28 VDC/115 VAC, resistive.
Maximum wire length between sensor and relay module is 100 feet.
Continued on next page
4-2
Relay Module Accessories, Continued
4098-9822 Relay
Module Wiring
The 4098-9822 Relay Module is used with the 4098-9789, -9791, -9794, -9795, and -9796
Sensor Bases. Install the relay module using Figure 3-7 and the figure below as a reference.
IMPORTANT: Do not use a remote LED if using the 4098-9822 relay module.
The 4098-9822 relay module is not supervised and should only be
used for non-critical supplementary functions. There is a limit of
ten control outputs activated on a MAPNET II/IDNet channel. If the
channel capacity is exceeded, the relay module may not function
properly.
FigureTag FD4-709-10
+24VDC
FROM
PANEL
(IFUSED)
+24VDC
0V
0V
TOOTHER24VDC
DEVICESOR
SUPERVISORYMODULE
(SEENOTE1)
-BLUE
(SEENOTE2)
+WHITE
WHITE
BLUE
RED
RED
BLACK
4098-9822
RELAY
From 4098-9789, -9791, -9794,-9795, -9796
Sensor Base
BLACK
CONTACTB
(SEENOTE3)
CENTER
BROWN
ORANGE
CENTER
N.C.
VIOLET
YELLOW
N.C.
N.O.
GREY
GREEN
N.O.
CONTACTA
(SEENOTE3)
Figure 4-2. 4098-9822 Relay Module Wiring
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
Do not use remote LED.
18 to 32 VDC, .008 amps typical / .013 amps. Maximum.
Contact A or B: Dry, Form “C” - each rated 2 amps resistive at 24 VDC/0.5 amps at
110 VAC, resistive.
Continued on next page
4-3
Relay Module Accessories, Continued
Relay Module
Installation
Install the relay module using the following steps:
1.
Mount a 1-1/2 inch (3.81 cm) extension ring (not supplied) to an octagonal or square
electrical box (not supplied). The extension ring is required to meet the minimum box
volume requirement (32.3 cu. inch/529.4 cu. cm) for relay module installation.
2.
Mount relay module inside extension ring directly behind base and sensor. Do not mount
remotely. See Figure 4-1 or 4-2 for relay module connections.
Note:
Remote LED Module
Use the exact configuration of electrical box (square or octagonal) with extension to
mount sensor base when installing the relay module.
The 2098-9808 Remote LED Module is available for the 4098-9789 ,-9791, -9794, -9795, -9796
Sensor Bases.
Use the figure below as a reference when installing the Remote LED Module to a sensor base.
RED
BLACK
2098-9808
To 4098-9789, -9791, -9794, -9795, -9796 Sensor Base
LED
Figure 4-3. 2098-9808 Remote LED Module Wiring
4-4
Chapter 5
Compatibility and Testing
Introduction
This chapter covers the compatibility of 4098 Sensors, Detectors, and Bases. Maintenance and
testing are also covered.
In this Chapter
Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.
Topic
Compatibility
Maintenance and Testing
Cleaning
Trouble Indications
Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log
5-1
See Page #
5-2
5-4
5-8
5-9
5-11
Compatibility
Compatibility for
4098 Detectors and
Detector Bases
This section describes the compatibility between FACPs, detectors, and detector bases.
Table 5-1. 4098 Detector and Detector Base Compatibility
Detectors
Compatible 2Wire Detector
Base
System
Max. Quantity
of Bases per
Initiating
Circuit
4098-9601
4098-9788
2120 ET/FADM
25
4098-9602
4098-9684
2120 FABT/VPBT
18
4098-9603
(LED base for
2120/4100+ ZAM
20
4098-9605
Heat Detectors
4001
18
4098-9612
Only)
4002
30
4098-9613
4020
30
4098-9614
4100ES/4100U/4100+/4120/UT
30
4098-9615
4004/4005
20
4006
30
4004/4005 High Current
30
(Relay base not used with
4004 and 4005 Low Current
systems)
1
(See Note 1)
4098-9683
Notes:
1.
Relay operation cannot be guaranteed unless it is the only device on that zone.
2.
Panel compatibility identification marker is model number of the module or panel.
3.
Detector compatibility identification marker is model number found on detector label.
4.
For detailed interconnection data, see wiring diagrams for specific panels.
5.
For additional compatibility listings see 579-832 for 2-wire detector compatibility charts.
Continued on next page
5-2
Compatibility, Continued
Compatibility for
4098 Detectors and
Detector Bases
This section describes the compatibility between FACPs, sensors, and sensor bases.
Table 5-2. 4098 Sensor and Sensor Base Compatibility
Sensors
Notes:
1.
2.
For detailed interconnection data,
see wiring diagrams for specific
panels.
Panel compatibility identification
marker is model number of the
module or panel.
3. Sensor compatibility identification
marker is model number found
on sensor label.
4.
5.
Maximum quantity of 4098-9794
Max. Quantity of Devices Per Circuit
4098-9714
4098-9717
4098-9733
4098-9789
4098-9791
4098-9792
MAPNET II:
127 (4020), 127 (4100+)
127 (4120), 127 (4100U), 127 (4100ES)
Addresses 1-127
4098-9714
4098-9717
4098-9733
4098-9789
4098-9792
128 (CDT TrueAlarm)
Addresses 0-127
4098-9714
4098-9717
4098-9733
4098-9714
4098-9733
4098-9754 sensor NOT compatible
with bases that have a RED DOT
located in sensor mounting area.
Sounder Bases, 4098-9795
Multi-Sensor Sounder Bases, and CO
Sounder bases (4098-9798) when
output is coded via MAPNET II/IDNet
control (Temporal Code) is 43.
If coding is performed via 24 VDC or
NAC circuit, use limits specified in
Table 5-2.
Compatible Bases
4098-9789
4098-9791
4098-9792
4098-9793
4098-9797 (4100U/4100ES
only)
4098-9789
4098-9791
4098-9792
4098-9793
4098-9714
4098-9717
4098-9733
4098-9794
(See Note 5)
4098-9798
(See Note 5)
(4100U/4100ES, IDNet only)
4098-9754
4098-9795
(See Note 5)
4098-9796
4098-9754
4098-9792
4098-9789
4098-9791
4098-9794
(See Note 5)
4098-9797
4098-9798
(See Note 5)
4098-9788
4098-9757
4098-9797
4098-9798
(See Note 5)
4098-9746
5-3
IDNET:
250 (4010), 250 (4100U), 250 (4100ES)
Addresses 1-250
IDNET:
200 (4008)
Addresses 1-200
MAPNET II:
127 (4020), 127 (4100+)
127 (4100U), 127 (4100ES), 127 (4120)
Addresses 1-127
IDNET:
250 (4010), 250(4100U), 250 (4100ES)
Addresses 1-250
MAPNET II:
63 (4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120)
Addresses 2 to 126
IDNET:
124 (4010), 124 (4100U), 124 (4100ES)
Addresses 2 to 248
IDNET:
250 (4100U), 250 (4100ES)
Addresses 1-250
IDNET:
250 (4100U/4100ES with 4100-3106)
250 (4010)
Addresses 1-250
IDNET:
250 (4100U), 250 (4100ES)
Addresses 1-250
Maintenance and Testing
Maintenance
The minimal requirement for detector and sensor maintenance should consist of clearing surface
dust by using a vacuum cleaner. Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local
environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber should only be done by a qualified technical
representative.
For service, return to your local branch office.
Testing
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control unit. Dirty or
out-or-range sensors are annunciated by the control unit. This functionality complies with
NFPA 72.
Note:
When testing detectors/sensors, refer to NFPA 72, or contact your local branch office.
CAUTION: Before functionally testing the detectors/sensors, be sure to disconnect
the city connection, releasing devices, and extinguishing systems
(or for the 4020, 4010, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4006, 4008, or 4120 panel,
put the panel in the Walk Test mode).
Preferred Method of
Testing Smoke
Detectors/Sensors
NFPA minimally requires annual functional testing of smoke detectors/sensors at their installed
location. To perform this annual test, use the Solo 336 Aerosol Smoke Dispenser.
IMPORTANT: After testing detectors, reset the fire alarm panel to restore the fire
alarm system to normal status. After testing sensors, you must
clear the peak values.
Test Equipment
Available
The following test equipment is available:

553-760:




553-761:
553-635:
553-805:
553-810:

553-832:
Test and Removal Tool – attached to Mr. Longarm 4 ft. pole (Item #7508) or
6 ft. pole (Item #7512).
Heat Detector/Sensor Removal Adapter (use with 553-760).
Aerosol spray, Simplex Dry Smoke.
Removal Adapter Head Attachment (attaches to the 553-760 tool).
Magnet Tester – attached to Mr. Longarm 4 ft. pole (Item #7508) or 6 ft. pole
(Item #7512).
Ion Detector Test Cable.
Also available are the:







Note:
Gemini Sensitivity Tester (Model 501 or 502).
Solo 336 Aerosol Smoke Dispenser –attached to either the Solo 100 (15 ft.)
telescopic fiberglass pole or the Solo 101 (4 ft.) fiberglass pole.
Solo A4 Aerosol Spray.
Solo Red Cup (709-024). Use to hold the 553-635 Aerosol Spray Can.
Solo (708-021) Adapter for Solo Poles. Use to adapt 553-760 Test and Removal
Tool to the Solo Pole.
TrueTest 801 – Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test Equipment.
Smoke 400 – Smoke aerosol for TrueTest.
The TrueTest 801 is the only tester to be used with the 4098-9797 and 4098-9798 bases.
Continued on next page
5-4
Maintenance and Testing, Continued
Alternate Method for
Testing Sensors
The following test method is suitable for functional checks of sensor bases or QuickConnect
sensors during installation; however, testing with smoke must be performed to comply with NFPA
requirements.
For all sensor bases, position the 553-810 Magnet Tester ½” to ¾” counterclockwise from the
visible LED found on the sensor base, (see the figure below).
For the 4098-9757 QuickConnect2 photo sensor, position the 553-810 Magnet Tester as shown in
Figure 5-2.
Testing a sensor with a magnet reports a value of 255 for actual / peak (exception 4010 panel,
4100U panel and 4100ES panel). Clear the peak value after testing.
Note: For 4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor Bases both photo and heat address
(even and odd) must alarm.
Figure 5-1. Magnet Test Location for 4098-9789, -9791, -9792, -9793, and -9796
Sensor Bases using 553-810 Magnet Tester
Magnetic Test for
Photoelectric
Detectors
The 4098 photoelectric detectors may be tested by placing a magnet above the location indicated
by a “” mark embossed on the cover (see Figure 5-2) for four (4) seconds. Use the Magnetic
Tester (Part No. 553-810), Table 5-3, and the following information to test detectors.
Table 5-3 describes the LED reaction during Normal and MAG TEST modes to the Normal,
More Sensitive, Less Sensitive, and Non-Functional states of the detector.
Continued on next page
5-5
Maintenance and Testing, Continued
Magnetic Test for
Photoelectric
Detectors
Figure 5-2. Magnet Test Location for 4098-9601, -9602, -9603, -9605
Smoke Detectors using 553-810 Magnet Tester
Table 5-3. MAG TEST/Normal Modes - States and Reactions
STATE
Normal Mode
(LED flashes
every 4 secs.)
Normal
More Sensitive
Less Sensitive
X
X
X
MAG TEST Mode
LED Flashes
Quickly 6
Times
LED Flashes
Slowly 4 Times
X
X
X
Non-Functional
Latches in Alarm
Mode/LED stays “ON”
X
X
X
When placing the magnet at the location indicated by a “” mark embossed on the cover, the
visible LED flashes indicating the detector's condition. The following are descriptions of what
you should see when using the MAG TEST.

NORMAL - When in MAG TEST, the detector latches into alarm if the detector is within
calibration range and the visible LED stays ON.

MORE SENSITIVE - When in MAG TEST, if the detector is more sensitive than the
maximum calibration, the visible LED quickly flashes, twice a second. Following the sixth
flash, the detector latches into alarm and the visible LED stays ON.

LESS SENSITIVE - When in MAG TEST, if the detector is less sensitive than the minimum
calibration, the visible LED slowly flashes four times, once every two seconds. Following the
fourth flash, the detector latches into alarm and the visible LED stays ON.

NON-FUNCTIONAL DETECTOR - If the detector is less sensitive than the minimum
allowable sensitivity or if there is a fault in the temperature sensing circuit (4098-9602), the
visible LED does not flash normally. When in MAG TEST, the visible LED slowly flashes
four times, once every two seconds. After the fourth flash, the detector does NOT latch into
alarm and the LED stops flashing and turns OFF.
If the detector is out of the normal operating range, it should be cleaned. If the detector still
indicates as other than normal sensitivity, replace the detector.
Continued on next page
5-6
Maintenance and Testing, Continued
Magnetic Test for
Ionization Detectors
The 4098 Ionization Detectors may be tested with a magnet to verify proper operation of the
Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Note: When ionization detectors alarm, the red LED indicator activates and latches into the
ON position.
Place a magnet against the detector’s side (over the location marked by a “” on the head of the
ionization detector) and hold for ten seconds to activate an internal reed switch. Use the Magnet
Tester (Part No. 553-810).
Ion Detector
Sensitivity Test
Plug the 553-832 Ion Detector Test Cable into the Detector’s sensitivity voltage pins located on
the Ion Detector Head. Perform the following steps to test the Ion detector’s sensitivity:
1.
Connect a 10M/V digital voltmeter to the 553-832 test cable, connect the negative terminal of
the voltmeter to the red wire of the test cable and connect the positive terminal of the
voltmeter to the white wire of the test cable. The black wire of the 553-832 test cable is not
used.
2.
The voltage measured by the voltmeter should be within 0.2 and 0.8 volts. Detectors
outputting a voltage outside this range should be cleaned or replaced.
3.
If the Ion Detector voltage output is outside of the range, it should be removed and cleaned as
described in the cleaning section. Re-check the voltage measurement on the Ion Detector; if
the Ion Detector is still outside the voltage range after cleaning, replace the device.
5-7
Cleaning
Introduction
If the device’s sensitivity is other than what is marked on the device’s label, clean the device using
a source of oil-free, filtered, compressed air such as Dust-Off, Tech Duster, etc.
CAUTION: Notify appropriate building personnel prior to removing any
detectors/sensors from service.
Photoelectric Smoke
Detector/Sensor
Cleaning
Blow the compressed air through the open vents around the device so that air enters and cleans the
black chamber cover/insect screen assembly (Part No. 677-224) located beneath the white
protective cover.
If the device’s sensitivity is still other than what is marked on the device’s label, replace the
device.
Special
Considerations for
Ion Detectors and
Sensors
Note:
Do not remove the Ion Detector/ Sensor protective cover.
Blow compressed air through the open vents around the device so that air enters and cleans the
black chamber cover assembly located beneath the white protective cover. If the device sensitivity
is still outside the marked range replace the device and return the failed device to 130 Perinton
Parkway, Fairport, NY 14450-9199.
IMPORTANT: Once cleaned, the detector/sensor should be tested with smoke per
NFPA 72.
5-8
Trouble Indications
Trouble Indications
for TrueAlarm
Sensors
The TrueAlarm smoke sensor is a measuring device that sends data regarding smoke density to the
4010, 4020, 4100, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4008, and 2120 fire alarm control panels (FACPs).
The TrueAlarm heat sensor operates in a similar fashion, but sends temperature data instead of
smoke density data. The FACP uses this data to determine whether a trouble has occurred.
The TrueAlarm sensor has two automatic trouble indications:


Dirty
Excessively Dirty
A “Smoke Sensor Dirty” trouble condition is reported any time the average value on an individual
sensor reaches a set threshold value. At this time, the FACP is still compensating for environmental
factors and is holding the set sensitivity level.
A “Smoke Sensor is Excessively Dirty” trouble condition is reported anytime the average value of
an individual sensor reaches a slightly higher set threshold level. At this point, the FACP can no
longer compensate for environmental factors, and the sensitivity level may begin to drift.
Although an “excessively dirty” trouble is reported, the sensor continues to operate and reports an
alarm condition when one is detected.
In addition to the two automatic trouble conditions, the FACPs have digital pseudo points that
must be turned ON to allow a TrueAlarm sensor that is close to being a dirty sensor to report as if
it is “almost dirty.” This is useful when maintenance is being scheduled for dirty sensors, as it
provides a means of seeing if other sensors are approaching a dirty state.
The table below shows your responsibilities when certain trouble indications occur.
Table 5-4. TrueAlarm Troubles and Descriptions
Trouble Indication
Description
Almost Dirty
Using the front panel keys, it is possible for a technical representative to turn
ON a digital pseudo point in the FACP that allows an “almost dirty” sensor to
report a trouble. Although the “almost dirty” sensor is holding its sensitivity
level, you can schedule maintenance for the sensor before the dirty sensor
trouble occurs.
Dirty
A “dirty” indication means that the sensor is holding its sensitivity level, but that
you should schedule maintenance for the sensor. Clean the sensor as required
and, when necessary, call your local branch office for service.
Excessively Dirty
The “excessively dirty” indication means that the sensor is no longer
compensating for dirt and dust. Because nuisance alarms are possible with this
condition, sensors must be cleaned or replaced immediately. When necessary,
call your local branch office for service.
Self-Test Abnormal
All FACP system sensors are automatically tested once every minute. When a
sensor fails to report properly to the FACP, a “Self-Test Abnormal” condition
occurs. Since the sensor is not working properly, it must be replaced. Replace
it, or call your local branch office for service.
Expired
The FACP panel generates an Expired trouble to notify the user that a
replacement sensor is required. To clear the trouble, a new CRS with a valid
date must be installed, and a hardware reset of the FACP panel must be
performed.
Continued on next page
5-9
Trouble Indications, Continued
Table 5-5. Sensor’s Analog Value
The panel will automatically indicate when a sensor is out of its sensitivity calibration. If
the sensor has an analog value below what is listed in the table, the sensor is within its
sensitivity setting.
Sensor’s Analog Value
Type
Almost Dirty Dirty
Excessively Dirty
Photo
115
120
135
Ion
135
140
155
To view a Sensor’s analog value, refer to your panels operating instructions
5-10
Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log
Fire Alarm
Trouble and
Maintenance Log
Date
Time
Event/Description
5-11
Initials
Index
2 2120 CDT System
address setting, 3-5
2-Wire Relay Base Connections, 2-12
4 4010 System
address setting, 3-5
4020 System
address setting, 3-5
4100+ System
address setting, 3-5
4100U/ 4100ES System
address setting, 3-5
4120 System
address setting, 3-5
4-Wire Base Connections, 2-13
A Accessories, 4-1
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, 2-2
B Base compatibility, 5-2
Bases
4098, 2-8
wiring, 2-10
C Cautions and Warnings, iv
Cleaning, 5-8
CO Sensor Bases, 1-8
CRS, replacing, 3-10, 3-11
Common Code Requirements, 2-8
Compatibility, 5-1
Copyrights, iii
CRS
replacing, 3-10, 3-11
D Detector compatibility, 5-2
Detectors
placement, 1-5
Wall and Ceiling Mounted, 1-4
where not to place, 1-6
where to place, 1-3
E Environmental conditions, 1-6
H Heat Detectors
4098, 2-5
fixed temperature, 2-5
LED Base Connections, 2-14
models, 2-6
ROR Temperature, 2-5
specifications, 2-6
types, 2-5
HVAC Systems, 1-3
I IDNet Addresses, 3-6
Ionization Detectors
testing, 5-7
1 IN-1
Isolator Sensor Bases
connections, 3-9
M Magnetic Test, 5-5
Maintenance, 5-4
MAPNET Addresses, 3-6
Mulit-Sensor Bases
DIP Switch settings, 3-7
Multi-Sensor Bases, 3-7
N NFPA 70, 1-3
NFPA 72, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-2, 2-8, 3-1
NFPA 90A, 1-3
O Operation
principles of, 1-8
P Photoelectric Detectors
testing, 5-5
Programmer reports, 3-5
Q QuickConnect Smoke Sensors, 3-12
DIP Switch settings, 3-13
specifications, 3-12
R Rate-of-rise, 1-8
Relay module
2098-9737 wiring, 4-2
4098-9822 wiring, 4-3
accessories, 4-1
installation, 4-4
Remote LED module, 4-4
S Sensor base compatibility, 5-3
Sensor Compatibility, 5-3
Sensors
Wall and Ceiling Mounted, 1-4
where not to place, 1-6
where to place, 1-3
Smoke Detector Application, 1-2
Smoke Detectors
4098, 2-2
limitations, 2-2
mounting, 2-4
photoelectric, 1-8
specifications, 2-3
Smoke Sensor Application, 1-2
Smoke Sensors
photoelectric, 1-8
Style B or D Initiating Circuits, 2-11
T Test Equipment, 5-4
Testing, 5-4
detectors and sensors, 5-4
thermistors, 1-8
Trademarks, iii
Trouble and Maintenance Log, 5-10
Trouble Indications, 5-9
TrueAlarm Concepts, 1-8
TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors,
3-12
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases
4098, 3-3
setting the address, 3-4
IN-2 2
specifications, 3-3
wiring, 3-8
TrueAlarm Sensors
DIP Switch location, 3-4
special applications, 3-2
TrueAlarm Sensors, mounting, 3-2
574-709
Rev. T
© 2008-2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. Specifications and other information were current as of publication and are subject to change without notice.
4
4906 Devices Installation Instructions
MC12-5-180
TrueAlert Non-Addressable, Multi-Candela
Notification Appliances Installation Instructions
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION REFERENCE (See Page 4 for Detailed Product Specifications)
Type
Mount
Model
Wall
Strobe
(V/O)
Ceiling
Color
4906-9101
Red
4906-9103
White
4906-9102
4906-9104
Red
White
4906-9127
Red
4906-9129
White
4906-9128
Red
4906-9130
White
4906-9151
Red
4906-9153
White
Wall
Horn/
Strobe
(A/V)
Ceiling
Wall
Speaker/
Visible
(S/V)
4906-9154*
Ceiling
White
4906-9157**
Operation
Compatibility
Strobes:
Reverse polarity notification
appliance with output selectable for
15, 30, 75, or 110 candela, and
synchronized 1 Hz flash
Note: Strobes provide the polar
light dispersion requirements of
UL1971 and ULC-S526.
A/Vs:
 IDNet NAC Extender models
4009-9201(CA) & 4009-9301
 SmartSync Control Module
(SCM) 4905-9938
 Simplex Fire Alarm Control
Panels (FACPs) providing
SmartSync control NACs
V/Os, per above and:
 Strobe Synch Modules
4905-9914 & 4905-9922
 Simplex FACPs providing
strobe synch NACs
Speakers:
 Listed fire alarm audio NACs
A/V Horns:
Built-in electronic horn operating
under SmartSync control
Speakers:
Wired separately from strobes;
selectable for 25 or 70.7 VRMS;
selectable for ¼ W, ½ W, 1 W, or
2W
*Note: 4906-9154 is not ULC listed
**Note: 4906-9157 is ULC only
CEILING MOUNTING REFERENCE NOTES (see Figure 1)
1. V/O surface mounted boxes REQUIRE either Adapter Plate 4905-9910, or optional Wire Guard 4905-9926.
2. Before Attaching strobe assembly to Housing: Select desired S/V and V/O candela and attach V/O NAC wiring.
3. For S/Vs, run strobe assembly wire leads through the housing opening and attach to the terminal block assembly;
Red to POS, Black to NEG. (See Figure 5 for more detail.)
4. Strobe Assembly Mounting: After attaching the housing to the box using two supplied screws, align the mounting tabs of
the strobe assembly to the housing slots and snap them into place.
5. On model 4906-9157, the gasket for acoustic performance must be temporarily pushed to the side to feed the wires
through.
For suspended ceiling mount, use T-Bar
Box Hanger; ERICO No. 512 (shown)
or equal; use No. 512A (adjustable depth)
for S/V boxes (not supplied with appliance)
CAUTION: For S/V mounting, do not bring conduit
through the rear of the electrical boxes. For each type,
recess flush mount boxes ¼” (6.4 mm) maximum from
wall surface. Tighten screws snugly, do not overtighten.
Clip and screw
supplied with hanger
4” Square electrical
box, 1½” deep
Single gang box, with 1½” extension
ring (not supplied
1½” deep min.
with appliance)
(not supplied
with appliance) Wiring access slot
IMPORTANT
See Note 1
Strobe
housing
Strobe
assembly
Housing
slots
4” Electrical box,
1½” minimum
depth (not supplied
with appliance)
FIRE
for strobe red & black
wire leads
IMPORTANT
See Note 5
Mount using the two
supplied #6-32, ½” screws
Mounting tabs
V/O
NOTE: When A/V box is
surface mounted, Box
Extension 4905-9915
(white) or 4905-9916 (red)
is recommended (not shown)
S/V
Strobe
assembly
A/V
Mount with two supplied #8-32, 1¾” screws
cross-corner. Note that box orientation
determines final appliance orientation
Figure 1. Ceiling Mounting Reference
Location Reference. Location and quantity of Appliances required must conform to the applicable local standards and guidelines (the
National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72); ULC Standard CAN/ULC-S524, Installation of Fire Alarm Systems; the appropriate
model building codes, etc.) and specific requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). These Notification Appliances
are not intended for installation within hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code (NEC) or NFPA.
SAFETY. Always install, maintain, and test Notification Appliances within their specifications. Failure to follow all safety precautions
and instructions may result in loss of life and property due to non-functioning Appliances. Some Appliances use high voltage. To avoid
electrical hazards and damage to appliances, disconnect electrical power for the Notification Appliance Circuit at the control panel
before installing, repairing, or internally adjusting any Appliances. Even with electrical power removed, some Appliances (such as
strobes) store a high voltage charge that can cause injury resulting in death from electrical shock. Do not touch exposed circuitry.
© 2007, 2009-2012 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved.
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
All specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice.
579-548 Rev. H
WALL MOUNT REFERENCE (see Figure 2)
NOTE: For each type, recess flush mount boxes ¼” (6.35 mm) maximum from wall surface. Tighten screws snugly, do not
overtighten.
Wall-Mount V/O & A/V
4
Two screw holes
for double-gang
mounting (screws
are not included
with appliance)
3
2
1
Two screw holes for
single-gang mounting (screws
are not included with appliance)
Four screw holes for 4” square box
mounting (two screws are supplied)
Single gang, double gang, or 4” square electrical
box (shown), 1½” min. depth (supplied separately)
IMPORTANT ! INSTALLATION
MOUNTING HEIGHT REFERENCE
Bottom of lens is
either even with, or
slightly above bottom
of compatible boxes
NFPA 72 requires that the
entire lens be not less than
80" and not greater than
96" above the finished floor
4” square box mount, use two
supplied #8-32, 1¼” screws
80" (2.03 m)
minimum
V/O &
A/V
Housing
A
Electrical
box outline
For surface mounted boxes, optional
Surface Mount Skirts are recommended:
4905-9937 (red) or 4905-9940 (white)
A/V or V/O Cover (A/V shown)
CAUTION: For S/V,
do not bring conduit
through the rear of the
electrical boxes.
Wall-Mount V/O & A/V
Mount using two supplied
#8-32, 1¼” screws
2975-9145
box outline
4" square box
outline
LC
4" (102 mm)
1½" (38 mm)
82" (2.1 m)
minimum
See NFPA
note above
78½ (2 m)
minimum
S/V
4” Square electrical
box, 1½” deep with
1½” extension ring
(supplied separately)
NOTE: For surface mounted S/V boxes,
Surface Mount Skirts ARE REQUIRED:
4905-9946 (red) or 4905-9947 (white)
A
Wall-Mount S/V
A To remove cover, press side snap releases
(one each side) one at a time with a flat-tip
screwdriver while pulling up the cover
S/V Cover
Figure 2. Wall Mounting Reference
WIRING TERMINATION REFERENCE (see Figure 3)
STROBE +
SPKR-
E
F
25V
G
TB1
D
STROBE +
TB1
SPKR -
SPKR+
STROBE -
CKT -
Jumper
J1
TB2
CKT +
C
CKT -
70.7V
CKT +
Wall Mount S/V (Wiring
is same for Ceiling Mount S/V)
B
Wiring Access Slot
Ceiling Mount A/V
A
Ceiling Mount
V/O
J1
Wall Mount V/O & A/V
CKT STROBE -
CKT +
Figure 3. Wiring Termination Reference
2
SPKR +
NAC WIRING INFORMATION (see Figure 4)
1. Refer to the fire alarm control panel (FACP)
documentation for additional information.
2. NAC wiring connections are supervised and powerlimited by the FACP.
3. Maximum of 35 appliances per circuit.
4. Maximum resistance between appliances is 30 ohms.
5. For audio/voice systems, speaker circuits are wired
separately from strobe circuits.
6. Strip lead insulation to ⅜” (9.5 mm) maximum.
+
Strobe and
Horn/Strobe
NAC Output
Regulated 24 DC, 16 to 33 VDC
maximum operating range
7.
8.
9.
Wire size is 18 to 12 AWG (0.82 mm2 to 3.31 mm2).
Class B NAC, End-of-Line Resistors. When
connecting the last appliance on a NAC, connect an
end-of-line resistor harness to the terminals. Refer to
FACP documentation for correct value.
Speaker factory setting is 25 VRMS, ½ W (J1 to Tap
E). Select speaker wattage setting per Figure 5.
Note: An incorrect tap setting may damage the
speaker.
NOTE: Break wiring at in/out connections.
Do not loop wiring under terminals.
S/V
-
CKT +
FACP
CKT +
CKT -
CKT -
V/O
A/V
S/V
Class B Strobe/
Horn/Strobe NAC
End-of-Line
Resistor Harness
STROBE +
STROBE +
STROBE -
STROBE -
SPKR SPKR
+
SPKR SPKR
+
Speaker +
NAC Output
25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS
Class B Speaker
NAC End-of-Line
Resistor Harness
Audio/Voice System speaker wiring per FACP requirements.
NOTE: Set speaker taps same as NAC output, 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS
Figure 4. NAC Wiring Reference
SETTING STROBE CANDELA & SPEAKER TAP (see Figure 5)
NOTE: Strobe intensity is factory set for 15 cd, select higher intensity by jumper position (30, 75, or 110 cd)
15
30
75
110
Strobe Intensity Viewing
Slot Location
110
75
30
15
Wall-Mount V/O,
A/V, and S/V
Candela Selection
Ceiling-Mount V/O,
A/V, and S/V Candela
Selection Jumper
Ceiling V/O,
A/V, & S/V
Wall-Mount
S/V
Wall-Mount
V/O, & A/V
Tap E
Tap G
Candela Selection Receptacle
Tap A
J1
25 VRMS Input
Jumper J1
to Tap
Speaker
Connection
Details
D
E*
F
G
POS Strobe
NEG Connection
Tap
Setting
70.7 VRMS Input
Jumper J1
to Tap
¼W
½ W*
1W
2 W **
A
B
C
D
Tap
Setting
¼W
½W
1W
2 W **
* Factory setting.
** Only the 2-Watt setting may be used for ULC Fire
Alarm applications.
Figure 5. Strobe Candela and Speaker Tap Reference
STI GUARDS, UL LISTED COMPATIBILITY REFERENCE
Sound Loss,
Required Surface Mount Skirt
A/V or S/V
(See Instructions 574-790)
STI-1210D (Surface)
41.7%
-3.7 dBA
STI-1210E (Flush)
31%
-4.9 dBA
Wall V/O: 4906-9101 & 4906-9103
4905-9937 (red) or
Wall A/V: 4906-9127 & 4906-9129
4905-9940 (white)
STI-1215 (Flush)
33.3%
-5.7 dBA
STI-1217 (Surface) See Note 3
30.7%
-6.3 dBA
STI-1217 (Surface)
21.5%
NA
Ceiling V/O: 4906-9102 & 4906-9104
None
STI-1217 (Flush)
39.4%
NA
STI-1210D (Surface)
34.3%
-1.5 dBA
4905-9946 (red) or
Wall S/V: 4906-9151 & 4906-9153
4905-9947 (white)
STI-1210E (Flush)
31%
-3.3 dBA
Ceiling S/V: 4906-9154
STI-1217 (Flush)
23.6%
-1.4 dBA
None
Notes: 1. Guards are not listed for ULC applications. 2. Refer to STI Installation Manuals packed with each guard for mounting and maintenance
instructions. 3. STI adhesive backed spacer to mounting surface gasket required; cover to spacer gasket is not used
Model
STI Guard (Mounting Type)
Light Loss
3
Table 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Strobe and A/V Current; Maximum Operating Current @ 16 VDC
(*A/V current below is with horn steady on)
Wall Mount
A/V*
General Specifications
Candela
Rating
Wall Mount
V/O & S/V
Ceiling Mount
A/V*
Ceiling Mount V/O
& S/V
15 cd
60 mA
75 mA
86 mA
75 mA
30 cd
94 mA
116 mA
132 mA
125 mA
75 cd
186 mA
221 mA
250 mA
233 mA
110 cd
252 mA
285 mA
320 mA
316 mA
A/V Horn Sound Pressure Level Measurements
(UL464 Reverberant Room Testing; ULC-S525 Anechoic Room Testing)
ULC-S525 at 3 m
UL464 at 10 ft
Horn
Rated Voltage Range
Strobe Flash Rate 1 Hz
NAC Loading
Temperature Range
Mode
Wall A/V
Ceiling A/V
Wall A/V
Ceiling A/V
Steady
88 dBA
90 dBA
86 dBA
87 dBA
Coded
94 dBA
98 dBA
82 dBA
83 dBA
Regulated 24 DC,
16 to 33 VDC
Humidity Range
35 synchronized strobes
maximum per NAC
32° to 120° F
(0° to 49°C)
10% to 93%, non-condensing at
100 °F (38° C)
Connections; two
Terminal blocks for 18 AWG to
wires per terminal for
12 AWG (0.82 mm2 to 3.3 mm2)
in/out wiring
Horn Dispersion: SPL decreases by 3 dB at an angular displacement of 40° and by 6 dB at an angular displacement of 50° both
horizontally and vertically. With the 4905-9838 Sound Damper installed, measurements decrease 5 to 6 dB.
Speaker Output Ratings
(UL1480 Reverberant Room Testing; ULC-S541 Anechoic Room Testing)
UL1480 at 10 ft
Voltage
Jumper
J1
to Tap
Tap
Setting
In Watts
70.7
VRMS
A
B
C
D
¼W
½W
1W
2W
76 dBA
79 dBA
82 dBA
¼W
½W
1W
2W
76 dBA
25
VRMS
D
E
F
G
Wall-S/V
all
models
85 dBA
79 dBA
82 dBA
85 dBA
Speaker Specifications
ULC-S541 at 3 m
4906-9254,
4906-9255,
4906-9256
Ceiling S/V
Wall S/V
All models
4906-9157
Ceiling s/v for ULC
76 dBA
79 dBA
82 dBA
85 dBA
77 dBA
80 dBA
83 dBA
86 dBA *
80.9 dBA
84.1 dBA
87.3 * dBA
90.2 * dBA
76 dBA
79 dBA
82 dBA
85 dBA
77 dBA
80 dBA
83 dBA
86 dBA *
81.6 dBA
84.3 dBA
87.1 * dBA
89.7 * dBA
Input Voltage
Power Taps
25 or 70.7 VRMS;
for connection to
conventional fire alarm
audio circuits
¼, ½, 1, and 2 W
Speaker Frequency Response
Fire Alarm
General Signaling
400 to 4000 Hz
125 to 12 kHz
* Only marked settings may be used for ULC fire alarm applications.
Speaker Dispersion: SPL decreases by 3 dB at an angular displacement of 30° and by 6 dB at an angular displacement of 55°.
Table 2. STROBE POLAR OUTPUT (ref. UL 1971 and ULC-S526 room temperature test results)
Wall Mount Light Output at any Candela Setting
Vertical Dispersion
Horizontal Dispersion
X-Angle
UL Min.
Typical
Y-Plane
UL Min.
Typical
0
100%
322%
0
100%
320%
5
90%
217%
±5
90%
214%
10
90%
168%
±10
90%
177%
15
90%
179%
±15
90%
175%
20
90%
210%
±20
90%
174%
25
90%
184%
±25
90%
170%
30
90%
149%
±30
75%
169%
35
65%
172%
±35
75%
157%
40
46%
189%
±40
75%
151%
45
34%
203%
±45
75%
138%
50
27%
152%
±50
55%
130%
55
22%
166%
±55
45%
121%
60
18%
166%
±60
40%
117%
65
16%
164%
±65
35%
109%
70
15%
163%
±70
35%
105%
75
13%
159%
±75
30%
98%
80
12%
138%
±80
30%
90%
85
12%
113%
±85
25%
78%
90
12%
88%
±90
25%
67%
Ceiling Mount Light Output at any Candela Setting
Vertical Dispersion
Horizontal Dispersion
X-Angle
UL Min.
Typical
Y-Plane
UL Min.
Typical
0
100%
327%
0
100%
343%
±5
90%
293%
±5
90%
160%
±10
90%
281%
±10
90%
175%
±15
90%
197%
±15
90%
129%
±20
90%
168%
±20
90%
145%
±25
90%
142%
±25
90%
165%
±30
75%
143%
±30
75%
152%
±35
75%
155%
±35
75%
144%
±40
75%
156%
±40
75%
139%
±45
75%
134%
±45
75%
129%
±50
55%
115%
±50
55%
129%
±55
45%
104%
±55
45%
123%
±60
40%
103%
±60
40%
111%
±65
35%
98%
±65
35%
120%
±70
35%
87%
±70
35%
103%
±75
30%
90%
±75
30%
75%
±80
30%
96%
±80
30%
83%
±85
25%
96%
±85
25%
70%
±90
25%
83%
±90
25%
47%
Limitations: Notification Appliances do not provide their own power. They receive power from the Fire Alarm System. If
power is not supplied to the Notification Appliances (for whatever reason), the Notification Appliances will not provide a visible and/or
audible warning. THEREFORE, BACK-UP POWER SUPPLIES, OR OTHER BACK-UP POWER SOURCES, ARE REQUIRED FOR
THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. Visible Notification Appliances provide a specific rated output light level and must meet the
requirements of the intended protected area(s). Although these strobe equipped appliances meet the current UL and ULC-S526 standards
for light intensity, the protected area(s) may have walls, doors, carpeting, furniture, insulation, or other obstacles that reduce or even
block the light. For all applications, the light output must provide enough intensity to alert occupants of the protected area(s) including
those occupants that are sleeping. If these occupants cannot see the effect of the Notification Appliances within the protected area(s), you
must increase the intensity of the light output or add additional Notification Appliances so that the occupants can see the effect of the
Notification Appliances when activated.
579-548 Rev. H